2004-2005 Ssang Yong Rexton Y220 Owner Manual

FOREWORD
This manual has been prepared to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of
your new REXTON and to provide important safety information. We urge you to read it
carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure the most enjoyable, safe, and
trouble-free operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your SSANGYONG dealer knows your ve-
hicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction.
We would like to take this opportunity to thank you for choosing REXTON and assure
you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction.
This manual should be considered as a permanent part of your vehicle, and must re-
main with the vehicle at the time of resale.
PYUNGTAEK, KOREA
GETtheMANUALS.org
New Rexton00_EN_LHD_서유럽지역.P65 3 2004-06-11, ¿ÀÀü 9:19
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Please read this manual and follow the CAUTION All information, illustrations, and specifica-
instructions carefully. tions in this manual are based on the latest
CAUTION indicates a potentially
: This is the safety alert symbol used product information available at the time of
hazardous situation which, if not
to alert you to potential hazards publication.
avoided, may result in minor or
including injuries or damage to your
moderate injuries, or damage to Ssangyong reserves the right to change
vehicle or other property. Obey all
your vehicle or other property. specifications or designs at any time without
safety messages that follow this
notice and without incurring obligation.
symbol.
Throughout this manual, you will find special NOTE This vehicle may not comply with the
notations: NOTE indicates information which standards or regulations of other countries.
• Warning will assist you with maintenance or Before attempting to register this vehicle in
• Caution other instructions concerning your any other country, check all applicable
• Note vehicle. regulations and make any necessary
modifications.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially
* : The asterisk in this manual signi-
fies an item of equipment that is not
This manual describes options and trim
available at the time of publication. Some of
hazardous situation which, if not included on all vehicles. Such items the items covered may not apply to your
avoided, could result in serious include engine options, model vehicle. Contact your Ssangyong dealer for
injury or death. variations specific to one country, information on option and trim availability.
and optional equipment.
Non-Ssangyong Genuine parts and
accessories have not been examined or
approved by Ssangyong. We can not certify
the suitability or safety of non-Ssangyong
Genuine parts and accessories and are not
liable for damage caused by their use.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. BEFORE DRIVING YOUR CAR ................................................................................................................ 1-1

2. STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................................... 2-1
3. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS .......................................................................................................... 3-1
4. SEAT AND RESTRAINT ............................................................................................................................. 4-1
5. VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ............................................................................. 5-1
6. TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 6-1
7. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ...................................................................................................................... 7-1
8. SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 8-1
9. VEHICLE CARE ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1
10. SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE DATA .................................................................................................. 10-1
11. INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................ 11-1
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR CAR
GETtheMANUALS.org
New Rexton01_EN_LHD_서유럽지역.p65 1 2004-06-11, ¿ÀÀü 9:19
1–2 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR CAR
RUNNING-IN PERIOD BEFORE ENTERING THE CAR BEFORE DRIVING OFF

There are no particular brake-in rules for • Ensure that windows, outside rear view • Be sure you understand your car and
your new Rexton. However, following a few mirrors and lights are clean, undamaged its equipment and how to operate it
simple precautions for the first few hundred and unobstructed. safely.
kilometers can add to the good future perfor- • Visually note inflation condition of tyres. • Adjust your seating position.
mance, economy and long life of your • Check that all lights, switches and con- • Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Rexton. trols work properly. • Ensure that all occupants of the car
• Check the area behind the vehicle if you have fastened their seat belts.
• Do not race the engine.
are about to reverse. • Check the operation of the warning
• While driving, keep your engine speed
• Check under the vehicle for leaks. lights when the ignition key is turned to
(RPM) below the red zone.
• Check the engine oil level and other fluid/ “ON” position.
• Avoid full-throttle starts.
oil levels in engine compartment. • Check all gauges.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies.
• Release the parking brake and ensure
This will allow the breaks to bed in properly.
that the brake warning light goes out.
• Drive at varying speeds, trying not to
“strain” the engine.
WARNING
• Refrain from towing a trailer or an other
vehicle. Check to ensure that all light, signal-
• Avoid harsh operations such as abrupt ing systems and warning indicators
start, sudden acceleration and prolonged are in working order.
high speed driving.
These operations not only have a detri-
mental effect on the engine but also
cause excessive fuel and oil consump-
tion, which could result in the malfunc-
tion of the engine components.
Especially, avoid full-throttle acceleration
in low gear.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR CAR 1–3
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

KEY SYSTEM (REKES)*
Two keys are provided which fit all key cyl- 1. LOCK button: Locks all doors. Battery replacement
inders. Keep one of the two keys as a Tail lamps will flash twice. If the LED fails to illuminate, the transmitter
spare. 2. UNLOCK button: Unlocks all doors. can still be used for a while. However, it is
Tail lamps will flash once. an indication that a new battery is needed.
WARNING
NOTE Use a CR 2025 battery for replacement and
Do not leave the key with the vehicle.
Do not get the transmitter wet. adopt the following replacement procedure:
• Lock the vehicle.
• Take the key with you. Avoid shock to the transmitter. 1. Unscrew the screw from the rear cover.
If you lost the transmitter and re- 2. Remove the battery, taking care to avoid
placed with new, the correct code touching the circuit board or other com-
must be newly programmed for the ponents.
operation.
GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCKING/UNLOCKING DOORS
WITH KEY (DRIVER’S DOOR)
3. Fit the new battery, ensuring that cor- CAUTION
rect polarity is maintained (positive (+)
Transmitter can be damaged.
side facing down towards the base).
• Do not reverse the polarity.
Finger marks will adversely affect bat- Close
• Avoid dropping.
tery life ; if possible, avoid touching the
• Do not place heavy objects on it.
flat surfaces of the battery and wipe
• Keep transmitter away from water Open
them clean before fitting.
and direct sun light.
4. Reassemble the cover of the transmit-
ter.
5. Check the transmitter operation. NOTE
If transmitter gets wet, wipe it with Front doors can be locked or unlocked
CAUTION soft cloth. from outside by using the key.
Used lithium battery can be a haz- Operational distance of REKES is To lock all doors, turn the key towards the
ard to health and the environment. about 5 m to the vehicle. rear of the vehicle.
• Do not dispose of used battery with Use only designated battery. To unlock all doors, turn the key towards the
household waste. When the REKES is replaced with front of the vehicle.
• Check with local authority or new, reprogram the code from our To open the door, pull the door handle while
Ssangyong Dealer for safe dis- service networks. the door is not unlocked.
posal facilities. The life of battery will be reduced a
lot if you use very frequently or re- CAUTION
placed with poor battery. Lock all doors and tailgate when
Operate the REKES when all the leaving the vehicle unattended.
doors are closed. If a door is opened,
the telltale lamps will not flash when
the button is pressed.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING

DOOR LOCK BUTTON SYSTEM
WARNING Automatic door locking
Never leave children or animals un- All the doors will be automatically locked
attended in the vehicle. when you drive over 50 km/h while the doors
• They can move the vehicle unex- are unlocked.
pectedly.
• They can be suffocated in espe- Door unlocking
cially hot weather. If you press the door unlock switch or pull
the inside door handle, all the doors will be
unlocked automatically (Available from
driver’s seat).
Each door can be locked or unlocked from The doors locked by automatic door locking
the inside by pushing or pulling the door lock system will be automatically unlocked when
button. the vehicle is over a certain speed and at
1. Unlocking the event of collision.
2. Locking
When you press the button on the CAUTION
driver’s or passenger’s door, buttons on Automatic door locking system may
all doors will be positioned to the lock not function when the door or/and
(Door lock buttons can be positioned to body is deformed by collision.
the lock only when all doors are closed).
3. To open the door from the inside, lift the
NOTE
door lock button and pull the inside
handle. All doors will be automatically
locked again if you drive over 50km/
h when auto door locking system is
released.
GETtheMANUALS.org
UNLOCKING SWITCH ON UNLOCKING SWITCH ON

DRIVER’S DOOR PASSENGER’S DOOR TAILGATE LOCK BUTTON
To unlock all doors in driver’s seat, press the To unlock all doors in passenger’s seat, Tailgate can be locked or unlocked from the
inner side of the switch. press the outer side of the switch. inside by pushing or pulling the tailgate lock
button.
NOTE
Tailgate and tailgate window will be
locked or unlocked simultaneously.
GETtheMANUALS.org
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM*
The Immobilizer System provides an addi- Transponder code
tional theft deterrent to the vehicle in which The 2 keys have respectively coded
it is installed and prevents it from being transponders.
started by unauthorized persons.
When lost the keys
When the ignition key with integrated tran-
sponder is turned to the ON position, ECU When lost the keys, you have to erase the
(Engine Control Unit) checks the crypto code transponder key from the engine control unit.
of key and, if correct, allow your Rexton to To prevent the vehicle from being stolen by
start the engine. lost keys, contact our service networks.
If you can not start the engine, have the When the transponder has damaged
system checked by Ssangyong Dealer. Immobilizer indicator*
When the transponder has damaged, you
The valid key for a vehicle equipped with a must replace it with new one and register This indicator indicates the operating condi-
Immobilizer System is a mechanical ignition new code on engine control unit at our ser- tions of immobilizer system.
key with integrated transponder, which is vice network. Otherwise, the engine cannot If this indicator flickers, it may indicate that
electronically coded. The transponder is be started. there is something wrong in the immobilizer
placed invisibly in the ignition key. system.
Only valid ignition keys can be used to start CAUTION

the engine. Brief lighting of this indicator means
The immobilizer system isolates fuel injection that the communication between ig-
control system in ECU (electric control unit) nition key and engine control unit is
when invalid keys are used. in normal condition.
If the indicator remains flickering,
have the immobilizer system checked
by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Operation.
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING THE DOOR FROM

OUTSIDE
WARNING CAUTION
In any cases, the immobilizer system • Do not drop or shock to the tran-
can not be removed from the vehicle. sponder in the key, or it could be
If you attempt to remove it and dam- damaged.
age the system, starting will be • If the transponder has damaged,
impossible, so never attempt to replace the key from Ssangyong
remove, damage or modify it. Dealer and register the code to the
And, remote engine starter can not engine control unit to be started.
start the vehicle equipped with immo- • Be careful not to lose your key, or
bilizer system. So never install a re- the vehicle could be stolen. When
mote engine starter. you lost the key, erase the lost To open the door, pull the outside door handle
key’s transponder code from the outward.
engine control unit in Ssangyong
Dealer to prevent the vehicle from CAUTION
being stolen by lost key.
The door should be already unlocked.
• When you have to replace the en-
gine control unit, replace all tran-
sponders at the same time.
• Immobilizer system could be
inspected, replaced, serviced, and
coded only in Ssangyong Dealer. And
the only authorized personnel in
Ssangyong Dealer could work on it.
• When you erase the code or register
an extra key, please attend on the site.
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING THE DOOR FROM

INSIDE OPENING THE TAILGATE
WARNING
Exhaust gases are poisonous.
Do not drive with the tailgate open
to avoid exhaust gas in passenger
compartment.
To open the door, pull the inside door handle To open the tailgate, lift the tailgate handle
inward. upward.
CAUTION CAUTION
The door should be already un- The door and tailgate should be al-
locked. ready unlocked.
However, even though the doors are
locked, door opening is available
from driver’s side and all doors will WARNING
be unlocked. An open tailgate while vehicle is in
motion could obscure rearward vi-
sion, resulting in an accident.
Do not travel with the tailgate open.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WINDOW SWITCH (DRIVER’S

CHILD SECURITY DOOR LOCKS SEAT)
WARNING
Children in rear seats can open rear
doors.
• Move child security door lock
latch to lock position.
CAUTION
Inside door handle could be dam-
aged.
Child security locking helps prevent rear • Do not pull inside door handle 1. Driver’s window
doors from being accidentally opened by when using child security door 2. Passenger’s window
children in the car. locks. 3. Rear left window
Child security door locks are provided with 4. Rear right window
both rear doors.
You may operate the power windows when
When the child-safe lever is in “LOCK” po-
the ignition switch is ON by using the power
sition, the door can not be opened from the
window switches on each door panel.
inside.
Moreover, the inside door catch will be fixed • To lower the window, press down the
at the locking position and can not be pulled. front area of the switch.
Rear doors locked with the child safe mecha- • To raise the window, pull up the front
nism can still be opened from the outside if area of the switch.
the door button is in the unlock position.
GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH WINDOW SWITCH (EXCEPT

(ON DRIVER’S DOOR PANEL) DRIVER’S SEAT)
Driver’s window
The driver’s window switch operates in two
stages.
When the front of the switch is lightly
pressed (stage 1), the window will be low-
ered while the switch is pressed. When
pressed to its end (stage 2), the window
will open automatically until it is fully open.
If you want to stop the window while auto-
matic lowering, lightly press the switch
(stage 1) again or pull up the switch. If this switch is pressed, all door windows Passenger’s and rear door window
are operated only by driver’s door window switches are located on each door to op-
Operating time lag switches. To deactivate, press the switch erate the corresponding door window.
The operation of power window can be again. The driver’s window operates with- To lower the window press down on the
continued for 30 seconds even after turn- out relations to window lock switch. switch.
ing the ignition switch off. To raise the window lift up on the switch.
NOTE Release the switch when the window
The rear door window does not open reaches the desired position.
fully.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE WINDOW*
WARNING WARNING
Accidental closing of the power win- Always remove the ignition key when
dow can result in serious injury. leaving the car to avert the risk of
• When carrying children on the injury arising from unattended chil-
rear seat, press the rear door win- dren operating the windows.
dow lock switch to make the rear
door switches inoperative.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power window switch and rear
door window switches.
• When closing the passenger’s and To unlock the tailgate window, pull the left
rear windows from driver’s seat, tailgate lever with tailgate unlocked.
make sure of safety conditions
before operation. WARNING
When the tailgate window is opened,
WARNING emission gas could be flowed into
the interior and harmful to passengers,
Parts of the body can be trapped in
so completely close the window if en-
power window and struck by passing
gine is running.
objects.
• Keep a close watch on the windows
when closing them.
• Do not stick hands, head or any-
thing else out of the opening.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE HOOD
To open the tailgate window, hold the outer 1. To open the engine hood, pull the release 2. Pull the safety catch lever located un-
tailgate window handle and lift up the win- knob located on left lower side of instru- der the hood and lift the engine hood.
dow. ment panel to unlatch the engine hood.
The engine hood will then be unlocked
and partially open.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE

LEVER
WARNING WARNING
An open engine hood with engine The vehicle can still move from an
running exposes moving parts which stationary position while the engine
can crush, cut or entangle. hood is open. Before releasing the
• Do not wear loose clothing. engine hood latch;
• Keep hands and hair away from • Remove ignition key.
moving parts. • For manual transmission place
gearshift in 1st or reverse.
• For automatic transmission place
WARNING gearshift in P (Park).
If it is necessary to check beneath the • Apply parking brake fully. Fill Fuel Tank
engine hood with engine running; 1. Stop the engine
• For manual transmission place 2. Open the fuel filler door by pulling the
WARNING
gearshift in neutral. release lever located on left upper side
• For automatic transmission place An open engine hood while the ve-
of instrument panel.
gearshift in P (park). hicle is in motion obscures forward
• Set parking brake fully. vision, resulting in an accident.
• Do not wear any clothing such as • Check that the engine hood is fully
ties and handkerchiefs. latched in position by pulling at
• Do not wear loose clothing. it’s front edge before driving.
• Keep hands and hair away from • Do not operate the engine hood re-
moving parts. lease handle while vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not move the vehicle with en-
gine hood in raised position.
GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER SUN ROOF*

WARNING
Fuel may be under pressure.
• Unscrew fuel filler cap slowly.
• Wait for “hiss” noise to stop.
• Unscrew cap completely.
CAUTION
Engine and exhaust system will be
damaged.
3. Open the fuel filler cap by turning it coun- Make sure to use designated fuel to Before operating the sun roof you first have
terclockwise. the vehicle. to open the blind panel by pushing rearward.
4. After refueling, tighten the fuel filler cap
by turning it clockwise and push the fuel
filler door properly until it latches. CAUTION
Gasoline damages paintwork.
WARNING If gasoline spills onto paintwork
wash with cold water immediately.
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable.
It burns violently and that can cause
very bad injuries. NOTE
When refueling,
The fuel filler door may not open in
• Switch off engine.
cold weather.
• No smoking.
Push or tap fuel filler door lightly to
• No naked flame.
open.
• No sparking material.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sliding the Sun Roof Tilting Up the Sun Roof CAUTION

1. To open the sun roof automatically, To tilt up (vent position) the sun roof, press • The sunroof will operate when
press OPEN on the switch for 0.5 CLOSE on the switch with the sun roof the ignition key is ON position
second. closed. (engine is not running), however
2. If you press the switch again during the To return closed position, press OPEN on the operation under engine running
sliding operation, sun roof will be switch. is recommended.
stopped. • For the driving safety, operate the
3. To close the sun roof, press CLOSE on Open Open Open sunroof while the vehicle is
the switch. Release the switch when stopped.
sun roof reaches the desired position. • When the sunroof operation is
completed, release the switch. If
Open Open Open keeps pressing the switch, could
Vent Vent Vent be a cause of malfunction. Espe-
cially in winter, never operate
• Vent • Stop • Close
the sunroof if operation areas are
iced and wait for deicing.
Close Close Close • During charging after battery dis-
• Open •Stop • Close charge, press the switch for 5 sec-
onds respectively when the sunroof
is completely opened, closed, tilted
down and tilted up to reset the
each position.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING WARNING
Parts of the body protruding from Debris on the sun roof can damage
the vehicle can be struck by passing operation.
objects. • Clean the sun roof before opening.
Do not stick hands, head, or anything • Remove water drops, snow, ice or
else out of the sun roof opening. sand from on top of the sun roof
before opening.
• Do not place heavy objects on the
WARNING sun roof or surrounding area.
Care must be taken when operating
the power sun roof. There is a risk of Opening/Closing the Blind Panel
injury, particularly for children, and To open the blind panel, push it rearward.
a danger that limbs or articles could
become trapped in sun roof.
Ensure the sun roof opening is clear
before closing it.
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle unattended,
close the sun roof fully.
GETtheMANUALS.org
2
STARTING AND OPERATING
GETtheMANUALS.org
2–2 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Commercially available high-quality fuels CAUTION Operation in Foreign Countries
are suitable. Fuel quality has a decisive in- If you are going to drive your Rexton in an-
fluence on the power output, driveability other country, be sure to:
and life of the engine. The additives con-
damaged.
• Do not use leaded fuel to the ve- • Observe all regulations regarding regis-
tained in the fuel play an important role in tration and insurance.
hicle for unleaded fuel.
this connection. You should therefore use • Check that a suitable fuel is available.
only high-quality fuels.
• Use the fuel with specified or
higher Research Octane Number
recommended for your country by Vehicle Fueling from Drums or Storage
Diesel Engine Containers
Ssangyong.
Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher. It is not covered by warranty. For safety reasons (particularly when us-
ing noncommercial fueling systems) fuel
Gasoline Engine containers, pumps and hoses must be prop-
Fuel with too low an octane number can Do not Use Methanol erly earthed.
cause pre-ignition (detonation). Ssangyong Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) Static electricity build up can occur under
can not be held liable for resultant damage. should not be used in your Rexton. This type certain atmospheric and fuel flow conditions
of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and if unearthed hoses, particularly plastic, are
CAUTION damage components of the fuel system. fitted to the fuel dispensing pump.
For correct octane rating setting and It is therefore recommended that earthed
other use of gasoline (ex. Leaded), NOTE pumps with integrally earthed hoses be
used, and that storage containers be prop-
consult your Ssangyong Dealer. The warranty policy will not cover
erly earthed during all noncommercial fuel-
damage of the fuel system and any
ing operations.
performance problems that are
caused by the use of methanol or
fuel containing methanol.
GETtheMANUALS.org
STARTING AND OPERATING 2–3
IGNITION SWITCH
3. ACC Position 5. START Position
The engine can be turned off without lock- This position activates the starter motor,
ing the steering wheel. starting the engine.
Some electrical accessories such as the Release the key when the engine starts, and
radio and cigarette lighter can be operated it will be returned to the “ON” position
in this position. automatically.
CAUTION WARNING
Battery can discharge. Never remove or turn the key off
Do not leave key at “ACC” position while driving.
1. PUSH for periods. • This can cause the driver to lose
To turn the key from “ACC” to “LOCK” posi- control of vehicle.
tion, you must push it in. • This can result in serious vehicle
4. ON Position damage or personal injury.
2. LOCK Position This position turns on the ignition system
The steering is locked by removing the key. and the electrical accessories such as
power window, sun roof, heater, and air WARNING
Rotate the steering wheel until lock is
engaged. conditioner. Steering wheel can suddenly turn.
For easier key operation when unlocking, Never reach for the ignition switch
CAUTION key through the steering wheel.
move the steering gently from right to left
and turn the key to the “ACC” position. Battery will discharge.
Do not leave key at “ON” position
without running the engine for long.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BEFORE STARTING THE

ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
• Make sure the area around the vehicle 1. Apply the parking brake. CAUTION
is clear.
2. Manual transmission: To help prevent the start motor dam-
• The maintenance items in this manual
Move the gearshift lever to Neutral po- age;
should be checked periodically, e.g.,
sition and depress the clutch pedal to the • Do not operate the starter for more
each time you check the engine oil.
floor while cranking the engine. than 15 seconds at a time.
• Check that all the windows and lights are
• If the engine does not start, wait 10
clean. Automatic transmission*:
seconds before trying again.
• Visually inspect the tyres for their ap- Move the selector lever to “P” (Park) or
pearance and condition. Also check the “N” (Neutral), although “P” is preferred.
tyre pressures for proper inflation. The starter is designed not to operate if CAUTION
• Position seat and adjust head restraints. the selector lever is in one of the driv-
• Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Excessive temperature can damage
ing positions.
• Fasten your seat belts and ask all pas-
the exhaust system.
sengers to do likewise. Diesel engine model: Do not idle at high speed for more
• Check the operation of the warning The glow indicator light will come on and than 5 minutes.
lights when the key is turned to the “ON” go out when the glow plugs are suffi- Fully depress the clutch pedal, or the
position. ciently heated for cold engine starting. engine will not start.
As soon as the glow indicator light goes Do not depress the accelerator pedal
out, start the engine. while starting the engine.
Depress the brake pedal when you
3. Crank the engine without touching the
start the engine.
accelerator pedal by turning the igniting
key to the “START” position.
Release the key when the engine starts.
If the engine starts, but fails to run, re-
peat the above procedure.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING WITH A MANUAL

TRANSMISSION
CAUTION
Shifting to reverse gear while vehicle
is moving forward could damage the
transmission.
Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into reverse.
To help prevent clutch damage, do
not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving.
Never take the vehicle out of gear
The manual transmission in your Rexton has and coast down a hill.
5 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal. Then, move the gearshift lever.
After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING WITH AN AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION*
WARNING WARNING
The vehicle could move unexpectedly To help prevent transmission
when shifting. You could lose control damage;
and hit people or objects. • Do not depress the accelerator
Always depress brake pedal firmly pedal while shifting from “P” or
while shifting from “P” (Park) or “N” “N” to “R”, “D”, “3”, “2”, or “1”.
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse Always depress the brake pedal
gear. until shifting is completed.
• Never shift to “P (Park)” or “R (Re-
verse)” while the vehicle is in mo-
5-speed automatic transmission CAUTION tion.
Always use the parking brake. Shift to “P” or “R” only after ve-
Do not depend on “P” position to hicle is stopped completely.
keep the vehicle from moving. • When stopping the vehicle on an
uphill gradient, do not hold the
vehicle by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. The foot brake should
be used for this purpose.
• To drive on a slope, set the lever
to “3”, “2” or “1” position accord-
ing to road condition.
4-speed automatic transmission
GETtheMANUALS.org
SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS

Starting the Car
• After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before shifting the
selector lever to the “R”, “D”, “3”, “2” or
P: Park N: Neutral
“1” position. Be sure the vehicle has
completely stopped before attempting to Use this position when the vehicle is parking, It indicates neutral position and use this po-
shift the selector lever into “R” or “P”. starting the engine or stationing the vehicle. sition for temporarily parking.
To shift into any other position, depress the
1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed brake pedal(ignition switch “ON”) CAUTION
and shift into a driving gear. To shift into P position, you have to com-
2. Release the parking brake and foot Never shift into N position while
pletely stop the vehicle. driving, or the transmission will be
brake. Depressing the accelerator pedal
slowly will gradually set the vehicle in damaged.
motion. When you stopping the vehicle on the
uphill or downhill roads in N
position, depress the brake pedal.
To shift into D or R from N position
after stopping the vehicle, you have
R: Reverse to depress the brake pedal.
Use this position to reverse the vehicle. To
shift into R position from P or N position,
completely stop the vehicle and depress the
brake pedal.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING
If you touch the selector lever unex-
pectedly while driving, the shiftable
- D + : Drive
gear may be changed. It can make
(5-speed automatic transmission equipped the vehicle unstable. Be carefule not
vehicle) to touch the selector lever while
• Use this position in normal driving driving.
conditions.
• The gear is changed from 1st to 5th ac-
cording to the vehicle speed and the ac-
celeration with accelerator pedal. Adjustment for the shiftable gear in
• The shift indicator in instrument panel “- D +” position
shows the selected gear as shown ablve. (5-speed automatic transmission
equipped vehicle)
CAUTION The shiftable gear is down/up by one step
as the lever is moved to left(-)/right(+)
Please note that the vehicle may
direction.
slowly move forward when the selec-
tor lever is at “- D +” position.
: when moving the lever to left (-) direction

: when moving the lever to left (+) direction
GETtheMANUALS.org
• The gear is automatically downshifted to

lower gear according to the vehicle speed
and the accelerator pedal position while
pushing and holding the lever to (-) direction. The drive position for maximum braking D: Drive (4-speed)
• The gear is change to “D” position that can effect, e.g. when driving down severe gra- The drive position for normal driving condi-
be shifted to all forward gears while push- dients; the transmission does not shift be- tions in first to fourth gear.
ing and holding the lever to (+) direction. yond first gear.
CAUTION
• When pushing and holding the lever
The drive position for driving conditions in to left (-)/right (+), the gear may be
first, second, third and fourth gear. shifted through several steps in series. 3: 3rd Gear (4-speed)
Make sure to shift one step at a time.
• If you apply excessive force when The drive position for driving conditions in
moving the lever to left (-)/right (+), first, second and third gear.
the gear may not be shifted to You might choose 3 instead of D under the
The drive position for driving conditions in other gears. Soft and smooth op- following condition:
first, second and third gear. eration is recommended.
• When driving on long hilly roads
• When driving in heavy city traffic
WARNING • When going down a steep hill
The drive position prevents the transmission pectedly while driving, the shiftable
from shifting into third or fourth gear. gear may be changed. It can make the
Select drive range 2 for more power when vehicle unstable. Be carefule not to
climbing hills, for engine braking effects touch the selector lever while driving.
when driving down steep hills.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Shift Lever Operation
WARNING (5-speed automatic transmission)
The vehicle can move suddenly when

2: 2nd Gear (4-speed) unattended.
• Turn off the engine, apply the park-
The drive position prevents the transmission
ing brake fully and remove the ig-
from shifting into third or fourth gear.
nition key when leaving the
Select drive range 2 for more power when
vehicle.
climbing hills, for engine braking effects
• Do not use “P” (Park) position in
place of the parking brake.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended
while the engine is running.
CAUTION
1: 1st Gear (4-speed)
Even the gear is in D position, your
The drive position for maximum braking vehicle can be moved back on the
effect, e.g. when driving down severe gra- uphill according to gradients, so you
dients; the transmission does not shift be- have to depress the brake pedal.
yond first gear.
GETtheMANUALS.org
MODE SWITCH
(4-speed automatic transmission) S: Standard mode
Shift lever moves without • Press the “S” portion of the mode switch
depressing the brake to select “STANDARD” driving mode.
pedal. • Use the STANDARD mode for your nor-
mal driving.
Shift lever moves when
the brake pedal is W: Winter Mode
depressed. In this mode, the vehicle starts from 2nd gear.
Press the “W” portion of the mode switch to
Shift lever moves without select “WINTER” driving mode and “WINTER”
depressing the brake indicator lamp will be displayed on the instru-
• 5-speed automatic transmission has
pedal, however for safety ment panel.
STANDARD (S) mode and WINTER (W)
reasons, the brake pedal Use this mode in the event of starting-off or
mode.
should be depressed. driving difficulties on slippery roads.
• Use the STANDARD mode in normal driv-
ing conditions and use the WINTER mode
on slippery road.
GETtheMANUALS.org
4-speed
• 2nd reverse gear starting off in Power Mode
WINTER mode For increased power, improved acceleration
If you start off the vehicle with 2nd reverse or driving up long slopes, press the “P” por-
gear, the slipping between tire and road sur- tion of the mode switch.
face on the slippery road can be eliminated. The transmission will shift into the power
driving pattern. The transmission will shift at
• How to start off the vehicle with higher engine revolutions, allowing more
2nd reverse gear powerful acceleration.
1. Press the “W” portion of the mode
switch to select “WINTER” driving mode. NORMAL
2. Place the selector lever to “D” position Winter Mode Use this mode for your normal driving.
and check if the shift lever indicator In this mode, the vehicle starts from 2nd This driving mode can be selected when both
shows “D2”. gear. “W” and “P” portions are not pressed.
3. Place the selector lever to “R” position Press the “W” portion of the mode switch to
to start off the vehicle with 2nd reverse select “WINTER” driving mode and “WINTER”
gear. indicator lamp will be displayed on the instru-
ment panel.
CAUTION Use this mode in the event of starting-off or
• Do not use WINTER mode on nor- driving difficulties on slippery roads.
mal driving condition.
• When started off with WINTER
mode, stop the WINTER mode af-
ter the vehicle speed is reached at
a certain level.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY MODE (5-SPEED

KICKDOWN FUNCTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
NOTE When the transmission has electric or me-
chanical fault, the transmission operates in
Kickdown?
safety mode to maintain minimum driving
If you need to accelerate rapidly,
cinditions and to prevent the transmission
depress the accelerator pedal com-
from being damaged.
pletely to the floor to push the
When the transmission is defective, the
kickdown switch on the floor. Then,
symptoms that can be occurred are as
the kickdown will be operated and
follows:
the transmission shift to a lower
• Heavy shock when moving the selector
gear automatically.
lever
• Decreased driving force while driving at
Kickdown switch is located under the ac- high speed
celerator pedal. Use it for rapid or uphill • Fixed gear position during driving
acceleration. The electronic pedal installed on 5-speed
automatic transmission provides kick-down • Fixed at 3rd gear
When the accelerator pedal is depressed • Fixed at a gear other than 3rd gear when
fully, there will be contacting sound or feel- function according to the level of accelera-
tor pedal movement without kick-down the 3rd gear is defective
ing and kickdown function starts.
When the kickdown switch is operated, the switch.
POWER light in the meter cluster comes ON.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
EMERGENCY SHIFTING
If the shifting is not available, reset the CAUTION PROCEDURE
safety mode. Your vehicle has a shift lever lock control
• If you find any symptom caused by
• How to reset the safety mode system. Before you can shift from park (P),
mechanical or electrical defective
the ignition must be ON and you must de-
1. Park the vehicle and place the selector in transmission, stop the vehicle
press the brake pedal.
lever to “P” position. immediately and reset the safety
If you cannot shift out of P with the ignition
2. Stop the engine and wait for over 10 mode.
ON and the brake pedal depressed:
seconds. • If abnormal operation of the trans-
1. Turn ignition off.
3. Start the engine. mission (fixed at 2nd forward gear
2. Push the shift lock release lever by in-
in “D” position or 2nd reverse gear
• Symptoms after resetting the serting a proper stick. Then, with the
in “R” position) is still present,
safety mode brake pedal depressed, move the selec-
have the transmission checked as
- If the vehicle is normally operational af- tor lever to N (neutral).
soon as possible at the nearest
ter resetting, the troubles are corrected. 3. Start engine and shift into the gear you
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
- The gear may be fixed at 2nd forward want.
gear in “D” position or 2nd reverse gear 4. Have your vehicle repaired by
in “R” position. Ssangyong dealer or authorized service
operation as soon as possible.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING TIPS FOR AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION*
Starting the Car Engine Braking Maneuvering the Car
After starting the engine and before shifting In order to utilize the engine braking effect To maneuver the car back and forth during
into a drive range, depress the brake pedal when driving downhill, select drive range attempts to park or in garage entrances uti-
since the vehicle will otherwise start to “3”, “2” or, if necessary, “1”. lize the creeping effect. Regulate your speed
“creep”. Never use accelerator and brake by lightly releasing the brake pedal. Never
pedals simultaneously. The braking action is most effective in drive
press the accelerator and brake pedals
For normal driving conditions the “D” should range “1”. If drive range “1” is selected at
simultaneously.
be selected. too high a speed, the transmission remains
If the accelerator pedal is depressed gen- in second gear until the shift point for first NOTE
tly and evenly the transmission will shift gear is reached, e.g. as a result of decelera-
• CREEP effect
into the fuel-saving higher gears at an early tion.
The vehicle will move slowly
stage. The drive range needs to be Stopping the Car without acceleration when the
changed manually only in exceptional engine is running if you select
The selector lever can be left in the chosen
cases. Select “3”, “2” and “1” only when “R”, “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” positions
drive range with the engine running. When
automatic shifting up is to be avoided or if and it is called “CREEP” effect.
stopping on gradients engage the parking
additional use is to be made of the engine It is very unique characteristics of
brake or depress the brake pedal. Do not
braking effect. automatic transmission system in
increase the engine revolutions to ensure
Return to “D” as soon as conditions permit. which weak power is continu-
smooth idling while standing if a drive range
has been selected. ously delivered to the transmis-
sion in order to rotate the torque
Before leaving the vehicle, apply parking converter.
brake, then place selector lever in position
“P” and remove ignition key.
GETtheMANUALS.org
4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH - 4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH -

PART-TIME* FULL-TIME (TOD)*
1. ‘2H’ (2-Wheel drive)
This is rear wheel drive with high speed. Use
this for normal driving. This position gives
greater economy, quieter ride and least drive
train wear.
2. ‘4H’ (4-Wheel Drive, High)

Use this for driving on wet or slippery roads
such as roads with snow, mud or sand.
This position provides greater traction than
DRIVING POSITION 2-wheel drive. The front hubs will be locked DRIVING POSITION
automatically.
The 4WD indicator light illuminates when the The 4WD LOW indicator light illuminates
4WD switch is in ‘4H’ or ‘4L’. when the 4WD switch is in 4L.
3. ‘4L’ (4-Wheel Drive, Low)
Use this for maximum power and traction. 1. ‘4H’ (4-Wheel Drive, High)
Use ‘4L’ for climbing or descending steep
Use this for normal driving. This position
hills, hard pulling in sand, mud or deep snow.
gives greater economy, quieter ride and least
drive train wear.

Use this for maximum traction in slippery
roads, steep hills and rough roads.
GETtheMANUALS.org
4-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

‘2H’ ↔ ‘4H’ (Part-time only) ‘2H’ or ‘4H’ ↔ ‘4L’ WARNING
Depending on the road conditions, select the To shift from ‘2H’ or ‘4H’ to ‘4L’, the vehicle In case of part-time 4WD, do not use
4WD switch to ‘4H’ by pushing before driv- should be stopped. 4WD for normal driving on dry pave-
ing off or during driving. Shifting is possible Depressing the clutch pedal (with manual ment. It will cause unnecessary noise,
while driving at the speed of 70km/h or less. transmission) or moving the selector lever wear and fuel economy.
The 4WD HIGH (‘4H’) indicator light may to ‘N’ position (with automatic transmission),
come on. select the 4WD switch to ‘4L’ by pushing it.
When 4WD is in no longer needed, select The 4WD LOW (‘4L’) indicator light may come WARNING
the 4WD switch from ‘4H’ to ‘2H’. This will on. To shift ‘4L’ position, completely stop
avoid unnecessary heavy steering, tyre When ‘4L’ operation is no longer needed, the vehicle and always depress the
wear and fuel consumption. select the 4WD switch from ‘4L’ to ‘2H’ or clutch pedal, for manual transmission,
‘4H’. To shift from ‘4L’ to ‘2H’ or ‘4H’, stop or position the selector lever to “N”,
NOTE the vehicle and depress the clutch pedal (on for automatic transmission, and select
manual transmission) or move the selector the 4WD switch to ‘4L’.
Perform this operation when driving
lever to ‘N’ position (on automatic transmis-
straight.
sion) and select the 4WD switch to ‘2H’ or
Shifts between high-speed modes NOTE
‘4H’.
(2H↔ 4H) do not require clutch op- When shifting ‘4L’→ ‘4H’ in automatic
eration and available while the ve- transmission, foot brake and shift the
hicle speed is less than 70Km/h, how- selector lever to “N → R → N” after
ever recommend you to shift when 4WD LOW indicator OFF for smooth
the vehicle speed is low. shifting.
In case of TOD 4WD, the 4L indica-
tor in instrument panel will blink
during mode changes, then will come
out or come on after completion.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS IN 4-WHEEL DRIVE

OPERATION ESP OFF SWITCH*
• Changing from high speed modes (2H, ESP SYSTEM*
4H) to low speed mode (4L) during driv- The ESP system is an electronic vehicle sta-
ing is very dangerous, so the self con- bility control system and driving safety
trol system controls not to happen (avail- supplementary system that helps to avoid
able when the vehicle speed is less than dangerous situations by applying brakes on
3km/h). the wheels or the engine torque to compen-
• When the 4H or 4L mode is selected, the sate vehicle stability when it is extremely
relevant indicator in the instrument panel unstable under conditions such as sharp
will come on (4L only for TOD). cornering. This system also includes brake
If the indicator continues to blink or two assist function for the handicapped persons
indicators are come on simultaneously, because they depress the brake pedal softly
there might be malfunction in 4-wheel If you press the ESP OFF switch, the ESP
function stops and the indicator lamp in in- even when hard braking is required. If the
drive system to be inspected. system recognizes that it is an emergency
• If you operate the switch, there could strument panel comes on.
Press this switch again to resume the ESP case requires hard braking, it delivers high
be mechanical noises and shocks in braking pressure to the wheels. The ESP
shift, however it is normal conditions oc- function. At this time, the indicator lamp goes
out. function works when vehicle stability is very
curring in mode changes. unstable. The ESP system does not work
• Select the proper 4-wheel drive mode If the ESP function operates while driving,
the indicator lamp flickers and the alarm under normal driving conditions.
according to road conditions (slippery,
steep hills, roughness, etc.) sounds.
• Never use 4-wheel drive operations as
engine brake while descending hills.
• 4-Wheel Drive doesn’t mean the perfect
protection for any conditions. Please rely
on safety driving habits other than
system.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Stopping ESP Function With ESP OFF ESP & ABS* CAUTION
Switch* The ESP system is activated unless you • The ESP system deactivates when
If the driving wheels are slipping on the press the ESP OFF switch. However, the stopping the engine. It will be re-
snowy or icy road, the engine rpm may not ABS system operates only when the tyres sumed when the engine is started
be increased even when you depress the are slipping on the road surface due to sud- again.
accelerator pedal, and accordingly, you may den braking. Basically, the ESP system is • If the vehicle is controlled by ESP
not start off your vehicle. In this case, stop advanced vehicle control system that inte- during driving, the ESP OFF
the ESP function by pressing the ESP OFF grates the ABS system and vehicle stability switch will not work.
switch. When the ESP switch is pressed, control system. • The ESP system does not operate
the ESP function stops and the vehicle is during reverse driving.
driven independently from the sensor • If the ESP function operates while
outputs. driving, the indicator lamp flick-
ers and the alarm sounds.
Driving impression when ESP is work-
ing
The ESP system may transfer noise and vi-
bration to the driver due to the pressure
changes caused by the motor and valve
operations in a very short period of time.
Extreme cornering will trigger the ESP op-
eration and this will make the driver feel
noise and vibration due to strong braking
operation. Also, the ESP system controls the
engine output. So, the driver may notice the
engine output decrease even when the ac-
celerator pedal is being depressed.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE
WARNING WARNING • If one brake circuit should fail, the ve-
hicle can still be stopped with the sec-
• If the ESP warning light comes on, • The ESP system is only a supple-
ond remaining circuit. If this happens, the
the ESP related system is defective. mentary device for the vehicle. brake pedal must be fully depressed
At this moment, the ABS works in When the vehicle exceeds its physi- with greater pedal pressure. The brak-
a basic way. However, make sure cal limits, it cannot be controlled. ing distance is increased. Have the brak-
to check the vehicle at the nearest Do not rely on the system. Keen on ing system checked and repaired by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong the safe driving. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
Authorized Service Operation. rized Service Operation before continu-
• If the ESP warning light and the ing your journey.
ABS warning light come on • After being parked, check to be sure the
simultaneously, both ESP and ABS parking brake is not engaged and that
system are not working. Do not the parking brake indicator light is out
over speed your vehicle and be before driving away.
sure to check or repair the vehicle • Do not coast down hills with the vehicle
at the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or out of gear. This may be extremely haz-
Ssangyong Authorized Service ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
Operation. times, use the brakes to slow down.
• If the ESP warning light flickers • If a tyre goes flat while driving, apply the
and the alarm sounds, it means
brakes gently and keep the vehicle
that the vehicle stability is con-
pointed straight ahead while you slow
trolled by the ESP function when down. When you are moving slowly
vehicle stability is extremely
enough for it to be safe to do so, pull
unstable. In this situation, drive
off the road and stop in a safe place.
the vehicle with maximum safety.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM*

(ABS)
Anti-lock brake system is an advanced elec-
WARNING WARNING
tronic braking system that will help prevent
Brakes can have temporary loss of Brakes can have temporary loss of a braking skid.
performance due to overheating. performance due to wet brake The anti-lock brake system prevents the
• On descents shift to a low gear. components. wheels from locking up during sudden brak-
• Do not continually apply brakes. • After checking the rear for other ing or braking on a slippery road to help the
vehicles, lightly apply brakes for vehicle remain steerable and stable.
performance loss. This system becomes operative only when
WARNING
• Keep safe forward speed. it senses differences in rotational speed of
Do not drive with your foot resting • Keep plenty of space ahead, to the the wheels, and that they are about to lock
on the brake pedal. This could result rear and to the sides. up. The system detects the wheel speed
in the brakes overheating and losing • Lightly apply brakes until perfor- and electronically controls the pressure ap-
their effectiveness, wear out the mance is normal. plied to the brake.
brake pads. • Always apply this procedure after When the ignition is switched on, the ABS
driving through water deep warning light comes on. It goes out after
enough to wet brake components about 2 seconds. If it does not go out, or if
or having the vehicle washed, to it comes on during driving, there is a de-
help reduce the risk of personal fect in the ABS. In this case the brake sys-
injury. tem performs its regular function but with-
out the anti-locking capability.
In the event of a defect in ABS, the trac-
tion control system (TCS) is shut off as well.
Have the ABS checked by Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Operation as soon as possible.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTION Braking with ABS WARNING

Driving too fast, particularly in cor- Don’t pump the brakes. Press the brake pedal Stopping distances can vary greatly
ners, aquaplaning and driving too hard down regardless of the road surface depending on the road surface and
close to the vehicle in front in- (dry, wet, slippery, etc.), hold it down and conditions.
creases the risk of an accident. This let ABS work for you. • Maintain safe distance to the ve-
risk can not be reduced by the ABS The ABS modulates the braking pressure to hicle in front.
system. the respective wheels to maintain the maxi- • Drive slowly on wet or slippery
mum braking effect on the vehicle, reducing road.
the loss of directional stability or steering
control.
Slight vibration accompanied by noise usu- WARNING
ally occurs while ABS is operating. Such ABS cannot prevent accidents result-
vibration and noise simply indicates that the ing from careless or dangerous driv-
ABS is functioning normally. ing techniques.
In an emergency, apply full force on the • Drive carefully.
brake and clutch pedal simultaneously. • Slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system will be activated • Press brake pedal hard and hold.
immediately, thus allowing you to retain full
steering control of your vehicle.
We recommend that you familiarize yourself
with this braking technique. However, avoid
taking unnecessary risks.
GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING When Parking Your Vehicle
Brake system and ABS warning light 1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly
illuminating at the same time indi- apply the parking brake.
cates a failure in the base brake sys- 2. Manual transmission models:
tem due to malfunction of ABS. When parking on level ground, place the
• Stop the vehicle and consult your gearshift lever in the “NEUTRAL”
Ssangyong Dealer. position.
• Have the system checked and re- When parking on a downhill gradient,
paired before continuing your place the gearshift lever in the “RE-
journey. VERSE” position.
The parking brake acts on the rear wheels. When parking on an uphill gradient,
It engages automatically when applied. The place the gearshift lever in the “1st”
parking brake lever is located between the position.
front seats. Automatic transmission models:
To apply the parking brake, depress the Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
brake pedal and pull the lever up fully. position.
To release, depress the brake pedal, pull the 3. Close all windows and sun roof*.
lever up slightly and push the button in the 4. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” posi-
tip of the lever. Then lower the lever while tion and remove the key.
holding the button in. 5. Lock all doors and tailgate.
Ensure the parking brake is fully released 6. Be sure the vehicle is not moving.
before driving off.
See your Ssangyong Dealer if adjustment of
the parking brake is required.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking brake warning light and buzzer CAUTION CAUTION

If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds Things that can burn could touch hot Under cold weather conditions, the
(over 10 km/h) while the parking brake is exhaust parts under your vehicle and parking brake can freeze in the en-
applied, the parking brake warning light ignite. gaged position.
comes on and warning buzzer sounds. Do not park or operate vehicle over This is most likely to happen if the
If it occurs, immediately stop the vehicle and combustible materials. brakes are wet.
release the parking brake. If there is a risk that the parking
brake may freeze after driving
CAUTION
through water deep enough to wet
The vehicle can move when parked. brake components or having the ve-
• Always apply parking brake fully. hicle washed;
• Park on firm, level ground. • Apply the parking brake only tem-
• When hill parking, do not leave porarily while you put the gear se-
front wheels in straight ahead ma- lector lever in “P” (automatic
terials. transmission) or in first or reverse
gear (manual transmission), and
CAUTION • Block the rear wheels.
• Then release the parking brake.
Driving with parking brake applied
could damage rear brake system.
• Before driving, fully release park-
ing brake.
• Check brake system warning light
off.
GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING AID SYSTEM*

• Each end side sensor and two center Tips on Parking Aid System
portion sensors will activate the alarm The alarm will not work or improperly work
when the distance between your vehicle under following cases:
and the obstacle is around 120~80cm
and 100~80cm respectively.
A. Certain obstacles that sensors can
: Intermittent alarm
not detect
Beep 1. Wires, ropes, chains.
“ON” 2. Cotton, sponge, clothes, snow that ab-
Beep sorb ultrasonic waves.
“OFF” 3. Obstacles lower than the bumper.
The parking aid system will be activated
when the automatic transmission selector • When the distance is between 80~50cm B. The sensors can not detect
lever is shifted into “R” position and the re- : Regular alarming 1. When they are frozen.
verse lamps are turned on when ignition 2. When they are blocked by snow or mud.
Beep 3. When they are receiving other ultrasonic
switch is in ON or engine is running. At this “ON”
time, you can figure out the distance be- signals (metal sounds and air-braking
Beep
tween your vehicle and obstacles with the “OFF”
noises from heavy commercial vehicles).
alarming sound. 4. When a high-power radio is turned on.
• When the distance is between 50cm

: Alarm stays on
Beep
“ON”
Beep
“OFF”
GETtheMANUALS.org
C. Narrowed sensing scopes CAUTION

1. When the sensing scope is narrowed
• The parking aid system is a park-
due to partially blocked by snow or mud
ing aid system. You should con-
on the surface of the sensors (it will
tinue to utilize the mirrors or turn-
work again after cleaning).
2. When the ambient temperature is too
ing your head. Normal precau-
tions when reversing should be
high (approx. over 80°C).
maintained.
3. When the ambient temperature is too low
• Do not press or shock the sensors
(approx. lower than -30°C).
by hitting or high-pressure water
gun while washing, or the sensors
D. Not defective but improperly work-
will be damaged.
ing NOTE
• When the parking aid system is not
1. When driving on the rough roads, gravel • In the parking lot as shown above,
road, hill and grass.
activated but the alarm sounds for
3 seconds, check and repair your the upper portion of the vehicle
2. When the bumper height is changed due can be hit before the sensor opera-
vehicle at Ssangyong Dealer or
to the heavy load. tion, so check with outside rear-
3. When the sensing portion is frozen.
Ssangyong Auyhorized Service
operation. view mirrors or by turning your
4. When the sensing portion is covered by head during parking.
However, do not confuse with the
rain, water drops, snow or mud. • Please note the ‘Tips on parking
5. When receiving other ultrasonic signals
sounds that continue when the ob-
stacles are within 50cm. aid system’.
(metal sound or air braking noises from • The parking aid system will oper-
heavy commercial vehicles). ate correctly flat vertical surfaces.
6. When the sensor is hindered by improp-
erly fitted accessories.
7. When a high-power radio is turned on.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SUGGESTIONS FOR MORE ENGINE EXHAUST GAS

ECONOMICAL OPERATION CAUTION (CARBON MONOXIDE)
Your car’s fuel economy is mainly dependent • Do not carry unnecessary weight in the • Avoid inhaling engine exhaust gases.
on your style of driving. vehicle. Engine exhaust gases contains carbon
How you drive, where you drive, and when • Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal monoxide, which has no color or odor.
you drive has an effect on how many kilo- while driving. This can cause needless Carbon monoxide is a dangerous gas.
meters you can get from a liter of fuel. wear, possible damage to the brakes • It can cause unconsciousness and can
To obtain maximum fuel economy from your and poor fuel economy. be lethal if inhaled.
car: • Always ensure your vehicle is maintained • If at any time you suspect that exhaust
• Start gradually and accelerate gently. to the manufacturer’s specification. gases are entering the vehicle, have the
• Avoid excessive and unnecessary vehicle inspected and repaired immedi-
idling. ately by a Ssangyong Dealer or
• Keep your engine properly tuned. Ssangyong Authorized Service
• Do not race the engine. Operation. If it is necessary to drive
• Use the air conditioning only when nec- under such conditions, do so only with
essary. all windows fully open.
• Slow down when driving on rough • To protect against exhaust gases enter-
roads. ing the vehicle, the exhaust system and
• Always keep your tyres inflated to the body should be inspected:
recommended pressure for longer tyre - each time the vehicle is raised for an
life and optimum fuel economy. oil change.
• Keep your distance from other vehicles - whenever a change is noticed in the
to avoid sudden stops. This will reduce sound of the exhaust system.
wear on brake linings and improve - whenever the exhaust system, under
economy as extra fuel is required to body or rear of the vehicle is damaged
accelerate back up to driving speed. or becomes corroded.
GETtheMANUALS.org
HAZARDOUS DRIVING
• Do not operate the engine in confined ar- When hazardous driving is encountered
eas such as garages or other closed because of water, snow, ice, mud, sand or
areas any more than needed to move similar hazard, follow these suggestions.
the vehicle in or out of the area. • Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
• When the vehicle is stopped in an un- tance for braking.
confined area for more than a short time • Avoid sudden movements in braking or
with the engine running, place the air steering.
intake lever to the fresh air mode to • When braking depress the brake pedal
draw the outside air into the vehicle and with a light up-and-down motion until the
set the fan switch to high speed. vehicle is stopped.
• Never sit (or leave the children) in a • If stalled in snow, mud or sand, use 2nd
parked or stopped vehicle for any ex- gear for manual transmission or “WIN-
tended period of time with the engine TER” mode for automatic transmission
running. and accelerate slowly. Accelerate
• Avoid driving with tailgate open, as ex- slowly to avoid spinning.
haust gases could enter the vehicle. If • Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or
you must drive with the tailgate open, other nonslip material under the rear
close all windows, place the air intake wheels to provide traction when stalled
lever to the fresh air mode to draw the in ice snow or mud.
outside air into the vehicle, and set the
fan switch to high speed.
GETtheMANUALS.org
3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
GETtheMANUALS.org
3–2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
GASOLINE ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE*

(BLACK-FACE TYPE)
1. Speedometer 10. Defogger indicator 19. Tachometer

2. Auto shift indicator (A/T) 11. Low fuel level warning light 20. EBD waring light
3. Odometer/Trip odometer 12. Fuel gauge 21. SSPS warning light
4. Engine oil pressure warning light 13. Temperature gauge 22. Brake system warning light
5. Battery charge warning light 14. WINTER mode indicator (A/T) 23. ABS warning light
6. Seatbelt reminder 15. High beam indicator 24. Aigbag warning light
7. Engine CHECK indicator 16. Turn signal indicator (right) 25. Door open warning light
8. 4WD LOW indicator 17. Turn signal indicator (left) 26. Trip odo meter reset button/Rheostat button
9. 4WD CHECK indicator 18. ESP warning light 27. CRUISE contor indicator*
GETtheMANUALS.org
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 3–3
DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE*

(BLACK-FACE TYPE)
1. Speedometer 11. Glow indicator 20. Turn signal indicator (left)

2. Auto shift indicator (A/T) 12. Water separator warning light 21. ESP warning light*
3. Odometer/Trip odometer 13. Defogger indicator 22. Tachometer
4. Engine oil pressure warning lightt 14. Low fuel level warning light 23. EBD waring light
5. Battery charge warning light 15. Fuel gauge 24. SSPS warning light
6. Seatbelt reminder 16. Temperature gauge 25. Brake system warning light
7. Engine CHECK indicator 17. WINTER mode indicator (A/T) 26. ABS warning light
8. 4WD LOW indicator 18. High beam indicator 27. Aigbag warning light
9. 4WD HIGH indicator 19. Turn signal indicator (right) 28. Door open warning light
10. 4WD CHECK indicator 29. Trip odo meter reset button/Rheostat button
GETtheMANUALS.org
DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE

(GENERAL TYPE)
x1000r/min
1. Speedometer 10. 4WD LOW indicator* 20. EBD waring light

2. Auto shift indicator 11. WINTER mode indicator (A/T) 21. ABS warning light*
3. Odometer/Trip odometert 12. 4WD HIGH indicator* 22. Aigbag warning light*
4. Glow indicator 13. Temperature gauge 23. Fuel gauge
5. Engine oil pressure warning light 14. Turn signal indicator (left) 24. Low fuel level warning light
6. Battery charge warning light 15. High beam indicator 25. Water separator warning light
7. Seatbelt reminder 16. Turn signal indicator (right) 26. Defogger indicator
8. Engine CHECK indicator 17. Brake system warning light 27. Door open warning light
9. 4WD CHECK indicator* 18. Tachometer 28. Trip odo meter reset button
19. ESP warning light*
GETtheMANUALS.org
INDIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE

(GENERAL TYPE)
x1000r/min
1. Speedometer 10. WINTER mode indicator (A/T) 19. ABS warning light*
2. Auto shift indicator 11. 4WD HIGH indicator* 20. Aigbag warning light*
3. Odometer/Trip odometer 12. Temperature gauge 21. Fuel gauge
4. Glow indicator 13. Turn signal indicator (left) 22. Low fuel level warning light
5. Engine oil pressure warning light 14. High beam indicator 23. Defogger indicator
6. Battery charge warning light 15. Turn signal indicator (right) 24. Door open warning light
7. Seatbelt reminder 16. Brake system warning light 25. Trip odo meter reset button
8. 4WD CHECK indicator* 17. Tachometer
9. 4WD LOW indicator* 18. EBD waring light*
GETtheMANUALS.org
SPEEDOMETER ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER RHEOSTAT (BLACK-FACE TYPE)*

Black-Face Type Black-Face Type
General Type General Type
The speedometer indicates the vehicle When the reset button located in the right Press and hold the Trip odo meter reset
speed in kilometers per hour (km/h) or mile and lower area of odometer is pressed button/Rheostat button to adjust the instru-
per hour (m/h). once, the first driving distance (TRIP A) will ment panel illumination. Release the button
be indicated and pressed again, the second when the illumination reaches the brightness
driving distance (TRIP B) will be indicated. you want.
When the button is pressed once more, to-
tal distance (ODO) will be indicated.
NOTE
If you press and hold the reset but-
ton for over 3 seconds in TRIP A or
TRIP B mode, the trip odo meter re-
sets to zero.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE FUEL GAUGE

General Type Black-Face Type Black-Face Type

Black-Face Type(Diesel) Black-Face Type(Gasoline)
The tachometer indicates engine speed in The temperature gauge indicates the tem- This gauge indicates the level of fuel remain-
revolutions per minute. perature of engine coolant when the ignition ing in the fuel tank. This gauge operates only
Multiply 1,000 to the current number, then it switch is in the “ON” position. when the ignition switch is in “ON” position.
will be the current number of engine • H : hot When the fuel is added, the gauge slowly
revolutions. • C : cool changes to the new fuel level after the igni-
tion is turned on. The needle moves when
Ideal engine idle speed
CAUTION braking, accelerating or making turns. This
Diesel 700 ~ 800 rpm The engine can overheat. is caused by the movement of the fuel in the
Gasoline 650 ~ 750 rpm • If the pointer reaches the red zone, tank.
stop the vehicle. • F : Full
WARNING • Allow engine to cool. • E : Empty
Excessive speed can damage engine.
Do not let engine reach excessive NOTE
speed, indicated by pointer being in Fill up fuel tank before the needle
red zone. reaches “E”.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE BATTERY CHARGE WARNING

WARNING LIGHT LIGHT
CAUTION
Severe engine damage could result.
• Do not run the engine with the en-
gine oil pressure warning light il-
luminated.
• If oil level is normal, take vehicle
to Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
This warning light comes on when the igni- This warning light indicates that the battery
tion is switched on (as a check of bulb op- is being discharged.
eration) and should go out after the engine When the ignition is switched on, this warn-
is started. If the light comes on while driving, ing light comes on and should go out when
it indicates that the oil pressure is danger- the engine is started.
ously low. Stop the engine immediately and
If the light illuminates while driving,
check the engine oil level.
• Pull off the road and stop your car.
If the oil level is low, add the specified en-
• Check the alternator drive belt for loose-
gine oil to the proper level.
ness or breakage.
If the oil level is normal, have the lubricating
• If the belt is OK, there is a problem some-
system checked at the nearest Ssangyong
where in the charging system. The prob-
Dealer.
lem should be located and corrected as
soon as possible. Have the system
checked and repaired immediately by
your nearest Ssangyong Dealer.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE CHECK INDICATOR

(DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL AND
SEAT BELT REMINDER GASOLINE ENGINE EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the belt is
loose or broken.
Engine can overheat, damaging en-
gine.
The seat belt warning light comes on when- This warning light comes on when the igni-
ever the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” tion switch is turned to ON and goes out if
position unless the driver’s seat belt is se- the engine is in normal condition.
curely fastened. Also the seat belt warning If the light stays ON, inspect your vehicle by
chime will sound for about 6 seconds when Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position Service Operation.
unless the driver’s seat belt is secured fas-
tened.
Attention should be paid to ensure that the
seat belts are fastened before driving off.
GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER MODE INDICATOR

(FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
Your vehicle was designed in compliance
CAUTION
with European On Board Diagnostic (EOBD)
Do not drive with the engine check requirements which were specified by Eu-
indicator lamp on. ropean Economic Community Directive.
The indicator lamp signals that your The engine check indicator will illuminate if
vehicle has a problem that requires a fault exists in the emission related compo-
attention. nents or related sub systems.
Driving with the engine check indi- It will stay on as long as the Engine Control
cator lamp on can damage the emis- Unit (ECU) detects the fault.
sions control system and can affect If a severe misfire is detected, fuel is cut
the fuel economy and drivability or automatically to avoid catalytic converter
your vehicle. damage. The indicator will come on when the Power
Consult a Ssangyong Dealer or a Your vehicle’s electronic system will switch mode (P) switch near the gear selector le-
Ssangyong Authorized Service Op- to an emergency running program so you ver is selected.
eration to repair the problem as soon may continue to drive. Use this mode if you need more power dur-
as possible. However, you should consult a Ssangyong ing abrupt acceleration, driving on steep hills.
Distributor or Ssangyong Authorized Service At this time, gear shifting time delays than
Operation to repair the problem as soon as normal to get more traction power.
possible.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WINTER MODE INDICATOR AUTO SHIFT INDICATOR

(FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION) (FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION) 4WD CHECK WARNING LIGHT
5-Speed IDI engine equipped vehicle
DI engine or gasoline engine equipped vehicle

4-Speed
The indicator will come on when the Winter The indicator comes on when the ignition These indicators come on when the ignition
mode (W) switch near the gear selector le- switch is ON and the indicator shows the switch is turned to ON and should go out if
ver is selected. automatic transmission selector lever the system is normal. If the “4WD LOW” and
Use this mode to drive off smoothly under position. “4WD HIGH” warning light come on or blink
icy and slippery road. (IDI Engine), or “4WD CHECK” warning light
stays on, have the 4WD system checked at
NOTE Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
In winter mode, vehicle starts with Service Operation.
2nd gear so the power could be a
little bit reduced.
GETtheMANUALS.org
4WD HIGH INDICATOR

4WD LOW INDICATOR (FOR PART-TIME 4WD) DEFOGGER INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the 4WD LOW This indicator comes on when the 4WD HIGH The indicator comes on when the tailgate
mode is selected by pushing 4L switch. mode is selected by pushing 4H switch. glass defogger is switched “ON”.
Shift the driving mode from 2WD to 4WD It goes out after specified time.
CAUTION HIGH only when the vehicle speed is under
To shift ‘4L’ position, completely stop 70 km/h.
the vehicle and always depress the
clutch pedal, for manual transmission, NOTE
or position the selector lever to “N”, When shifting the driving mode from
for automatic transmission, and select 4WD LOW to 4WD HIGH, this indica-
the 4WD switch to ‘4L’. tor will blinks until the shift is
When the switch is selected and the completed. After completion of shift,
mode is shifting into 4L, the indica- the indicator stays on.
tor blinks for a moment. The indicator comes on without
blinking when shifting from 2WD to
4WD HIGH.
GETtheMANUALS.org
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING GLOW INDICATOR

DOOR OPEN WARNING LIGHT LIGHT (FOR DIESEL ENGINE)
This light comes on when a door or tailgate This warning light indicates that the fuel will This indicator comes on when the ignition
is either opened or not closed completely. soon be exhausted. switch is turned on and stays on for a short
If you drive not closing the door, the warn- Fill up the fuel tank as soon as possible if time or may go off right away. The waiting
ing light blinks. this warning light comes on. time will vary according to the engine cool-
ant temperature. When the glow plugs are
WARNING CAUTION sufficiently heated for cold starting, the light
Driving with door open can cause in- Running out of fuel could causes will go out. Then, the engine should be
jury to people inside and outside the damage to the catalytic converter. started.
vehicle. Fill up fuel tank as soon as possible
• Before driving off, close all doors. when warning light comes on.
• Check warning light is off.
NOTE
During driving on steep hill or rough
roads, this warning light may come
on if the remaining fuel is low.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ESP WARNING LIGHT* SSPS WARNING LIGHT*

SSPS?*
In traditional constant power assist steering
system, the steerability gets lighter as ve-
hicle speed rises, and this may cause dan-
gerous situation.
SSPS, by providing appropriate steerability to
driver according to the changes of vehicle
speed, gives steering stability. In other words,
the steering wheel gets lighter by adjusting
steerability in stop or low speed and provides
If you press the ESP OFF switch, the ESP IThis warning light comes on when the SSPS steering stability by adjusting steering wheel
function stops and the indicator lamp in in- system is defective. When this warning light to become heavier in high speed.
strument panel comes on. comes on, the steerability becomes heavy.
Press this switch again to resume the ESP
function. At this time, the indicator lamp goes out. CAUTION
If the ESP function operates while driving, the If this light comes on, have the SSPS
indicator lamp flickers and the alarm sounds. system checked by Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service
CAUTION Operation.
If the ESP warning light comes on, the
ESP related system is defective. At
this moment, the ABS works in a
basic way. However, make sure to
check the vehicle at the nearest
GETtheMANUALS.org
EBD WARNING LIGHT* ABS WARNING LIGHT*

NOTE
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribu-
tion)?
When the brake pedal is applied, it
controls the braking pressure elec-
tronically to effectively distribute the
braking forces to the front wheels
and rear wheels. EBD operates when
the speed differences between the
most fast front wheel and the rear
When the ignition is switched on, this warn- wheel are over 6km/h and if ABS is This warning light illuminates when the igni-
ing light comes on and should go out after 2 engaged, it does not operate. tion is switched on and should go out after
seconds. about 2 seconds.
If the EBD system is abnormal, the warning
If this light doesn’t come on when the igni-
light comes on and when the relative ABS
tion is switched on or if this light doesn’t go
system is also abnormal, it comes on with
out, contact your nearest Ssangyong Dealer
ABS warning light.
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
CAUTION If this light illuminates while driving, a mal-

If this warning light fails to go out function of ABS is indicated. In this case the
or comes on, have the system brake system performs its regular function
checked and repaired immediately but without the anti-locking capability. Have
by your nearest Ssangyong Dealer. the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer
as soon as possible if this condition occurs.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT*

WARNING NOTE
If the brake system warning light and ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)?
ABS warning light illuminate at the When you brake abruptly or on the
same time while driving, it may in- slippery road, the vehicle keeps go-
dicate a failure in the base brake ing on ahead but the wheels are
system due to the malfunction of locking not to rotate. At this time,
ABS. your vehicle will not be steered or
• Stop the vehicle and consult your rotate and could be resulted in acci-
Ssangyong Dealer. dent. ABS controls the wheels prop-
• Have the system checked and re- erly not to be locked and allows
paired immediately before con- steering to increase the vehicle’s When the ignition is switched on, this warn-
tinuing your journey. stability. ing light illuminates and then should go out,
to confirm that the air bag is operational.
If it does not come on, or if it does not go
CAUTION out, or if it flashes or illuminates continuously
Even though your vehicle is equipped while driving, it means that there is malfunc-
with ABS, your vehicle may need tion in the system. The air bag system would
normal braking distances like con- therefore not be triggered in the event of an
ventional brake vehicles or could be accident. Have the air bag system checked
longer according to road conditions, without delay by a Ssangyong Dealer or
so keep the safety distance. Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
ABS is auxiliary system for safety.
Do not over rely on the system and
keep on safety driving.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT

Make sure the parking brake is fully released CAUTION
before driving.
The brake system warning light may
If this warning light comes on even when
not come on with parking brake ap-
the parking brake is completely released, it
plied and ignition on, indicating
may indicate that the brake fluid in the res-
brake system fault.
ervoir is low. Then;
• Check for bulb failure.
1. Pull off the road and stop carefully.
• If bulb is working properly, have
2. Check the brake fluid and add the rec-
brake system checked.
ommended brake fluid up to the MAX
mark.
3. If the brake operates normally and you NOTE
This warning light comes on when the park-
judge it to be safe, drive carefully at a Low brake fuel level may increase
ing brake is applied with the ignition on and
safe speed to the nearest Ssangyong the stopping distance and require
goes out when the parking brake is released.
Dealer for inspection immediately. greater pedal effort as well as
(But, if the parking brake is applied, this
4. If leaks are found, if the warning remains greater pedal travel.
warning light still remains on until the park-
on, or if the brakes do not operate prop-
ing brake released.)
erly, have the vehicle towed to nearest
Ssangyong Dealer for inspection and
repairs.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with the brake
fluid warning light on is dangerous.
Have the brake system checked and
repaired immediately by nearest
Ssangyong Dealer.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD WATER SEPARATOR WARNING

FLASHER INDICATOR HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHT (DIRECT INJECTION
DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED)
When the turn signal switch is turned on, This indicator illuminates when the headlight When the water level inside water separa-
this indicator flashes to indicate operation of high beam is switched on. tor in fuel filter exceeds a certain level, this
the external turn signal. warning light comes on and buzzer sounds.
Shorter flashes indicate the failure of a turn Also, the driving force of the vehicle
signal lamp bulb. decreases. If these conditions occur, imme-
Both right and left lights flash when the diately drain the water from fuel filter.
hazard warning switch is turned on. For the draining procedures, please refr to
“How to drain the water from fuel filter” on
NOTE next page.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it im- This warning light goes out when the drain-
mediately to help avoid an accident. ing is completed.
If the indicating arrows don’t go on
at all when you signal a turn, check
the fuse and for burned-out bulbs.
GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO DRAIN THE WATER FROM FUEL FILTER

(DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
• Drain the water from fuel filter im-
mediately after the warning light Priming
comes on. If you cannot do that by pump
Fuel filter
yourself, visit nearest Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Operation.
• For the draining procedures, Drain plug
please refer to “How to drain the
water from fuel filter” on next
page. After draining the water, 1. Locate the fuel filter in engine 5. Wait until a certain amount of fuel gets
press the primimg pump until it compartment. out from the port, then turn the drain
becomes rigid. 2. Place the water container under the fuel plug to “B” direction to tighten it.
filter.
3. Disconnect the connector under the drain CAUTION
WARNING
plug. • Be carefule not to be injured by
• The fuel system in engine may get 4. Turn the drain plug to “A” direction to surrounding equipment during the
serious damage if you keep driv- drain the water. working procedures.
ing while the warning light is com-
ing on. Prompt correction should
be necessary.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR*

(FOR GASOLINE ENGINE)
6. Engage the connector under the drain This indicator illuminates when the cruise
plug and press the primimg pump until it control is switched on.
becomes rigid.
7. Close the engine hood and start the
engine.
WARNING
• If the priming pump is not prop-
erly operated, air may get into the
fuel line. It may cause starting
problem or fuel system problem.
Make sure to perform the job in
step 6.
GETtheMANUALS.org
MULTI-METER*
The multi-meter indicates the vehicle’s cur-

rent direction, atmospheric pressure and
altitude.
1. Barometer 6. Adjustment switch

2. Electronic compass 7. Down switch
3. Speed sensing indicator 8. Power switch
4. Relative altimeter 9. Up switch
5. Altimeter 10. Mode switch
GETtheMANUALS.org
Electronic Compass
NOTE
• You can turn to any direction, left
or right.
• When the calibration is completed,
the compass does not flash
anymore.
• If the compass continues to flash,
turn again slowly until it goes off.
1. It indicates 16-direction by intervals of Turning calibration

22.5° according to the vehicle’s driving 1. If you press the adjustment switch for
direction. 0.5 ~ 5 seconds, the current direction
• When the first equipped to the vehicle flashes.
or the battery is exchanged, you have 2. Turn the vehicle over 1 complete circle
to perform calibration by circulating your within 128 seconds slowly, then the
vehicle. If not, there will be misreading calibration will be accomplished.
in direction. 3. When the calibration is finished, the
vehicle’s new direction will be indicated.
NOTE
The direction will be indicated while
driving.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SPEED SENSING INDICATOR

CAUTION
• Warning for turning occurs if the
abnormal signals has been re-
ceived more than 5 minutes
continuously, however, it is not the
malfunction of the vehicle and re-
turns to normal condition if the ex-
ternal magnetic field becomes to
normal.
• The direction indicator may be de-
Release conditions for turning calibra- layed when you drive on sharp The flashing interval of the road signs
tion corner, however it is normal, not changes gradually according to the vehicle
• When the adjustment switch is pressed malfunction. speed.
over 0.6 second. • On the place where the terrestrial
Flashing intervals by speed ranges
• When the vehicle is not turned within 128 magnetism is dispersed, the com-
seconds after calibration mode started. pass may not indicate the correct Speed range Flashing interval
direction, however, when you leave Less than 1.8 km/h All “ON”
Warning for turning the place, it returns to normal. Less than 40 km/h per 1 second
When the vehicle has been turned out of the (Examples: in the tunnel, parking Less than 60 km/h per 0.8 second
specification due to external elements, direc- lot in a building, underground Less than 80 km/h per 0.5 second
tion indicator flashes to inform you that there parking lot, building complex, Less than 100 km/h per 0.3 second
are abnormal signals. above the subway lines, near to - per 0.2 second
substation, under the power lines
of the electric railways, etc.)
GETtheMANUALS.org
BAROMETER ALTIMETER (ABSOLUTE ALTIMETER)

How to erase the calibrated altitude value
Press the UP and DOWN switches simulta-
neously for more than 1 second then the
calibrated altitude value will be erased and
the current altitude will be indicated after
showing –0000 for 2 seconds.
Altitude calibration ranges

The difference between minimum value and
maximum value is 3000m: the calibration is
It indicates the current atmospheric pressure It operates by atmospheric pressure. 0m available within the altitude range of –200 ~
up to 600 hpa~1100 hpa by 1 hpa. above the sea level is equivalent to 1013.25 +2800m.
hpa and the altimeter convert the difference
between this pressure and atmospheric
pressure to altitude and shows by every
20m. (however, if less than 20m, it indicates
as 0m)
How to calibrate the altitude

Switch Time to press Indication
ON (less than 0.5 sec.) Increase by 20m
Up “1”
ON (more than 0.5 sec.) Automatic increase by 20m (per 0.2 sec.)
ON (less than 0.5 sec.) Decrease by 20m
Down “2”
ON (more than 0.5 sec.) Automatic decrease by 20m (per 0.2 sec.)
GETtheMANUALS.org
RELATIVE ALTIMETER
Use this to see the specific area’s altitude; • To see the difference of the altitude • To see the destination’s altitude
it shows the specific area’s relative altitude Set the vehicle’s altitude to 0 by press-
1. Enter the altitude of the point where
based on the current altitude of the vehicle. ing UP and DOWN switches simulta-
you know the altitude from the sea
neously over 1 second. read the in-
Mode setting of the relative altimeter level.
dicated altitude after arrival.
2. The indicated value on the destination
1. Press the MODE switch over 1 second.
is the altitude from the sea level.
Indication type
CAUTION
The altimeter operates by using
changes of atmospheric pressure.
So, sometimes, the indicated altitude
may different due to changing atmo-
spheric pressure in the same place,
however, it is normal, not malfunctions.
GETtheMANUALS.org
LIGHT SWITCH
Coming out order of the road signs CAUTION
• If the vehicle stops, the currently turned • Fog lamps will turn on according
off area of the signs will remain as it is. to lights switch positions when the
• If the vehicle drives off again, the next fog lamps switch is ON.
area from the turned off signs will start • Do not lay anything on the auto
to flash. light sensor located in passenger
side instrument panel. AUTO light
may operate incorrectly, if covered.
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob

on the end of the combination switch lever.
OFF position
All lights are off.
Position
Position, tail, license plate, fog and instru-
ment panel lights are illuminated.
Position
Headlight (low beam) and all the above lights
are illuminated.
AUTO Position (optional)

Turn on and off all lights automatically.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTO Light CAUTION LIGHT SWITCH WARNING CHIME

Headlamp and tail lamp will automatically • Do not place any objects blocking The chime sounds to remind you to turn off
come on or off according to the ambient il- the sensor. Do not clean the sen- the lights if the driver’sdoor is opened with
lumination intensity when the light switch is sor with detergent or wax. them switched on when the ignition key is
at “AUTO”. • In a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy removed
Battery Saver (Automatically turns off day, be sure to use manual mode.
the lights) The turning on or off time of the
lamps varies depending on the
To prevent the battery from discharging, the
climate, season, or circumstances.
tail lamp will be go out automatically when
• The sun proof coating that can af-
the driver get off (open and close the
fect the illumination intensiry in-
driver's door) with the tail lamp ON.
side the vehicle may cause the mal-
• You may turn the tail lamp on by posi-
function of the lighting system.
tioning the ignition switch on or turning
• Ssangyong recommends you to use
the light switch off then turn on again.
this device restrictively in only a
sunrise or sunset. For the normal
operation of the lamps, turn on or
off manually.
• To prevent the battery from
discharging, do not leave the light
on while engine is off.
GETtheMANUALS.org
HIGH BEAM SWITCH PASSING LIGHT SWITCH TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
To turn on the high beam headlights push the To flash the high beam, pull the lever to- Move this lever up to the stop position to
lever towards the instrument panel with the wards the steering wheel and release it. signal a right turn.
low beam headlights on. The lever will return to the normal position Move this lever down to the stop position to
The headlight high beam indicator light in the when released. signal a left turn.
instrument panel comes on when the head- The high beam headlights stay on as long When the turn is completed, the signal will
lights are on high beam. as you hold the lever. cancel and the lever will return to the nor-
For low beam headlights, pull the lever back mal position. When changing lanes, move the
towards the steering wheel to the normal switch part way and hold it there. When re-
position. leased, the switch will spring back to the
normal position.
NOTE
The light switch must already be in CAUTION
the position. Battery will discharge.
Do not leave the lights on while en-
gine is off.
GETtheMANUALS.org
HEADLIGHT LEVELLING SWITCH* WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH

CAUTION
Wiper operation on dry windshield
can scratch glass and wear the
blades prematurely.
Do not operate wipers when wind-
shield is dry.
CAUTION
Wiper operation with obstructions,
With the low beam switched on, adjust the To operate the windshield wipers, move the such as snow, can damage wiper
aiming angle of headlights to suit the vehicle lever in 3 downwards steps with the igni- motor.
load. tion on. Clear obstruction before operating.
• To lower the aiming angle, push the OFF = Off

switch downward. AUTO = Operates automatically according to CAUTION
• To raise the aiming angle, push the the vehicle speed or amount of rain Wiper blades can freeze to wind-
switch upward. (rain sensor equipped vehicle) shield in cold weather.
LO = Continuous wipe, slow speed Wiper operation while the blades are
NOTE HI = Continuous wipe, fast speed frozen can damage the wiper motor.
According to load condition, adjust Check blades are not frozen to wind-
the aiming angle of headlights. shield before operating.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC WIPER CONTROL

SWITCH
AUTO Position Recognition Function CAUTION
• When you start the engine with the wiper • Auto position recognition, espe-
switch “AUTO” position, the wiper will cially in winter, may reduce the
operate once to remind you that the life span of the wiper blade. Make
wiper switch is in “AUTO” position. sure the wiper switch is at “OFF”
• When you move the wiper switch to position unless it rains.
“AUTO” from “OFF” position, the wiper • During winter time, the wiper
will operate once. blade can be frozen to windshield.
Wiper operation while blade is fro-
CAUTION
zen can damage wiper motor. Be
The interval of wiper swings can be ad- If the wiper switch is at “AUTO” sure to check the blade before
justed by twisting the control knob upward position, place turn it to “OFF” po- operation.
or downward when the windshield wiper sition before stopping the engine. • The wiper operation on dry wind-
switch is in AUTO position. shield can scratch glass and wear the
blade prematurely. Do not operate
F : Fast interval
wiper when the windshield is dry.
S : Slow interval
• When you clean the windshield
over the sensor with damp cloth,
the wiper may operate suddenly. It
could cause serious injury. Make
sure to place the wiper switch and
ignition switch to “OFF” position
when not in use.
• Make sure to place the wiper
switch to “OFF” position before
wash-ing the vehicle.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE WINDOW WIPER

WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH SWITCH
CAUTION
In freezing weather, washer fluid can
form ice on windshield, blocking for-
ward vision.
Warm windshield before operating
washer.
CAUTION
The washer motor can be over-
To spray washer fluid on the windshield, pull heated and damaged. The tailgate window wiper and washer
the lever towards the steering wheel with • Do not operate the washer when switches are located on the instrument
the ignition on. washer fluid tank is empty. panel separately.
• Do not operate the washer con-
When you pull the lever for less than about tinuously for more than 10 To operate the tailgate window wiper, push
0.6 seconds, the washer fluid is sprayed seconds. the switch. To cancel the operation of the
onto the windshield, but the windows wip- window wiper, push the switch again.
ers are not operated.
When you pull the lever for more than about
0.6 second, the washer fluid is sprayed onto
the windshield while you pull the lever and
then the windshield wipers are operated for
several cycles. When you release the lever,
the wipers automatically returns to the rest
position.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE WINDOW WASHER

SWITCH
CAUTION CAUTION
Replace the blade when it is worn or In cold weather, washer fluid can
when it no longer wipers properly, to form ice on rear window, blocking
avoid loss of vision when in use. your vision. Warm rear window be-
fore operating washer.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Tailgate window can be scratched
Washer motor will be overheated and
or wiper blade can be worn prema-
damaged.
turely.
To spray the washer fluid, push the tailgate Do not operate the washer when
Do not operate the wiper when the
washer switch. washer fluid tank is empty or con-
window is dry.
When you press the switch for more than tinuously for more than 10 seconds.
about 0.6 second, the washer fluid is
sprayed onto the tailgate window and the
CAUTION
rear wiper is operated.
Wiper blades can freeze to rear win-
dow in cold weather.
zen can damage wiper motor.
Check that blade is not frozen before
operating.
GETtheMANUALS.org
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR

FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH* CONTROL SWITCH
To turn on the front fog lamp, push this To turn on the rear fog lamp, push this Adjust the outside rear view mirrors with the
switch while the light switch is placed in switch while the light switch is placed in adjusting switches so that you can see not
position. position. only each side of the road behind you but
also each side of your vehicle. This helps
Pushing this switch again will turn off the Pushing this switch again will turn off the
you determine the location of objects seen
front fog lamps. rear fog lamps.
in the mirror.
Rear fog lamps can dazzle people behind.
CAUTION Use rear fog lamps in severe weather con- You may adjust the outside rearview mirrors
Do not use the fog lamp as a substi- ditions. up or down and left or right using the mirror
tute for the headlight. switch located on the driver's door panel.
The ignition switch must be ON to adjust the
mirrors.
GETtheMANUALS.org
1. Select the mirror as you want to adjust OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

CAUTION
by using the left/right switch located in-
All round vision can be impaired, The outside rearview mirror on the
side the mirror adjustment pad, to the left
increasing potential for accidents. passenger’s side is convex if it says “OB-
for left mirror or to the right for right
• Adjust mirror angles before JECTS IN MIRROR ARE CLOSER THAN
mirror.
driving. THEY APPEAR”. Use this mirror to get a
2. Adjust the selected mirror up, down, left, • Check glass surface for damage. wider view of the road behind.
or right using the corresponding edges • Use deicer, spray or blower to re- WARNING
of the mirror adjustment pad. move ice.
Side convex mirrors make objects ap-
CAUTION pear smaller and farther away than
CAUTION when viewed in a flat mirror.
When the selection switch is in neu-
Glass surface may be damaged. • Use the inside mirror to determine
tral position, you can not adjust the
Do not scrape ice from mirror face. the size and distance of objects
outside rearview mirrors.
seen in the side mirror.
• Maintain rearward vision from
CAUTION driver’s seating position.
Do not force mirror to adjust if ice
should restrict movement of mirror.
Use deicer, spray, or blower to re-
move ice.
CAUTION
Adjust mirror angles before driving.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOLDABLE OUTSIDE REAR OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR & TAIL-
VIEW MIRROR FOLDING SWITCH* GATE GLASS DEFOGGER SWITCH
If necessary, the outside rearview mirror can To fold the outside rearview mirrors, press To demist or defrost the tailgate window or
be folded flat to the rear by pushing them the switch for more than 0.5 second. To side rear view mirror, push the defogger
rearward when driving on narrow roads or unfold the mirrors, press again. switch when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
washing the vehicle, etc.. position.
The defogger indicator in the cluster illumi-
nates when the defroster is operating.
Pushing it again will turn off the demister
operating.
If you operate this function again within 10
minutes after completion of first operation,
it will operate for about 6 minutes.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL* Setting a Desired Speed

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of tailgate
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the defogger wires.
Do not clean inside of tailgate win-
dow with sharp instruments or win-
dow cleaners containing abrasives.
NOTE
In snowy condition, use this defog- Cruise control is an automatic speed control 1. To operate the cruise control, acceler-
ger switch only after removing any system that maintains a desired driving speed ate to your desired speed using the
snow from the tailgate window. without using the accelerator pedal. acceleration pedal more over 36 km/h.
The vehicle speed must be greater than 36 km/h 2. When the desired speed is reached,
NOTE to engage cruise control. This feature is es- push up the ACCEL.SET. switch of a
The defogger uses a lot of power and pecially useful for motorway driving. cruise control lever or push down the
can discharge the battery. DECEL.SET. switch for 1 second per one
CAUTION switching and then release the accelera-
• Do not use the defogger when
starting the vehicle or the engine Improper use of cruise control could tion pedal, slowly.
is not running. be dangerous. 3. Now, the vehicle is cruised by this sys-
• Switch off defogger when tailgate • Do not use on winding roads. tem with set speed.
window is clear. • Do not use in heavy traffic. 4. And you can set to other vehicle speed
• Do not use on slippery, wet roads. again with above steps after accelera-
This could result in a loss of control, tion pedal intervention during cruise con-
collision, and/or personal injuries. trol running.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Accelerating with Cruise Control System Decelerating with Cruise Control System
• While cruise control system is running • Tap up while cruise control system is • While Cruise control system is running
running
1. Push up the ACCEL.SET. switch of a 1. Push down the DECEL.SET. Switch of a
cruise control lever and hold it until the 1. Push up the ACCEL.SET. switch of a cruise control lever and hold it until the
desired speed is reached without an cruise control lever less than 0.5 sec- desired speed is reached without a
acceleration pedal intervention. ond per one switching while the cruise brake pedal intervention. But the cruise
2. When the desired speed is reached, control system is running. This is a tap control system cannot maintain the
release the lever. up switching. cruise function at less than 34 km/h.
2. When you operate a tap-up switching, 2. When the desired speed is reached,
• While cruise control system is not run- release the lever.
the vehicle is accelerated for 1.3 km/h
ning
over the previous set speed.
• When Cruise control system is not run-
1. Accelerate using the acceleration pedal 3. If you want to accelerate for 13 km/h,
ning
more over 36 km/h. operate the tap-up switching ten times
2. Push up the ACCEL.SET switch of a without accelerating with cruise control 1. Push down the DECEL.SET. Switch of a
cruise control lever and hold it. system. cruise control lever and hold it.
3. And then release the acceleration pedal, 2. And then release the acceleration pedal,
slowly. slowly.
4. When the desired speed is reached, 3. When the desired speed is reached,
release the lever. release the lever. But the cruise control
system cannot maintain the cruise func-
tion at less than 34 km/h.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Recovery of Set Speed Normal Cancellation of Cruise Control

• Tap down while cruise control system The cruise control system will be canceled
is running when one or more items of the following
conditions is applied;
1. Push down the DECEL.SET. Switch of a
cruise control lever less than 0.5 sec- 1. When the brake pedal is depressed.
ond per one switching while the cruise 2. When the cruising speed is downed less
control system is running. This is a tap than 34 km/h.
down switching. 3. When the off switch is operated by
2. When you operate a tap-down switching, pulling rearward the cruise control lever.
the vehicle is decelerated for 1 km/h be- 4. When ABD is activated.
low the previous set speed.
And the cruise control system can be oper-
3. If you want to decelerate for 10 km/h, Even if the cruise control is canceled, the
ated again in driving state.
operate the tap-down switching ten previous set cruise speed can be recovered
times without brake pedal intervention. by pushing toward the RSM (resume) switch CAUTION
of a cruise control lever when the current
Keep the main cruise control switch
vehicle speed is higher than 36 km/h with-
as neutral position when not using
out acceleration intervention. But if you turn
the cruise control.
off the ignition switch, the memorized set
speed is cleared and you cannot recover the
previous set speed.
CAUTION
The resume position should only be
used if the driver is fully aware of
this speed and wishes to resume this
particular speed.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Abnormal Cancellation of Cruise Control Using Cruise Control on Hills

1. When the rapid deceleration is applied How well cruise control works on hills de-
CAUTION
without braking. pends on the speed, load, and the steep-
2. When the rapid acceleration is applied • The speed that has been set may ness of the hill.
without acceleration pedal intervention. not be maintained on uphill or
downhill slopes. When going up steep hills, you may have to
3. When the cruise control lever is failed.
• The speed may drop to less than press the accelerator pedal to maintain your
4. When the brake switch and brake light
the set speed on a steep uphill speed. When going downhill, you may have
switch input signal is unplausible.
grade. The accelerator must be to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your
And the cruise control system cannot be used if you want to maintain that speed down.
operated again in driving state. In this case, speed. Applying the brake takes you out of cruise
you should stop the vehicle, and turn off the • The speed may increase to more control.
ignition switch and then turn it on again. than the set speed on a steep
After you do that, you can use the cruise downhill grade. When the speed
control system again. But if the cruise con- increases too much, turn off the
trol system isn’t recovered, you should con- cruise control.
tact Ssangyong Dealer for diagnosis of the
cruise control system.
CAUTION
Abnormal changes of the selector
lever can damage the engine.
Do not move the shift lever to Neu-
ral while driving at the set speed.
Automatic transmission damage
may result.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT POSITION MEMORY

SETTING AND OPERATION*
Storing Memory Settings Operating Memory Settings
1. Place the selector lever in “P” (automatic 1. Place the selector lever in “P” (automatic
transmission) or “N” (manual transmission) transmission) or “N” (manual transmission)
position, and apply the parking brake with position, and apply the parking brake with
the ignition switch “ON”. the ignition switch “ON”.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rear- 2. Keep the position button pushed (for
view mirrors. more than 1.5 second) until driver’s seat
3. Press the “SET” button. Indicating light and outside rearview mirrors start to
on the button will come on and beep move.
sounds. 3. If you press the button, driver’s seat and
4. Within five seconds, press button you outside rearview mirrors will be recalled
1. “SET” switch
want among 1, 2 or 3 of the position automatically to the memory positions.
2. “STOP” switch
buttons. Adjusted positions will be stored
3. Position switch
in the computer with “Beep” sound. CAUTION
Up to 3 different drivers, the memory set- CAUTION • To recall the memory positions,
ting of seat position is available. Each driver press the position button for more
• Never operate the driver’s seat and
can set his/her own driver’s seat and out- than 1.5 second.
outside rearview mirror switch
side rearview mirrors positions and it will be • If you press “STOP” button or op-
during memory settings, or
stored in the computer. Even if someone erate only one switch among the
memory setting will be cancelled.
have moved your seat and outside rearview switches in order to adjust the
• If you do not press the position
mirrors, the memory positions will be recalled driver’s seat outside rearview mir-
button within 5 seconds after
automatically by pressing the position button. rors, recalling of the memory po-
pressing the “SET” button, memory
sitions will be stopped.
setting will be cancelled.
• Memory settings are possible up to
3 different drivers.
GETtheMANUALS.org
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH DIGITAL CLOCK
WARNING
• Never adjust the seat and side rear
veiw mirror positions while the ve-
hicle is moving.
• Set and operate the seat and side
rear view mirror position memory
function only when the vehicle is
stationary.
To turn on the hazard warning flashers, When the ignition is on, the time is displayed
push the hazard warning flasher switch. All in the digital clock.
turn signal lamps will flash simultaneously There are three adjusting buttons for the digi-
with the hazard warning indicators. tal clock.
Push this switch again to turn them off.
1. H : Hour Adjusting Button
The switch can be operated with the igni-
To go forward one hour, press H button
tion on or off.
once using a pointer, such as ball-point
Use the hazard warning flasher to warn
pen, with the ignition on.
other drivers when you stop or park under
To go forward continuously, keep this
emergency conditions, or when your vehicle
button depressed.
becomes a traffic hazard. Avoid stopping on
the road if possible.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT CIGARETTE LIGHTER

2. M : Minute Adjusting Button CAUTION
To go forward one minute, press MIN
The lighter can be overheated and
button once using a pointer, such as
this can cause a fire hazard.
ball-point pen, with the ignition on.
• Do not hold the lighter pressed in
by hand while heating.
button depressed.
• If the lighter does not pop out
3. S : Setting Button within 30 seconds, pull it out and
To reset the time by the time signal, press have the problem corrected by
the SET button using a pointer, such as Ssangyong Dealer.
For example, if this button is pressed To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in
NOTE
while the time is between 8:00 and 8:29 all the way when the ignition switch is in
the display is set to 8:00. If this button the “ACC” or “ON” position. Use of the lighter socket for plug-in
is pressed while the time is between 8: When it becomes heated, it automatically accessories can cause damage or
30 and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00. pops out ready for use. electrical damage.
8:00 ~ 8:29 → 8:00
8:30 ~ 8:59 → 9:00 CAUTION
The barrel of the lighter becomes hot
NOTE during use and can cause burns.
When disconnecting the battery or • Do not touch barrel of lighter.
replacing the fuse, the clock should • Do not allow children to operate
be adjusted again. or play with cigarette lighter.
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR CIGARETTE LIGHTER TILTABLE STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION
within 30 seconds, pull it out and
have the problem corrected by
Ssangyong Dealer.
To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in The steering wheel can be adjusted up or
NOTE
all the way when the ignition switch is in down to the desired position. To adjust the
the “ACC” or “ON” position. Use of the lighter socket for plug-in steering wheel, push the control lever to
When it becomes heated, it automatically accessories can cause damage or right, adjust the wheel up or down to the
pops out ready for use. electrical damage. proper position, release the control lever to
lock the wheel in place.
CAUTION
The barrel of the lighter becomes hot WARNING
during use and can cause burns. Control of vehicle can be lost.
• Do not touch barrel of lighter. Do not adjust steering wheel position
• Do not allow children to operate while vehicle is moving.
or play with cigarette lighter.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC DIMMIING INSIDE

INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR REARVIEW MIRROR*
CAUTION
Maintain rearward vision from
driver’s seating position.
• Select day position and adjust to
obtain best view.
• Select night position to reduce
night glare.
• Selecting night position may re-
duce rearward clarity.
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted At night, when the glare is too high, the mir-
up, down or side ways to obtain the best NOTE ror automatically responds to variations in
view. The inside mirror has day and night Remember that you lose some rear- light, changing from no antiglare to antiglare
positions. view clarity in the night position. as required. The sensor under the mirror
Make adjustment while the adjusting lever automatically detect the glare from head-
is in the daytime position. lights behind you and reduce the glare.
Move the adjusting lever to the night posi-
tion to reduce glare from the headlights of NOTE
vehicles behind you. When the vehicle is reversing, auto-
matic dimming function will be can-
celed to provide you clear view.
GETtheMANUALS.org
HORN SWITCH SEAT WARMER SWITCH*

Warm your seat in the cold weather for your
comfortable driving.
Press the button to warm the seat, and
press it again to stop the operation.
To sound the horn, press the center of the Front seat

steering wheel (without driver’s air bag), or
far right or left of the steering wheel(with
driver’s air bag).
The horn sounds with the ignition switch in
any position.
Keep use of the horn to a minimum.
Second seat
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR ROOM/LUGGAGE ROOM

FRONT ROOM LAMP LAMP COURTESY LIGHT
1. ROOM Position 1. OFF Position The courtesy light is located on the driver’s
The left lamp comes on if you depress this The lamps will not come on if you place the and passenger’s door to illuminate the space
switch. To turn off the light, press the switch switch in this position. around the feet.
again. The courtesy light turns on when the door
2. DOOR Position
is opened regardless of the ignition switch
2. DOOR Position The lamps come on when either of the
position.
The lamps come on when either of the doors and tailgate is opened.
doors is opened. When the DOOR switch is
3. ROOM Position
on, it begins to dim for several seconds af-
The lamps come on if you place the switch
ter closing the door.
in this position.
3. ROOM Position
The right lamp comes on if you depress this
switch. To turn off the light, press the switch
again.
GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOVE BOX FRONT CUP HOLDER REAR CUP HOLDER
W R
N
Open the glove box by pulling the release Use this for holding cups or beverage cans. Use this for holding cups or beverage cans.
lever and the indicator lamp comes on for If you press the front of the cover, the cup If you press and pull the knob located in the
your usage at night when the ignition switch holder comes out. upper area of the cover, the cover opens.
is in the ACC or ON position. Press the cup holder until you hear a click- Then, pull out the cup holder to use.
Close it with a firm push. ing sound when you close it. Press the cup holder until you hear a click-
ing sound when you close it.
WARNING CAUTION
Driving with glove box lid open can When vehicle is in motion, the liquid CAUTION
cause injury in case of an accident may spill out. When vehicle is in motion, the liquid
or a sudden stop. Spilled liquid can damage the ve- may spill out.
Keep glove box lid closed when driv- hicle and cause burns if it is hot. Spilled liquid can damage the ve-
ing. Do not use cup holder while vehicle hicle and cause burns if it is hot.
is in motion. Do not use cup holder while vehicle
is in motion.
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR CONSOLE BOX CENTER ARMREST CONSOLE SUN VISORS
Insert your finger into the cover hole and pull You can use it as an armrest or a console To block out glare, the main sunvisor and
out the console box to store some goods. box to store some goods. auxiliary sunvisor can be swung down or
to the left (right), if necessary.
Automatic Transmission (two levers) The vanity mirror and illumination are pro-
Pull the right side lever to open the upper vided to the rear face of the sunvisors.
auxiliary console box.
Pull the left side lever to open the console CAUTION
box. Do not place the sunvisor in such a
manner that it obscures visibility of
Manual Transmission (one lever) the roadway, traffic or other objects.
Pull the lever to open the console box.
GETtheMANUALS.org
LUGGAGE COVER
(EXCEPT FOR 7-SEATER) OVERHEAD CONSOLE
NOTE
Store the luggage cover separately
to use the luggage room of the ve-
hicle wide.
CAUTION
Don’t put anything on the luggage
cover.
When Unrolling the Luggage Cover Press the upper portion of the cover to open
Pull the handle of the luggage cover at the the console and hold the sunglasses onto
center, and fix it into the grooves at left and the hook.
right sides of quarter trim inner panels.
CAUTION
When Rolling the Luggage Cover
Glasses may be damaged, fix it
Take the luggage cover out of the grooves firmly.
by pulling the handle and let go the grasp
slightly to roll the luggage cover.
When Removing the Luggage Cover
After tearing off the edge of luggage cover
at the back of rear seat, remove the luggage
cover assembly by raising up it from the fix-
ing holder’s grooves.
GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE BOX (FOR 7-SEATER) ASSIST GRIP

Rear
Front
Flip the lever from each side and lift up the You can store fire extinguisher or other Your vehicle has assist grips above the
cover. goods into the storage box in luggage room. front seat passenger’s door and the rear
There is separate tool box under the sec- doors.
ond seat of driver’s side to store lever for The grips above the rear doors includes a
spare tyre removal and other tools. coat hook.
Passengers can use the grips for assistance
in entering/exiting the vehicle, or for hand
holds during spirited driving.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT ELECTRIC SOCKET

WARNING CAUTION
Do not hang anything on the assist Do not park the vehicle with any
grips, unless they are equipped with electric appliance plugged-in.
a coat hook. It can cause the battery discharge or
Hanging items on your vehicle’s as- a fire hazard.
sist grips can obstruct the driver’s Make sure that electrical appliance
view. is plugged-out after usage.
Obstructing the driver’s view can
lead to an accident resulting in per-
sonal injuries and damage to your
vehicle or other property. There is an auxiliary power outlet in the front
(left side) of the passenger’s seat for the
extra electrical devices.
This power outlet supplies power when the
ignition key is in “ACC” or “ON” position.
WARNING
• For the extra electrical devices,
you must use power outlet. If you
alter vehicle’s wiring lines freely,
there could be accidents like fire.
• Abide by the nominal capacity of
120W.
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR ELECTRIC SOCKET

CAUTION
Do not park the vehicle with any
electric appliance plugged-in.
It can cause the battery discharge or
a fire hazard.
Make sure that electrical appliance
is plugged-out after usage.
An auxiliary power outlet for extra electric

devices is installed in luggage box.
This power outlet supplies power when the
ignition key is in “ACC” or “ON” position.
WARNING
• For the extra electrical devices,
you must use power outlet. If you
alter vehicle’s wiring lines freely,
there could be accidents like fire.
• Abide by the nominal capacity of
120W.
GETtheMANUALS.org
4
SEAT AND RESTRAINT
GETtheMANUALS.org
4–2 SEAT AND RESTRAINT
FRONT SEAT BACK RECLINING FRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTMENT

ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL SEAT) (MANUAL SEAT)
WARNING
Control of vehicle can be lost.
Do not adjust seat back when vehicle
is moving.
WARNING
Occupants can slide under seat belts.
• Do not recline seat back too much.
• To get maximum protection, adjust
To change the seat back angle, lean for- seat back as upright as you can. To move the seat forward or backward, pull
ward slightly and raise the lever. Then lean and hold the seat slide lever up and move
back to the desired angle and release the the seat as required. Then, release the le-
lever. After adjusting, make sure the lever ver in desired position.
is returned to its original position; otherwise,
the seat back could unlatch while the ve-
hicle is in motion, causing the drive to lose
control of the vehicle.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT AND RESTRAINT 4–3
DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK RECLINING

ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL SEAT) ADJUSTMENT (POWER SEAT)*
WARNING
Do not adjust driver’s seat while ve-
hicle is moving.
WARNING
Excessive seat belt slack could re-
duce effectiveness of seat belts.
Adjust front seat before fastening
seat belt. Rotate the front knob (1) forwards to lower To adjust backrest angle, move the switch
the front seat cushion and rotate rearwards in the direction of the arrows.
to raise the front seat cushion. Press the top of the switch forward to move
WARNING Rotate the rear knob (2) forwards to lower the backrest forward and press the top of
Loose objects can interfere with seat- the rear seat cushion and rotate rearwards the switch backward to move the backrest
slide mechanism. to raise the rear seat cushion. backward.
Do not place objects under seat. When the front and rear knobs are rotated
forwards completely, the seat cushion will WARNING
be lowered, and when rotated rearwards Occupants can slide under seat belts.
completely, the seat cushion will be raised. • Do not recline seat back too much.
Perform this adjustment while seating on the • To get maximum protection, adjust
seat. seat back as upright as you can.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTMENT DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT DRIVER’S SEAT TILT
(POWER SEAT)* ADJUSTMENT (POWER SEAT)* ADJUSTMENT (POWER SEAT)*
To move the seat forwards or backwards To adjust the driver’s seat height, move the To adjust the front and/or rear portion of the
electrically, slide the control lever forwards control lever upwards or downwards. Raise cushion respectively, move the front and/or
or backwards. or lower the seat electrically as required by rear of the control lever upwards or down-
Then, slide the seat electrically to the de- seating on the driver’s seat (applying load). wards separately.
sired position and release the control lever.
1. Up : Front portion of the seat cushion
2. Down : Front portion of the seat cushion
3. Up : Rear portion of the seat cushion
4. Down : Rear portion of the seat cushion
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT SEAT WARMER CAUTIONS IN THE POWER SEAT

(POWER SEAT)* OPERATION
CAUTION CAUTION
• Control of vehicle can be lost. Loose objects can interfere with seat-
• Do not adjust driver’s seat while slide mechanism.
vehicle is moving. • Do not place objects under seat.
• Excessive switch operation could • Do not attempt multi-operation in
cause battery discharge. your seat at a time, or it can dam-
• Operate the electric seat while the age your motor.
engine is running. Please operate the seats in order
• Avoid the multi-operation of the one after another.
driver’s seat, it can damage the
By operating the seat warmer switch, you motor. Be sure to operate the elec-
CAUTION
can warm the seat cushion and seat back. tric seat in order.
Press the switch to warm the seat and • Power seats will be operated even You may get burnt.
press again to stop the seat warming. Dur- when the ignition switch is turned • Do not use the seat heater for a
ing warming, the indicator light on the switch to the “OFF” position, however to long time if you are wearing a thin
comes on. prevent the battery discharge, op- skirt or trousers.
erate your seats when the engine
is running.
• When the battery voltage is low, CAUTION
the seat heater may not in opera- Heating wires can be damaged.
tion. • Do not subject the front seats to
heavy impacts.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBAR FRONT SEAT BACK STORAGE PASSENGER’S SEAT SIDE
SUPPORT POCKET STORAGE POCKET
To adjust driver’s lumber support, move the The front seat back storage pocket is pro- The passenger’s seat has side storage
lever until the desired angle is achieved. vided to store small items. pocket for storing small items.
Move the lever downward to increase the
amount of lumber support.
To decrease it, raise the lever progressively
through the other position.
1. Original position
2. Stage 1
3. Stage 2
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT UNDER TRAY*

(FOR PASSENGER’S SEAT) FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS
To remove the head restraint
1. Pull it up to the stop position.
2. While pushing the release button
3. Lift the head restraint from the guide
sleeve.
WARNING
Removed or improperly adjusted
head restraints can result in serious
head and neck injuries in case of a
The seat under tray is located under the Head restraints are designed to help reduce
collision.
passenger’s seat. Hold the front of the tray the risk of neck injuries.
and pull forwards to use. Push rearwards For maximum protection, slide the head re-
to return to original position. straint up or down so the top of the
WARNING
restraint is level with the top of your ears.
To lower the front head restraint, press the Make sure that the head restraint
release button on top of seatback and push are in place and adjusted before
it down. driving.
To raise the front head restraint, pull it up
without pressing the release button.
Hold the head restraint and move it forward
or backward to adjust its inclination. To re-
turn it to original position, pull it fully and re-
lease.*
GETtheMANUALS.org
RECLINING REAR SEAT BACK REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

(SECOND SEAT) (SECOND SEAT)
sleeve while pushing the release button.
WARNING
collision.
The rear seat backs can be reclined sepa- Head restraints are designed to help reduce
rately for the comfortable driving of passen- the risk of neck injuries.
gers. For maximum protection, slide the head re- WARNING
Pull up the adjustment levers and recline straint up or down so the top of the Make sure that the head restraint
the seat back to the desired position. restraint is level with the top of your ears. are in place and adjusted before
Then, release the adjustment lever to lock To lower the head restraint, press the re- driving.
the seat back into position. lease button on top of seatback and push it
down.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up without
pressing the release button.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER ARMREST FOLDING SECOND SEAT

(SECOND SEAT) (FROM REAR SIDE)
WARNING
When folding the seat back, hold the
seat back or head restraint by hand
and fold forward slowly. If you fold
abruptly, there could be injuries in
you face or other body parts due to
seat back forces or shocks.
WARNING
The center armrest can be folded down for 1. Adjust the head restraint height to the To help avoid injuries, make sure
use when there are only 1 or 2 rear seat lowest position. your hand and any other body parts,
passengers. 2. Press the left and right seat back lever as well as those of other persons, are
to fold the seat back forwards. completely away from the rear seat
compartment when folding the rear
seat.
GETtheMANUALS.org
UNFOLDING SECOND SEAT

(FROM REAR SIDE)
3. Pull up the lever from under the left and 4. Completely contact the seat to the front 1. Unhook the strap and put into the bot-
right seat to release the lock and fold the seats and take out the strap from the tom box.
seat forward. bottom box and fasten the seat safely. 2. Lock the seat to the floor (make sure of
The strap should be hooked to the pole the locking-if not locked, the seat may
WARNING of front seat head restraint. fall over during driving).
• After folding the seat back, press 3. Unfold the seat back while pressing the
the upper portion of the seat to lever.
lock and then lift it up. When the
seat is lifted up without locking, Push to CAUTION
there could be interventions be- lock When unfolding the seat to its origi-
tween rear console box cover nal position, be careful not to cause
handle and seat to be damaged. injuries on knees or feet to whom
• Before lifting up the seat, make seating on the third seat.
sure that the rear console box
cover is closed.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOLDING SECOND SEAT

(FROM OUTSIDE)
WARNING
WARNING
1. Adjust the head restraint height to the To help avoid injuries, make sure 3. Pull up the lever from under the left and
lowest position. your hand and any other body parts, right seat to release the lock and fold the
2. Pull up the left and right seat back lever as well as those of other persons, are seat.
to fold the seat back and press firmly to completely away from the rear seat
lock. compartment when folding the rear WARNING
seat.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS IN SECOND SEAT

FOLDING OPERATION
WARNING
• Do not stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the front seats.
• Do not allow passengers to sit on
the folded seatbacks while the ve-
hicle is in motion.
• Unrestrained luggage or passen-
gers on a folded seatback can be
thrown about within or ejected
from the vehicle in a sudden stop
4. Completely contact the seat to the front or accident.
seats and take out the strap from the CAUTION • Serious injuries or death can be
bottom box and fasten the seat safely. When unfolding the seat to its origi- resulted from them.
The strap should be hooked to the pole nal position, be careful not to cause • Ensure that the rear seatbacks and
of front seat head restraint. injuries on knees or feet to whom rear seat cushion are locked in po-
seating on the third seat. sition before operating the vehicle
with passengers in the back seat.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOLDING THIRD SEAT

THIRD SEAT* (7-SEATERS) (MAKING A LUGGAGE ROOM)
The third seat in the 7-seater model is for 2
persons and you can make luggage room as
in the 5-seater model by removing the head
restraints and folding the seat.
Cautions in using the third seat

• When the third seat is occupied by pas-
sengers, lock the tailgate. And check that
the tailgate is closed correctly before
driving.
• Keep the tailgate locked during driving
and never operate the inner handle. 1. Lower the headrests in third seat to its 3. Release the seat rear protector and fold
• Avoid riding elder people or children to end. forward.
the third seat and if you have to, be care- 2. Pull up the seat back folding ring (1) lo-
ful not to open the tailgate and take nec- cated on the top of the seat and fold the
essary safety measures. seat back forward completely.
• When seating on the third seat, fasten
the seatbelt.
WARNING
The third row seat for 2 persons
should be restricted by 50kg per per-
son.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FULL FLATTING THE SEAT SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

To protect you and your passengers in the
event of an accident, it is compulsory that
the seat belts are worn by all occupants
while the vehicle is in use. Seat belts should
be worn correctly.
Each seat belt is designed to be used by
only one person at a time : they are not
suitable for use by children below 6 years
of age. Suitable child seats/booster cush-
ions should be fitted.
1. Fold the third seat (refer to FOLDING 5. Fold the seat back protector.
THIRD SEAT). WARNING
2. Push the seat back lever (1) to fold the CAUTION Occupants could be injured seri-
second seat. To take a rest after making a bed, ously in collisions or sudden maneu-
3. Press the second seat back to lock it. stop the vehicle to the safe place and vers.
4. Release the locking device for seat back block the wheels. • Wear seat belts at all times when
protector in second seat. driving or riding.
• Never use a belt for more than one
person at a time.
• Do not wear seat belt over hard or
breakable objects in pockets or on
clothing.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN USING THE SEAT BELTS

CAUTION To help reduce the risk of personal injury in WARNING
collisions or sudden maneuvers, use the
Improper use of seat belt can cause High-positioned lap belts and loose
seat belts following these instructions on
more serious injury. their proper use maintenance, and use with
fitting shoulder belts both could in-
• Do not modify the seat belt. child restraint systems.
crease the chance of injury or death
• Do not add adjusting device which due to sliding under the lap belt
restrict removing slack. WARNING during an accident.
Improperly worn seat belts could
cause serious injury or death. CAUTION
CAUTION
• Adjust the seat belt as firmly as
Damaged seat belts can cause more Improper use of seat belt causes
possible.
serious injury. more serious injury.
• Place the seat back upright posi-
• Repair or replace damaged seat • Buckle release button should face
tion as you can.
belts immediately. outward.
• Do not recline the seat back when
• Never let the seat belt system be- • Insert seat belt buckle into proper
vehicle is moving.
come damaged by a door or seat. buckle catch.
• Never wear the seat belt with straps
• Do not put anything into the open-
twisted.
ing where seat belt passes through
• Never wear the shoulder belt un-
the trim panel.
der your arm.
• Shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over the shoulder (never NOTE
across neck).
• Lap belt should be fitted snugly If the belt locks when being pulled
around the hips, not the waist. out, rewind it completely in the re-
• 3-point seat belt is designed for the tractor, then pull it out to the desired
person whose height is over 140 cm. length.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CARE OF SEAT BELTS PREGNANT WOMEN

Always keep the seat belts clean and dry. CAUTION
Care should be taken to avoid contamination
of the webbing with polishes, oils and
Damaged seat belts can cause more
serious injury.
chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
• Inspect seat belt assemblies peri-
Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild
soap and water.
odically.
• Inspect seat belts and other con-
Do not bleach or dye belts since this may
stituent part after every collision.
severely weaken them. Make sure that the
belt is not damaged or trapped by sharp
• Replace seat belts if webbing be-
come frayed, contaminated or
edged objects.
damaged in any way.
Periodically inspect all parts of the belts and
• Replace the entire seat belt assem- It is recommended that pregnant women use
have damaged parts replaced. A belt which
bly after severe impact even if the seat belts. Contact your doctor for specific
has been overstretched in an accident must
be replaced by a new one.
damage is not obvious. recommendations.
Ssangyong recommends replacing all com-
WARNING
ponent parts of the seat belts in use during
CAUTION Pregnant women and unborn child
a collision. No replacement is required after
a minor collision if a Ssangyong Dealer or Improper seat belt could cause more could be injured.
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation serious injuries. • Use a lap-shoulder seat belt if pos-
finds that no damage has occurred and Do not modify seat belts. sible (Consult your doctor).
judges everything to be in proper working • Lap belt should be worn as low as
order. possible throughout the preg-
Seat belts and components that were not in nancy.
use during the collision must also be in-
spected and replaced if they show signs of
damage or faulty operation.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHILD RESTRAINT
WARNING WARNING
• Infants and small children should • When installing a child restraint
always be restrained in a infant or system, follow the instructions pro-
child restraint. vided by the manufacturer.
• NEVER INSTALL A REAR-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT IN FRONT SEAT • When not in use, keep your child
WITH FRONT PASSENGER AIR restraint system secured with a
BAG. seat belt or remove it from the ve-
• A child in a rear-facing child re- hicle.
straint installed in the front seat • Do not hold a child while riding
can be seriously injured if the in a vehicle.
front passenger air bag inflates. • Never let a child stand or kneel on
When transporting infants or small children, Secure a rear-facing child re-
an appropriate child restraint system should any seat.
straint in the rear seat.
always be used. The child restraint system • A front-facing child restraint • Do not allow a child in the cargo
should be appropriate for your child’s should be secured in the rear seat areas while the vehicle is moving.
weight and height and properly fit the car’s whenever possible. If installed in • Children who have outgrown child
seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil- the front passenger seat, adjust restraint systems should sit in the
dren are safer when properly restrained in the seat as far back as it will go. rear seat and be restrained with
the rear seat rather than in the front seat. the seat belt.
If child’s seating position has a
shoulder belt which is on or very
close to the face or neck, move the
child close to the center of the ve-
hicle, slightly inboard of the
shoulder belt, or move the child to
a position without a shoulder belt
if possible.
GETtheMANUALS.org
THREE POINT SEAT BELT Using the Belt

Each Ssangyong vehicle is equipped with
three point seat belts with automatic retrac-
tors, allowing freedom of body movement
when driving at even, constant speeds, al-
though the spring-tensional belts are always
fitted snugly.
The belt has a “vehicle sensitive retractor” S
ES
PR
which is designed to lock during heavy ac-

celeration or deceleration.
Do not attempt to test the locking device by
Pull the belt evenly out of the retractor and To remove the belt, depress the red push-
intentionally “shooting” your upper torso in
guide it across the body, making certain that button on the buckle. The belt will retract
the forward direction.
it is not twisted. automatically.
This type of belt requires no length adjust- Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle.
ment. Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to WARNING
Make sure the latch plate is securely fas-
the movement of wearer, but in the event of Improper use of seat belts could
tened in the buckle by pulling it.
a sudden or strong shock, the belt automati- cause injuries.
cally locks to restrain the wearer’s body. • Do not wear the shoulder portion
NOTE
of seat belt under the arm.
If the belt locks when being pulled • Shoulder belt should be positioned
out, rewind it completely in the re- midway over the shoulder, never
tractor, then pull it out to the desired
across the neck.
length. • Lap belt should be fitted snugly
around the hips, not the waist.
GETtheMANUALS.org
LAP BELT*
CAUTION
Damaged or incorrectly fastened seat
belt could cause serious injury.
PR
ES
S
Do not fasten the metal latch into in-

correct buckle by force.
PR
NOTE
ES
S
When fastening the rear seat shoul-

der belt or the center rear lap belt,
Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle The buckle and metal latch plate of the cen- make sure the metal latch plate is
until it locks. ter rear lap belt are identified by the “CEN- inserted into the correct buckle to
To lengthen, hold the metal latch plate at TRE” mark. Be sure to check the marking obtain maximum protection from the
right angles to the belt and pull on the belt. before wearing the center rear lap belt. seat belt.
To shorten, pull the free end of the belt
The metal latch plate of the center rear lap
away from the metal latch plate, then pull the
belt can be fastened only into the buckle of
belt clip to take up the slack.
center rear lap belt buckle.
Position the lap belt low on the hips.
To remove the belt, depress the red button
on the buckle. WARNING
Improper use of seat belts could
NOTE cause serious injury.
Lap belts are installed in the center • Never wear the lap belt across your
of the second seat. abdomen.
• Lap belt should be fitted snugly
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR THREE POINT SEAT BELT

(CENTER)
WARNING
• Make sure to fasten the seat belt
according to the order as described
so that it functions properly.
• To prevent the seat belt bumping
against the rear glass, unfasten
the seat belt while holding it.
• This seat belt is designed only for
a passenger who sits on the center
seat in the second row seat.
• Tug on the seat belt to make sure
the latch plate is securely locked.
• Make sure that the seat belt is not
twisted.
• Improper wearing of seat belts in-
creases the chance of injury or
1. Pull the Mini-latch plate (A) out of the 4. Pull the latch plate (B) across the hips death in a crash.
seat belt console installed at the ceiling. and insert it into the buckle (2) until it • Do not position the seat belt to pass
2. Pull the Mini-latch plate (A) across the clicks. across your neck and abdomen.
chest and insert it into the buckle (3) until 5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the red
it clicks. (black) button on the buckle.
CAUTION
3. Pull the latch plate (B) out of the seat
belt console installed at the ceiling. Stow the seat belt into the console
when it is not in use.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTOR AIR BAG*

WARNING The air bag Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) can provide additional protection for
Improperly worn seat belt could
the driver and passenger against head and
cause severe injury. chest injuries in the event of a collision.
• Adjust seat belt height before The air bag system activates during a colli-
driving.
sion of sufficient force when the ignition key
• Make sure the anchorage is is in “ON”.
locked in position. When the air bag inflates, an operating noise
• Shoulder belts should be posi-
may be heard and a small amount of smoke
tioned midway over the shoulder, like gas will be released. The gas is harm-
never across the neck. less and does not indicate that there is a fire.
The seat belt height adjustor is provided for Injuries, including fatal injuries, can occur in
the front seat. a severe collision, even if seat belts are
CAUTION
Press the side button and slide the retractor worn properly and the air bags inflate. No
upward or downward to obtain snug and safety system can provide complete protec-
Do not adjust the height of the
fit position. You can adjust to 4 positions. tion in a severe crash. Just from viewing the
driver’s seat belt while driving.
vehicle damage after a crash, it is very dif-
This is particularly important if a smaller ficult to accurately determine if the air bags
person has previously selected a lower po- should or should not have inflated. In some
sition. Too low or high a position can impair cases, where the air bag did not inflate, ex-
comfort. tensive visible damage indicate that the car
absorbed much of the crash energy, and the
air bags were not needed. In other cases,
a severe jolt, such as an impact to the un-
der carriage, may not cause extensive body
damage but cause the air bags to inflate.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING CAUTION WARNING

Occupant could be injured. Protection of occupants could be Children could be injured seriously
• Wear the seat belt at all times even limited. by air bag in collision.
if your vehicle is equipped with an • Do not stick anything on steering • NEVER INSTALL A REAR-FACING
air bag. wheel and instrument panel. CHILD RESTRAINT IN THE FRONT
• The air bag system serves as • Do not cover steering wheel and SEAT.
supplement to the seat belt. instrument panel with other mate- A rear-facing child restraint could
rials. be struck by the inflating front
passenger air bag. Always secure
WARNING
a rear-facing child restraint in the
Alteration of components could in- CAUTION
rear seat.
jure someone. Under the following conditions the • A front-facing child restraint
• Do not modify original components. air bag system will not be triggered. should be secured in the rear seat
• Rear impacts whenever possible. If installed in
• Rollovers the front seat, adjust the seat as
CAUTION • Minor frontal collisions far back as it will go.
Treatment by unauthorized persons • Children who have outgrown child
could be dangerous and cause inju- restraint systems should sit in rear
WARNING
ries. seat and be restrained with seat
• The air bag system must only be The air bag is designed only for fac-
belt.
disposed by Ssangyong Dealer. tory equipped vehicles.
• The air bag system must only be • Modification will adversely affect
replaced by Ssangyong Dealer. system operation and performance
and may cause personal injury.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTION WARNING WARNING

Repairs by unauthorized persons • Never impact on the air bag in- • The air bag is made by nylon, so
could cause injury. stallations by hands or tools. you can get light injuries like
• Repairs to instrument panel You could be injured by abrupt in- abrasion or burn during airbag
should only be done by Ssangyong flation. inflation.
Dealer. • Air bag components will be very • Never alter or modify the air bag
hot after the deployment. Do not and seat belt pretensioner related
touch them. components.
CAUTION
• Do not place any objects on the air • During service, the correct service
• Once air bag system is triggered, bag inflation portion. You may be procedures or cautions should be
the triggered bag assembly should injured by those objects during observed, or the air bag and seat
be removed from the vehicle and deployment. belt pretensioner will be defective
replaced with new one. • The infants, children, pregnant or can cause even death.
• You could suffer injuries of abra- and old should be seated in the • There are explosive materials in the
sion on your hands and face skins rear seats. air bag and seat belt pretensioner,
after deployment. • You could suffer secondary inju- so contact Ssangyong Dealer or
• Even if your vehicle is crashed in ries caused by inflated air bag Ssangyong Authorized Service Op-
low speed (out of air bag inflation such as an abrasion, a burn and eration when scrap the vehicle.
range), check and service your ve- injuries by broken glasses. • When the airbag is inflated, the
hicle for your safety. • Non-toxic gas will come out when relevant components will be very
• Do not move your seat too close to the air bag is inflated and your hot, so do not touch them until
the steering wheel or dashboard. skin, eyes and nose could be cool down to prevent burning.
troubled by this gas, if so, wash it • Take a proper postures on the seat.
out with cold and clean water. If
trouble continues, see your doctor.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVER’S AIR BAG*

WARNING CAUTION
• Never attempt to disassemble, as- Repairs by unauthorized persons
semble or repair the air bag sys- could cause injury.
tem in other than Ssangyong • Repairs to steering wheel, steering
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized column and air bag should be
Service Operation. done by only Ssangyong Dealer.
• Never modify or change the steer-
ing wheel with other non-genuine
parts. WARNING
• If the air bag warning light in the Seat belt use is required at all times.
instrument panel stays ON, there The driver’s air bag is stored in the center The air bag system will not activate
could be defectives in the system, pad of the steering wheel. in all accidents.
check and repair from Ssangyong The air bag inflates within milliseconds dur- The air bag system is designed to
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized ing a crash and forms a safety cushion for protect the driver’s head and chest
Service Operation. the driver. After the air bag completely in- only. It is not a full sized air bag and
• The air bag system should be inflates, it immediately deflates so that it does will not protect the driver’s upper
spected after 10th year from its not interfere with the driver’s visibility or and lower body.
installation regardless of its ap- ability to steer and operate other controls. Failure to wear seat belts may in-
pearance and other conditions. The air bag inflates with considerable force crease the risk of severity of personal
and speed. It is therefore important that the injury to the driver.
driver’s seat and seat back should be cor- The air bag system components, par-
rectly adjusted for the air bag to be fully ticularly the center of the steering
effective. The driver’s seat should be ad- wheel, will be very hot after infla-
justed so that the steering wheel can be tion. Do not touch them.
reached with the arms slightly angled.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEATBELT PRETENSIONER
FRONT PASSENGER’S AIR BAG* SIDE AIR BAG* (FRONT SEATS)*
An air bag is fitted on the upper side of glove Side air bags are inside of the driver’s and When a strong frontal impact occurs, seat
box. passenger’s door and will be triggered belt pretensioner rewinds the seat belts im-
The system is of the same types as fitted when side collision. mediately to protect occupant’s face and
for the driver. chest.
This air bag is quite large and inflates with WARNING
considerable force. It can seriously hurt a • Do not lean or impact on the seats NOTE
front seat passenger who is not the proper equipped with side air bag. The noise, smokes and dust that oc-
position and not wearing the sea belt prop- • Do not modify or cover the seats curred during the front air bag/side
erly. equipped with side air bag. air bag’s inflation and seat belt
Front seat passenger should move the seat pretensioner’s operations are nor-
as far back as practical to sit well back in mal and harmless to human body,
the seat. but sometimes they can irritate,
therefore escape from the vehicle as
soon as possible while watching the
surroundings.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT AIR BAG/PRETENSIONER WHEN COMES ON THE AIR BAG

MAY NOT BE TRIGGERED* WARNING LIGHT*
Front air bag and pretensioner may The system may have some defectives and
not be triggered results in inoperative when in a collision.
1. When the vehicle is side impacted or Have the system checked and repaired im-
rear impacted (over 30 degrees of angle mediately by Ssangyong Dealer or
from straight ahead direction). Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
2. When the vehicle is rolled over.
3. When the sensors can not detect the
frontal crashes (out of the air bag infla-
tion)
4. When crashed on the narrow objects
such as electric pole or trees.
5. When stuck into the overflow or mud
puddle.
6. When the front of your vehicle is jammed
under the lorry’s vessel.
GETtheMANUALS.org
5
VENTILATION, HEATING AND
AIR CONDITIONING*
GETtheMANUALS.org
5–2 VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING*
GENERAL
You can set the proper temperature
according to seasonal conditions and operate
the air conditioner or heater by operating the
switches. Properly operate the air conditioner
and heater to keep the comfortable driving
condition. If the vehicle drives in low speed
(approx. less than 10 km/h) or stops, the air
intake mode will be changed to recirculation
mode automatically to prevent inlet of the
fumes from other vehicles. In AUTO mode, if
you operate wipers, the air conditioner will
turn ON and switches to fresh air intake
mode automatically to defrost the windshield
window.
CAUTION
Use only R-134a for refrigerant in
this system.
WARNING
If you sleep while operating the air
conditioner or heater and closing all
the windows, you may be suffocated
to death due to lack of ventilation.
When you operate the air conditioner
or heater, ventilate frequently.
GETtheMANUALS.org
VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING* 5–3
VOLUME CONTROL DIRECTION CONTROL VENT
You can control the volume of the airflow You can control the direction of airflow by Front Left and Right
by rotating this dial type lever. moving the lever position. You can control the volume and direction of
the airflow through both adjustable side
vents toward either side of the front
passenger area.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Center Center Console Rear Seat

You can control the direction of the airflow You can control the volume and direction of You can control the direction of the airflow
through both adjustable center vents toward the airflow through both adjustable center through adjustable side vents toward side
the center of the front passenger area. vents toward the center of the rear of the rear passenger area.
passenger area.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS

1. Temperature control switch
2. AUTO switch
3. Fan speed control switch
4. Rear air conditioner switch
5. AMB switch
6. OFF switch
7. MODE switch
8. Air conditioner switch
9. Defroster switch
10. Air source selection switch
11. Rear air conditioning indicator
GETtheMANUALS.org
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
AUTO SWITCH SWITCH FAN SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
Press the switch to turn on the system. On You can adjust the temperature between The fan speed can be adjusted in 6 stages.
the VFD, the AUTO indicator will be comes 18°C ~ 32°C. • Turn the switch counterclockwise to
on. • Turn the switch counterclockwise to reduce the fan speed.
In ‘AUTO’ mode, the fan speed, air flow and lower the temperature by 0.5°C degree. • Turn the switch clockwise to increase
air vent will be automatically controlled • Turn the switch clockwise to raise the the fan speed.
according to the adjusted temperature. temperature by 0.5°C degree.
When the switch is operated, the fan speed
shows up as bar and “AUTO” goes out.
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH* AMB SWITCH
Press the switch to operate the rear air When the switch is rotated, the fan speed If you press the switch, it will show you the
conditioner. will be controlled in 3 stages. ambient temperature for 5 seconds. It will be
Press the switch again to stop the rear air returned to its original display after displaying
With the separate airflow direction control
conditioner. the temperature. On the VFD, the OUTSIDE
lever, you can adjust the airflow direction.
indicator will be comes on.
Operation
If you press the switch again during its
1. Turn on the front air conditioner switch CAUTION
ambient temperature display, it will be
and fan speed control switch. The rear air conditioner cannot returned to its original display.
2. Press the rear air conditioner switch. operate without turning on the front
3. Rotate the rear fan speed control switch air conditioner switch, front fan
to operate the rear air conditioner. speed control switch and rear air
conditioner switch even if the rear
fan speed control switch is operated.
However, the air comes in according
to fan speed control switch position.
GETtheMANUALS.org
OFF SWITCH AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH DEFROSTER SWITCH
Press the switch to turn off the air When you press the switch, the indicator When you press the switch, the airflow
conditioning system and displays on the light ( ) comes on and the air conditioner direction will be changed to windshield and
VFD. starts to operate. door glasses, the air conditioner operates
When you press the switch again, the air automatically and outside air comes in. At
conditioner stops operation and indicator this moment, the indicator ( ) comes on.
goes out. When the defrosting is completed, press the
AUTO indicator doesn’t come on during the switch to return to normal operations.
switch operation. When the switch is operated, the air
conditioner indicator ( ) and fresh air
CAUTION intake mode indicator ( ) comes on.
When the ambient temperature is At this moment, AUTO indicator goes out.
extreme low, the air conditioner may
not operate to protect the air
conditioner system even the switch is
pressed and the indicator came on.
GETtheMANUALS.org
MODE SWITCH
By pressing the switch, the air flow mode Position Position
changes as shown in order.
L R
L R
When the switch is operated, the AUTO

indicator goes out.
Position Position Position
L R R
L
L R
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPERATING TIPS FOR

AIR SOURCE SELECTION SWITCH VENTILATION SYSTEM
If your vehicle has been parked in direct During the winter or summer, to prevent the
sunlight, open the windows before turning direct blow of the cold or hot air, the fan
on the air conditioning (A/C). speed will start from first stage or the air
flow will be directed to defrost mode while
To clear foggy windows on rainy days or in
the initial operation of air conditioner.
high humidity, decrease the humidity by
using the A/C. If the temperature indicator blinks during
vehicle starting, there are defectives in the
Turn on the A/C system for a few minutes
automatic air conditioner. In this case,
at least once each week, even in winter
operate the air conditioner manually and
months or when the A/C system is not being
check it from Ssangyong Dealer or
used regularly.
By pressing the switch, outside air intake Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
This maintains proper lubrication of the
mode and recirculation mode changes
compressor and the seals and will prolong During the winter when the air conditioner
alternatively.
the service life of the system. is not used regularly, run the air conditioner
When the fresh air intake mode is selected,
once or twice every month for 5 ~ 10
indicator ( ) comes on. Driving in stop-and-go traffic may reduce the
minutes. Otherwise, the oil in the compressor
Recirculation mode is selected ( ) effectiveness of the A/C system.
will not be circulated and could result in
indicator comes on. When the switch is
When the temperature is set initially, do not malfunctions. Do not forget to run the air
operated, the AUTO indicator goes out.
operate the temperature control switch conditioner in low speed.
CAUTION unnecessarily. The time to get to the set
When the air conditioner is not used in
Long time driving in recirculation temperature may be longer.
periods, odors will come out. Run the air
mode can cause inside to become Do not run the air conditioner in recirculation conditioner for 20~30 minutes with the doors
stuffy and windows to fog up. mode for a long time. opened and you could remove the odors.
When the refrigerant is not sufficient, your

cooling capacity will be dropped.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOR GETTING MAXIMUM MANUAL OPERATION OF EACH SIDE VENT - SIDE BLEED
COOLING AND HEATING FUNCTION FUNCTION
If you press the AUTO switch and set the By operating the relevant switch of the Side vent has side bleed function that blows
temperature to LO with temperature control automatic air conditioner, you can control the air regardless of selected mode switch, so
switch, the air conditioner operates with air conditioner operation, airflow direction, it can prevent fogging or icing on the side
maximum fan speeds and the inside air fan speed and air source by manually. glasses by directing side vent toward side
recirculrates. The air flow direction will be glasses during the winter.
Under the automatic cooling.heating, if you
selected to ( ).
control the specific function manually by
If you press the AUTO switch and set the operating the air conditioner switch, fan
temperature to HI with temperature control speed control switch, airflow mode switch
switch, the air conditioner operates with or air source selection switch, then the
maximum fan speeds and outside air will other functions will continue automatic
flow into the vehicle. The air flow direction operations. At this moment, the AUTO
will be selected to ( ). indicator goes out.
To stop the maximum cooling and heating, If you want full automatic functions again
press the OFF switch. after manual adjustment, press the AUTO
switch. At this moment, the AUTO indicator
comes on.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SUPPLEMENTARY HEATING
DEVICE (DIRECT INJECTION
ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE) PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) FFH (Fuel Fired Heater)
• The DI engine equipped vehicle has the This supplemeatary heater is an electrical air This supplemeatary heater is a fuel burning
supplementary heating devices to heating type and installed on the heater type and improves the heating effect by
increase the heating effect before the outlet port. This device improves the heating increasing the engine coolant temperature.
engine coolant is fully heated. effect by increasing the temperature of This device is operated by two steps
The supplementary heating devices are flowing air into the passeger room. according to the coolant temperature and the
as follows: This device is operational/non-operational ambient temperature. Contary to PTC, FFH
- FFH (Fuel Fired Heater) when the engine control unit supplies/cuts- cannot be operated or stopped by driver's
- PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) off the voltage to PTC according to the intention. The FFH is automatically operated
• PTC: Standard equipment, FFH: Optional coolant temperature and the ambient by conditions of the coolant temperature and
equipment temperature. the ambient temperature.
• Operational Condition • FFH Operation

This device is activated when the - The FFH system operates up to more 2
temperature switch is at any position other minutes to burn the residual fuel inside
than “OFF” position and the coolant the system when stopping the engine
temperature and the ambient temperature is during its operation.
within a specified range. Therefore, a certain period of FFH
operation after stopping the engine is not
• Non-operational Condition
a mulfunction.
- The temperature switch is at “OFF” - In initial operating stage, the fuel pump
position generates the operating sound and the
- Defective ambient temperature sensor FFH heater produces white smoke.
- During engine cranking These are normal states to fill the fuel
- Too low battery voltage into the FFH fuel line.
- During pre-glowing process (indicator ON)
GETtheMANUALS.org
REPLACING AIR CONDITIONER

FILTER
Replace the air conditioner filter at every
10,000 km of driving. However, if the
vehicle is operated under severe
conditions such as dusty road, unpaved
rpad, and excessive air conditioner and
heater operation, shorten the replacement
interval.
CAUTION
If the air conditioner filter is
contaminated, cooling capacity is 1. Open the glove box and remove it from 2. Unscrew the filter cover bolt inside
decresed and unpleasant odor is dash panel by pushing both holders to glove box and remove the cover.
generated. arrow directions.
Replace the air conditioner filter
when CAUTION
• unpleasant odor is generated at
Do not apply excessive force to the
first operation after long unused
holders when removing the glove
period.
box. It may cause a deformation of
• cooling and blowing capacity are
holders and results in a loose
decreased.
installation.
GETtheMANUALS.org
3. Pull in the primary air conditioner filter to 4. Pull up and in the secondary air CAUTION
remove it. conditioner filter to remove it,
Replace both air conditioner filters
5. Install new air conditioner filters in the
at a time and pay attention to the
reverse order of removal.
installing direction.
GETtheMANUALS.org
6
TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM
GETtheMANUALS.org
6–2 TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM
CAUTIONS IN USING THE TURBO-

CHARGER
What is the turbocharger?
Turbochargers are based on gas turbine
engine technology, but operate under con-
siderably greater pressure. The turbo-
charger consists of two turbo elements, a
turbine and a compressor, both of which are
driven from the main center shaft. The tur-
bine rotates between 50,000-160,000 spins
per minute and uses the energy of the ex-
haust gas to drive the compressor. The com-
pressor, in turn, draws in fresh air which it
supplies to the cylinders in compressed
from. As more fuel is drawn into the engine,
output performance is boosted between 15-
30% in comparison to a non-turbocharged
engine.
Advantages of a turbocharger
Turbocharger helps the engine operate more
smoothly and with greater efficiency.
• Increase specific power
• Compensate for power loss at altitude
• Reduce emissions
GETtheMANUALS.org
TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM 6–3
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
What is the intercooler? The vehicle owner should be encouraged to CAUTION
The inter-cooler cools down the com- observe the following precautions to ensure
• At low ambient temperature, or
pressed air temperature to increase the maximum turbocharger service life.
when ever the vehicle has not been
engine power by increasing the air density. used for a long period, normal
CAUTION
• Operate the engine above idle only engine oil pressure and flow is
after normal engine oil pressure affected. Under these conditions
has been established. the engine should be started and
Forcing the turbocharger to allowed to idle for a few minutes
operate before the bearings are before operating at a higher rpm.
adequately lubricated creates • Avoid long periods of engine
unnecessary friction. idling. The combination of low-
• Take steps to reduce temperature pressures in the turbine and
and speeds from their maximum compressor may allow oil to seep
before shutting down the engine. past the seal into the turbine or the
The engine equipped with turbo- compressor.
charger develops much more heats • The turbocharger may need to be
than normal engine, so when the pre-oiled after oil change or any
engine is stopped abruptly, the oil service that involves oil draining.
in the bearings may evaporate due Crank the engine a few times
to heats and can cause sticks. before allowing start, then start
• Use only designated engine oil the engine and allow it to idle for
and observe inspection and a period to establish full oil
replacement intervals. circulation and pressure before
operating at higher rpm.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TURBOCHARGER INSPECTION
Good maintenance practices should be ob- NOTE
served, particularly regarding air filtration
and oil quality and filtration. The most defectives in turbocharger
These areas are important because of a are turbine blade damages or com-
turbocharger’s speed of operation. pressor bearing sticks due to lack of
Proper operating procedures and preventive oil supply, contaminated engine oil
maintenance practices enhance good turbo- or external materials.
service lift and performance.
The contaminated air cleaner can damage
the turbo-charger seriously, so frequently
check the air cleaner and observe the re-
placement intervals.
WARNING
Operating the turbocharger system
without the intake and exhaust mani-
fold mounting can result in severe
engine damage.
The turbocharger should be oper-
ated when every device is normally
installed.
GETtheMANUALS.org
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
GETtheMANUALS.org
7–2 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FINDING DEFECTIVES WHILE COMING ON OIL PRESSURE

DRIVING WARNING LIGHT WHILE DRIVING
CAUTION
• If the oil level is normal, contact
Authorized Service Opera-tion for
the service.
• If the oil level is low, check for
oil leaks. If oil leaks, contact
Authorized Service Opera-tion
for the service.
1. Turn on the hazard warning lamps and Stop the vehicle to safe and level place as
stop the vehicle to safe place. soon as possible and turn off the engine.
2. Set up the warning triangle behind the Check the engine oil levcel as follows. WARNING
vehicle with sufficient safety distance. If you drive on while the oil pressure
1. Turn off the engine and wait for approx. warning light is coming on, the
3. After checking the vehicle, if there are
5 minutes. engine could be stick or relevant
defectives in your vehicle, have your
2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it clean, components could be damaged.
vehivle checked and repair from
reinsert and pull it out again to check the
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
oil level.
thorized Service Operation.
3. If the oil level is low, add engine oil to
the specified level.
4. Start the engine and check the warning
light still come on. If the warning light still
come on, contact Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Opera-
tion for the service.
GETtheMANUALS.org
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 7–3
COMING ON BATTERY CHARGE COMING ON BRAKE SYSTEM COMING ON ABS/EBD WARNING

WARNING LIGHT WHILE DRIVING WARNING LIGHT WHILE DRIVING LIGHT WHILE DRIVING
It means the battery is not charging normally, If the warning light stays on when the If the ABS or EBD warning light comes on
so turn off all unnecessary electrical devices parking brake lever has released, the brake while driving, there may be defectives in
and inspect from Ssangyong Dealer or fluid level is low, so stop driving and contact ABS system or TCS system, if equipped TCS
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- system, so inspect and repair from
rized Service Operation for the service. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
rized Service Operation.
GETtheMANUALS.org
COMING ON , , COMING ON ENGINE CHECK WARNING

INDICATOR WHILE DRIVING LIGHT (DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL CANNOT START THE ENGINE
IDI engine equipped vehicle
AND GASOLINE ENGINE EQUIPPED) When the ignition key is turned to ‘START’
If the starter does not rotate

Check the battery, connection of the battery
terminals, position of the ignition key and
DI engine or gasoline engine equipped vehicle fuse.
If the starter operates but the engine

does not start
Check the fuel level and timing belt.
These indicators come on when the ignition This warning light comes on when the
switch is turned to ON and should go out if ignition switch is turned to ON and goes out If the engine does not start
if the engine is in normal condition. continuously,
the system is in normal condition. If the
Contact Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
and warning light come on or blink (IDI CAUTION Authorized Service Operation.
Engine), or warning light stays on, have When this warning light comes on,
the 4WD system checked at Ssangyong the engine driving force may be CAUTION
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service decreased or the engine may stall. On vehicle equipped with an
Operation. These are indication of activating automatic transmission, the engine
the safety mode to protect engine will be started in P and N positions.
NOTE
system. In this case, have the engine
When using 4WD switch, “4WD LOW” system checked at Ssangyong Dealer
or “4WD HIGH” indicator will blinks or Ssangyong Authorized Service
until the shift is completed. It shows Operation.
that the shift operation is in progress.
GETtheMANUALS.org
STARTING THE ENGINE WITH

JUMPER CABLES
CAUTION Before jump starting with an another
WARNING
battery:
• Do not try to start vehicle by (Continued)
pushing or pulling it. 1. Apply parking brake.
• Wear eye protection when working
• This can damage the catalytic con-
near any battery. 2. In a vehicle with automatic transmission,
verter and automatic transaxle, and shift to PARK; with manual 5 speed
• Do not allow battery fluid to con-
may cause personal injury.
tact eyes, skin, fabric, or painted transmission, shift to NEUTRAL.
You can start a vehicle that has a dis- surfaces.
3. Switch off all electrical accessories.
charged battery by transferring electrical • Make sure battery providing jump
power to it from a battery in another vehicle. start has the same voltage as the
battery receiving the jump. CAUTION
• Do not disconnect discharged Turn audio system off before jump
WARNING
battery from vehicle. starting your vehicle. Otherwise you
Batteries can explode. • Failure to follow these precautions may damage audio system.
You could be burned by battery acid. or the following instructions for
Electrical short could injure you or starting an engine with jumper
damage the vehicles. cables can cause battery to WARNING
• Do not expose battery to flames or explode, resulting in burns from Always route jumper cables so they
sparks. battery acid, or electrical short cannot catch on rotating parts in the
• Do not lean over battery while circuit. engine compartment. Otherwise you
jump starting vehicle. • This can create damage to electrical may damage vehicle and cause
• Do not allow cable terminals to systems in both vehicles, and cause serious personal injury.
touch each other. serious personal injury.
(Continued)
GETtheMANUALS.org
Attaching Jumper Cables

4. Make the last connection to a suitable 9. Operate the discharged vehicle for
ground, such as a steel bracket bolted approximately 20 minutes. This will allow
to the engine block. the charging system to recharge your
battery.
5. The engine of the vehicle providing the
jump start can be allowed to run during 10. If this discharge condition recurs, consult
the jump start. Attempts to start your Ssangyong dealer or an authorized
the engine of the vehicle with the Ssangyong Service Operation.
discharged battery should be made at
intervals of about one minute and should WARNING
not last longer than 15 seconds each.
• Last connection to the vehicle to
To jump start your battery, connect the Once the previously discharged vehicle is be charged should NOT be made
jumper cables in the following order: to the negative (“–”) battery
running:
1. Connect one clamp of the first lead of terminal.
the jumper cable to the positive terminal 6. Carefully disconnect the ground • Attach the clamp for this last
of the charged battery. (identified by a connection (“–”). Begin with the vehicle connection to a steel bracket
“+” sign on the battery case or terminal.) with the discharged battery. bolted to the engine block.
2. Connect other end of this same jumper Leave the discharged vehicle running. • This last connection should be as
cable lead to the positive terminal of the far away from the battery as
discharged battery. (the “+” terminal.) 7. Disconnect the negative lead from possible.
vehicle providing the jump. • Connecting the jumper cable to the
3. Connect one end of the second lead on
jumper cable to the negative terminal of 8. Disconnect the “+” lead from both negative terminal of the dis-
the charged battery. (identified by a “–” batteries. charged battery could result in
sign on the battery case or terminal.) arcing and possibly a battery
explosion. Serious personal injury
or vehicle damage can result.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE ENGINE IS

OVERHEATING
If the fan is operating but the temperature is
WARNING not lowered, stop the engine and let it cool.
• Make sure that the battery provid-
Then, check the coolant level. If it’s low,
ing the jump start has the same
check for leaks in the radiator hoses and
voltage as the battery in your ve-
connections, heater hoses and connections,
hicle (12 V).
radiator, and water pump.
• If the vehicle moves abruptly
during jump starting, there could If you find a leak or other damage, or if
be unexpected accidents. Before coolant is still leaking, do not run the engine
starting the vehicle, apply the until these problems have been corrected.
parking brake and position Consult Ssangyong Dealer immediately.
the shift lever to P (automatic If the engine coolant temperature gauge
transmission) or neutral (manual shows an overheating condition or you have WARNING
transmission) another reason to suspect the engine may Steam from an overheated engine
• If you push to start the gasoline be overheating, stop and park the vehicle.
can burn you badly.
engine equipped vehicle, the The air conditioning must be off. Leave the
• If steam is seen, don’t go to front
engine idling for a few minutes and check
expensive 3-way catalytic converter of vehicle. Get everyone away from
that the cooling fan is operating.
will be damaged, therefore never the vehicle.
attempt to start by pushing the If the fan is not operating, turn the ignition • Switch off engine.
vehicle. off and consult your Ssangyong Dealer • Allow engine to cool.
immediately. • Open engine hood when steam is
no longer visible.
If the fan is operating and if steam is not
• Do not remove coolant surge tank
coming from the engine compartment, open
cap until the engine and radiator
the engine hood and idle the engine until it
are cool.
cools.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE SELECTOR LEVER

DOESN’T MOVE
5. Have your vehicle repaired by Ssangyong
WARNING
If you pour cold water suddenly into Operation as soon as possible.
the overheated engine, the engine
could be damaged.
Add coolant after allowing the
engine to cool enough.
Your vehicle has a shift lever lock control

system. Before you can shift from park (P),
the ignition must be ON and you must
depress the brake pedal.
1. Turn ignition off.
2. Pry off the cover.
3. Push the shift lock release lever by
inserting a proper stick. Then, with the
brake pedal depressed, move the
selector lever to N (neutral).
4. Start engine and shift into the gear you
want.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

Using a lifting type towing car
If not available to use car carrier or towing
dolly, use a lifting type towing.
According to the vehicle’s condition, select
a proper way.
However, the propeller shaft for the
grounded wheels should be disconnected
before towing.
WARNING
• To tow the vehicle with the front/
Using a car carrier Using a towing dolly
rear wheels on the ground, never
If it is necessary to tow your vehicle, If not available to use car acrrier, use a
forget to disconnect the front/rear
contact a Ssangyong dealer or a profes- towing dolly.
propeller shaft from the transfer
sional tow truck service.
case or axle assembly and secure
WARNING them in safe position.
• Never let passengers ride in a • Selector lever should be in neutral
vehicle that is being towed. position.
• Never tow a vehicle faster than • Remove the skid panel when lifting
safe or posted speeds. the front part of the vehicle.
• Never tow a vehicle with damaged • Set the vehicle in 2WD mode for
parts that are not fully secured on part-time 4WD vehicle when lifting
the vehicle. the rear part of the vehicle.
Failure to observe these precautions
can result in personal injury.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EMERGENCY TOWING
• Set the ignition in the ON position to
release the steering column lock and to
permit the operation of brake lamps,
horn and windshield wipers.
• Only the driver should be in the towed
vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
• To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes
from the towing vehicles, close the
windows and place the air intake lever
to the recirculation mode.
For emergency towing when a towing • Drive off slowly and avoid jerky Front towing hooks (left and right)
service is not available, your vehicle is movements.
equipped with the towing hooks under the
front and rear of the vehicle for use with a WARNING
tow rope. When towing with a tow rope, control
of towed vehicle can be lost.
When towing your vehicle with the tow rope:
• Do not tow if the wheels, transmis-
• Secure the rope to both of the towing sion, axles, steering or brakes are
hooks under the front of the vehicle as damaged.
tight as possible. • Do not remove key from ignition
• Switch on the hazard warning flasher switch as this will make the vehicle
of both vehicles. unsteerable.
• Place the gearshift lever in neutral and
release the parking brake.
Rear towing hooks (left and right)
GETtheMANUALS.org
TRAILER TOWING* Trailer Loading

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a To load your trailer properly, you must know
CAUTION how to measure gross trailer weight and
passenger vehicle therefore handling,
When towing the vehicle with a tow trailer ball weight. Gross trailer weight is the
braking, durability and economy will be
rope, the vehicle can be damaged. weight of the trailer plus all cargo in it.
To reduce damage, affected by towing a trailer.
Your safety and satisfaction depend upon You can measure gross trailer weight by
• Use tow hooks only if no other
proper use of correct equipment. Also, you putting the fully loaded trailer on a vehicle
towing equipment is available.
• Only tow the vehicle from front. should avoid overloading and other abusive scale.
• Keep tow rope clear of bumper. use. Trailer ball weight is the downward force
• Ensure tow rope is securely fixed to The maximum loaded trailer weight you can exerted on the hitch by the trailer coupler at
tow hook, at both ends. Check by pull with your vehicle depends on your its normal towing height. This weight can be
pulling on tow rope. intended use and what special equipment measured using a bathroom scale.
• Towing with a tow rope could The weight of your loaded trailer (gross
has been installed on it. Before attempting
cause severe automatic transmis- trailer weight) should never exceed the
sion damage. When towing vehicle any towing, ensure that the correct
equipment is fitted to your vehicle. specified values.
with automatic transmission, use
Your Ssangyong Dealer will help supply and The maximum permissible trailer ball weight
flat bed or wheel lift equipment.
• When towing another vehicle use install towing equipment to suit your is 140kg.
the rear towing hook. requirement. The permissible trailer loads are valid for
several gradients from 6.8% to 12.6% ac-
cording to engine power applied.
CAUTION When the trailer has been coupled, the
The distance between the towing permissible rear axle load for the fully loaded
vehicle and the towed vehicle towing vehicle (including occupants) must
shouldn’t be over 25 m and tow the not be exceeded.
vehicle within 25 km with 5 km/h of
towing speed. To recognize the
towing rope, bind a white colored
cloth on the center of the lope.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING
1 Total gross vehicle weight with
trailer must not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of the
vehicle.
The total gross vehicle weight is the
weight of the vehicle, driver, passen-
gers, luggage or cargo, plus the
weight of the hitch and the trailer
tongue weight.
1. Hitch* WARNING
Maximum Load Limits (unit: kg) In higher elevations the engine WARNING
output and gradability may drop so
Type Trailer Tongue Incorrect loading and crosswinds,
that it may not be possible for the
with brake 3,500 140
large trucks passing or road rough-
D29ST, permissible trailer loads to be fully
ness can cause swaying or trailer
G23D without brake 750 140 utilized in mountainous territory.
separation.
So, after 1,000m height, permissible
G28D, with brake 3,500 140 • Adjust ball load by distribution of
trailer loads should be reduced 10%
G32D without brake 750 140 load in trailer.location.
every another 1,000m height.
• Check by weighing loaded trailer
and ball load separately.
• Check the relevant state or terri-
tory registration authorities for the
legal maximum towing weight ca-
pacities.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Trailer Brakes Brake Fluid Towing Tips

If the trailer brakes are used, you should Change the brake fluid every 15,000 km When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
follow all instructions provided by the (9,000 miles) under the following conditions. handle differently compared with normal
manufacturer. Never modify the brake - Towing a trailer frequently. driving condition.
system of your vehicle. - Driving in hilly or mountainous terrain.
For safety, observe the following precau-
tions:
Trailer Lights Automatic Transmission Fluid
Make sure your trailer is equipped with lights More frequent maintenance is required if your • Practice turning, stopping, and reversing
which meet country and local requirements. vehicle tows trailer frequently. before you begin towing in traffic.
Always check for the proper operation of Do not tow in traffic until you are
all trailer lights before you start to tow. confident that you can handle the
vehicle and trailer safely.
Tyres • Before driving, make sure that the lighting
When towing trailers, be sure your tyres are system of the trailer works properly.
properly inflated to the inflation pressure. • Do not drive faster than 50 km/h or legal
maximum speeds, whichever is lower.
Safety Chains • Make sure that you have enough room
Always attach safety chains between your when cornering and avoid sudden
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety maneuvers.
chains under the tongue of the trailer so that • Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
the tongue will not drop to the road if it stops.
becomes separated from the hitch. Follow • Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
the manufacturer’s recommendation for • Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
attaching safety chains. Always leave just speed.
enough slack to permit full turning. Never • Always have someone guide you when
allow safety chains to drag on the road. reversing.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking on Hills
• Allow adequate stopping distance. • If someone removing the blocks stands You really should not park your vehicle, with
Stopping distance is increased when you directly behind the trailer, he could be a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
tow a trailer. injured. If your brakes or the hitch wrong, your rig could start to move. People
• Slow down and shift down into a lower slipped, the trailer could roll backward. can be injured, and both your vehicle and
gear before descending steep or long Make sure anyone removing blocks from the trailer can be damaged.
downhill grades. On vehicle equipped your wheels stands to one side. But if you ever have to park your rig on a
with automatic transmission, select • Take note of trailer manufacturer’s hill, here’s how to do it:
drive range “2” or, if necessary, “1” for instructions.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t
engine braking efforts.
Driving on Grades shift into PARK (P) for automatic
• Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear transmission yet, or into a gear for a
long or too frequently, which will cause
before you start down a long or sleep manual transmission.
the brakes to overheat and result in
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you 2. Have someone place chocks under the
reduced brake efficiency.
might have to use your brakes so much that trailer wheels.
• Always block the wheels on both
they would get hot and no longer work well. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
On a long uphill grade, shift down and release the regular brakes until the
the parking brake firmly.
reduce your speed to around 40 km/h to chocks absorb the load.
• Parking on a steep slope is not
reduce the possibility of engine and other 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply
recommended.
components overheating. your parking brake, and then shift to
You really should not park your vehicle,
PARK (P) for automatic transmission, or
with a trailer attached, on a hill.
First or Reverse gear for a manual
If something goes wrong, such as
transmission.
the trailer/caravan hitch becoming disen-
5. Release the regular brakes.
gaged, people can be injured and both
the vehicle and trailer can be damaged.
GETtheMANUALS.org
When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the when you’re pulling a trailer. See the
pedal down while you: maintenance Schedule for more on this.
• Start your engine Things that are especially important in trailer
• Shift into a gear and operation are engine oil, brake pads & discs,
• Release the parking brake. automatic transmission fluid. Each of these
2. Let up on the brake pedal. is covered in this manual and the index will
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
the chocks. it’s a good idea to review these sections
4. Stop and have someone pick up and before you start your trip.
store the chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts
and bolts are tight.
GETtheMANUALS.org
8
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
GETtheMANUALS.org
8–2 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or mainte- • Remember that the battery, ignition • To avoid the possibility of personal in-
nance work on your vehicle, always exer- cables, and vehicle wiring carry high jury, you should always turn off the ig-
cise care to reduce the risk of personal in- currents or voltage. Be careful not to nition switch and remove the key before
jury or damage to the vehicle. cause a short circuit. working under the engine hood unless
Here are some general precautions that • When performing any checks in an en- the procedure specifically requires oth-
should be closely observed in carrying out closed space with the engine running, erwise. If it requires running the engine
any service operation. such as in a garage, be sure there is while working under the engine hood, do
proper ventilation. not permit any clothing, such as ties or
• Do not work on the engine while it is hot.
• Keep used oil, coolant and other fluids handkerchiefs, near the engine or cool-
Always turn it off and allow it to cool.
out of reach of children and pets. ing fan. They can become entangled in
• Never get under the vehicle while it is
• Empty and used oil/fluid containers must moving parts and result in personal in-
supported by a jack. If it is necessary
not be disposed of in the household jury and damage to the vehicle. Also
to work under the vehicle, use safety
refuse waste. Use your local authorized remove watches, bracelets, and rings
stands.
waste disposal facilities when dispos- for safety.
• Keep smoking materials, flames, and
ing of them. • Use only Ssangyong Genuine Parts for
sparks away from the battery and all
• If it is necessary to check beneath the service and maintenance.
fuel and fuel-related parts.
engine hood with the engine running, • Some lubricants may damage the paint
• Never connect or disconnect either the
park the vehicle on level ground, place work. Take attention to prevent the lu-
battery or any transistorized component
the shift lever in NEUTRAL (manual bricants dropping on the painted surface.
while the ignition switch is ON.
transmission) or “P” position (automatic
• When connecting the battery cables, pay
transmission) and apply the parking
special attention to their polarities. Never
brake firmly. Unexpected and possibly
connect a positive cable to a negative
sudden vehicle movement may occur if
terminal or a negative cable to a posi-
these precautions are not taken.
tive terminal.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 8–3
A NOTE ON SAFETY DRIVER’S CHECK LIST

To avoid the possibility of injury from the The following checks are recommended 7. Check the operation of the door locking
cooling fan, carry out all engine checks with before driving to maintain safe and depend- mechanism.
the ignition switched off so that the fan is able vehicle operation. 8. Check the clutch pedal free play, height
not operating. and function.
The fan is controlled by ECU (electronic Exterior
9. Check the brake pedal free play, height
control unit) and consequently may start to 1. Check the tyres for inflation pressure and function.
operate unexpectedly. and damage.
2. Check the wheel bolts for looseness. Within the engine compartment
When the ignition is on, it is also highly dan- 3. Check the operation of the lights. 1. Check the engine oil level.
gerous to touch live parts as the electronic 4. Check for any oil, water, fuel and fluid 2. Check the engine coolant level in the
ignition system has a greater current igni- leaks. surge tank.
tion power than conventional systems. 5. Check the outside rearview mirrors and 3. Check the battery condition.
WARNING license plate for dirt or damage. 4. Check the level of windshield washer
solution.
You can injury, burn or shock. Within the vehicle
5. Check the level of the brake and clutch
• Make sure engine is off. 1. Check for steering wheel play and fluid in the reservoir.
• Do not touch live parts when looseness. 6. Check the level of the power steering
lgnition is on. 2. Check the parking brake lever travel. fluid.
3. Check the operation of the horn, wind- 7. Check the transmission oil level
WARNING shield wipers and turn signals. 8. Check the drive belt condition.
4. Check the operation of instruments and
Keep service products away from
indicator warning lights.
children. If a service product has
5. Check level of fuel in the fuel tank
been swallowed, consult a doctor against fuel gauge.
without delay.
6. Check the position of the rearview
Dispose of service product in an en-
mirrors.
vironmentally responsible way.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Direct Injection Diesel Engine Equipped Vehicle (D27DT)
1. Coolant surge tank
2. Air cleaner
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine
5. Priming pump
6. Fuel filter
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Clutch fluid reservoir
(for manual transmission)
9. Battery
10. Washer fluid reservoir
11. Relay and fuse box
12. Power steering fluid reservoir
13. Engine oil level dipstic
GETtheMANUALS.org
Indirect Injection Diesel Engine Equipped Vehicle (D29ST)

2. Air cleaner
4. Engine
5. Fuel filter
8. Battery
GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline Engine Equipped Vehicle (G32D, G28D)

2. Air cleaner
4. Engine
6. Battery
GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline Engine (G23D)

2. Air cleaner
4. Engine
5. VIN plate Fuel filter
6. Washer fluid tank
7. Battery
8. Fuse Box
9. Brake fluid tank
10. Power steering fluid tank
11. Engine oil level dipstick
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL
When replenishing, use the same specifica-
tion of oil as used at the last oil change.
WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with
engine oil may cause skin disorders.
• Avoid excessive skin contact.
• Wash thoroughly after contact.
WARNING
Checking procedure To check the oil level, pull out the dipstick,
The engine oil must be kept at the right level wipe it clean and reinsert it as far as it will Keep used engine oil out of reach of
to help assure proper lubrication of your go. Pull it out again and check that the oil children.
vehicle’s engine. It is normal for an engine level is between the lower mark (Min) and
to use some oil. It is owner’s responsibility the upper mark (Max) on the oil dipstick.
CAUTION
to check the oil level at regular intervals Also check the oil on the dipstick rod for con-
tamination. Operating with insufficient or too
(such as every fuel stop).
If the level gets to the lower point, add much amount of oil can damage the
The engine oil level should be checked with
enough oil not to exceed the level of the engine.
the vehicle standing on level ground.
upper mark. • Check engine oil regularly.
After stopping the engine, wait a few min-
The oil should not go above the upper mark • Top up if required.
utes before checking the level for the oil to
on the dipstick. This would lead, for example, • Don’t add too much oil.
drain back to the oil pan. If the engine is cold,
the oil may take considerably longer to drain to increased oil consumption, fouling of the
back. spark plugs and excessive formation of
carbon residue.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Change of Engine Oil and Oil Filter

CAUTION
Model Specification Service interval Capacity (L)
In order to ensure sufficient lubrica-
tion of the moving parts, select en- Initial change: 5,000 km, Change
gine oil viscosity (SAE grades) ac- Indirect Injection Approved by every 10,000 km or 12 months
6.0 ~ 8.0
cording to ambient temperature. Diesel Engine MB Sheet 229.1 (But, shorten the service interval
or 229.3 under severe conditions)
Viscosity: See
NOTE Change every 15,000 km or 12
Direct Injection MB Sheet 224.1
Damage to the engine by operating months (But, shorten the service 6.8 ~ 8.3
Diesel Engine
with insufficient oil invalidates the interval under severe conditions)
warranty.
G23D Approved by
Initial change: 10,000 km, Change 5.5 ~ 7.5
Engine MB Sheet 229.1
every 15,000 km or 12 months
NOTE or 229.3
(But, shorten the service interval
In only case not available MB 229.x G32D/G28D Viscosity: See 7.0 ~ 9.0
under severe conditions)
approved oil for service, API SH (or Engine MB Sheet 224.1
better grade) and/or ACEA A2/A3 oil
mab be used, however it would
rather recommended to shorten the
change interval around 30%.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine Oil and Oil Filter Change Severe Conditions FLUID*
Engine oil changes are to be carried out • When most trips are less than 6km. To ensure proper functioning, efficiency and
depending on time intervals and mileage in- • Operating when outside temperatures durability of the automatic transmission, it is
tervals, since oil loses its lubrication prop- remain below freezing and when most of the utmost importance that the fluid is al-
erties not only through engine operation but trips are less than 16km. ways kept at the proper level.
also through ageing. • When most trips include extended idling
The automatic transmission does not have
and/or frequent low-speed operation as
Under exceptional conditions e.g. frequent a dipstick to check the fluid level. You may
in stop-and-go traffic.
cold starts or predominantly urban traffic and have the fluid level checked by your
• When operating in dusty areas.
stop-and-go traffic, the engine oil and en- Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
• Towing a trailer.
gine oil filter should be changed at shorter rized Service Operation.
intervals rather than the recommended main-
The only way to find out fluid level decrease
tenance schedule.
is to check if the automatic transmission is
Engine oil filter elements should be replaced
leaking.
at the same time with engine oil.
If a fluid leak occurs the vehicle should be
WARNING taken to your Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation to
Used engine oil and their containers
be repaired as soon as possible.
can be a hazard to health and the
environment. Fluid should not be added to the automatic
• Do not dispose of used engine oil transmission without properly setting the
in household refuse waste. fluid level. Overfilling the automatic transmis-
• Use your local authorized waste sion fluid will decrease the automatic trans-
disposal facilities when disposing mission performance and could damage the
of used engine oil. unit.
Use only specified fluid as given in the lu-
bricant chart.
GETtheMANUALS.org
MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

The fluid and filter do not require changing.
WARNING
But, if the vehicle is mainly driven under any
of below conditions, the fluid and filter should After driving, the transmission oil
be changed every 60,000km. temperature may be high enough to
burn you. Wait until transmission oil
and filler plug are cool before check-
Severe Conditions
ing oil level.
• In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 32°C
(90°F) or higher. Service Interval and Capacity
• In hilly or mountains terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing. Service interval
Check the oil level only when the engine is Capacity
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or (Specification)
off, the vehicle is level and the transmission
delivery service.
is cool enough so that you can rest your fin- Inspect every 15,000 km
gers on the transmission case. and change every 4WD: 3.6 L
Service Interval and Capacity 60,000 km 2WD: 3.4 L
Remove the filler plug to check the level.
Service interval Capacity The oil should come to the bottom edge of (ATF DEXRON II, III)
the filler plug hole. If level is low, add oil until
Inspect every 15,000 km
or 12 months it begins to run out of the filler hole. Rein-
4-speed: 9.5 L stall the plug securely.
(But, change every 5-speed: 8.0 L
60,000 km under severe Use only the specified oil as given in the
conditions) lubricant chart.
After installing the plug, visually check the
4-speed: CASTROL TQ 95 transmission case for leaks or damage.
5-speed: Shell ATF 3353
Fuchs ATF 3353
GETtheMANUALS.org
CLUTCH FLUID
(FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION) Service Interval and Capacity
Service interval WARNING

Capacity
(Specification) Keep the clutch fluid out of reach of
children.
Inspect frequently,
Change every 2 years As required
(DOT 3, 4) WARNING
Used clutch fluid and their contain-
ers can be a hazard to health and
WARNING the environment.
If frequent top up is required, have • Do not dispose of used clutch fluid
system checked by Ssangyong Dealer with household waste.
The clutch fluid level in the master cylinder
or Ssangyong Authorized Service • Use your local authorized waste
should be checked when other underhood
Operation. disposal facilities.
services are performed. The system should
• Have the clutch fluid changed by
be checked for leakage at the same time.
Before checking the fluid level, clean the WARNING
thorized Service Operation.
area around the cap thoroughly. The level The clutch fluid can irritate hands
must not be higher than MAX mark or lower and eyes.
than MIN mark. • Do not allow clutch fluid to make WARNING
If the level falls below the MIN mark, add the contact with skin or eyes. Too much clutch fluid can spill on
fluid to MAX mark. Do not overfill. • If contact happens, rinse affected the engine. The fluid will burn if the
areas immediately with plenty of engine is hot enough. You or others
water. could be burned and the vehicle
• If irritation persists, consult a doc- could be damaged.
tor. Do not overfill the fluid.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TRANSFER CASE FLUID

Use only the specified oil as given in the
CAUTION
lubricant chart.
The clutch fluid systems can get con- After installing the plug, visually check the
taminated and cause loss off system transfer case for leaks or damage.
performance.
Before removing reservoir cap, clean WARNING
thoroughly area around cap.
After driving, the transmission oil
temperature may be high enough to
CAUTION burn you. Wait until transmission oil
Use of non-recommended clutch and filler plug are cool before check-
fluid could cause damage to the ing oil level.
To ensure proper functioning, efficiency
clutch system. and durability of the transfer case, it is of
Use only Ssangyong recommended importance that fluid is always kept at the
clutch fluid. proper level.
Check the oil level only when the engine is

CAUTION off, the vehicle is level and the transfer case
Clutch fluid damages paintwork. is cool enough so that you can rest your fin-
• If spillage onto paintwork, wash gers on the transfer case.
with cold water immediately. Remove the filler plug to check the level.
The oil should come to the bottom edge of
it begins to run out of the filler hole. Rein-
stall the plug securely.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Service Interval, Specification and Capacity BRAKE FLUID

Service interval
Change every 60,000 km
Specification ATF DEXRON II, III,
Indirect Injection
Part time 1.2 ~ 1.4 L
Diesel Engine
Capacity Direct Injection Part time

Diesel Engine, 1.4 ~ 1.5 L
Gasoline Engine Full time (TOD)
The fluid level in the brake fluid tank should
be checked according to the “Maintenance
Schedule”.
Before checking the fluid level, clean the
area around the tank cap thoroughly. The
fluid level in the brake tank must be MAX
mark.
If the level falls below the MIN mark, add the
fluid to MAX mark. Do not overfill.
Low fluid level can indicate a leak in the
brake system. Have the system checked at
nearest Ssangyong Dealer.
GETtheMANUALS.org
To add the brake fluid, first wipe away and

WARNING CAUTION
dirt then unscrew the fluid tank cap. After
removing the cap, top up the fluid to the MAX Keep the brake fluid out of reach of The brake fluid systems can get con-
mark and tighten the cap securely after- children. taminated and cause loss off system
wards. performance.
WARNING
Before removing tank cap, clean
Service interval Capacity thoroughly area around cap.
Used brake fluid and their contain-
Change every ers can be a hazard to health and
2 years As required the environment. CAUTION
(Inspect frequently) • Do not dispose of used brake fluid Use of non-recommended brake fluid
with household waste. could cause damage to the brake
• Use your local authorized waste system.
disposal facilities. Use only Ssangyong recommended
WARNING • Have the brake fluid changed by brake fluid.
The brake fluid can irritate hands Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
and eyes. thorized Service Operation.
• Do not allow brake fluid to make CAUTION
contact with skin or eyes. Brake fluid damages paintwork.
WARNING • If spillage onto paintwork, wash
• If contact happens, rinse affected
areas immediately with plenty of Too much brake fluid can spill on with cold water immediately.
water. the engine. The fluid will burn if the
• If irritation persists, consult a doc- engine is hot enough. You or others
tor. could be burned and the vehicle
could be damaged.
Do not overfill the fluid.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT AND REAR AXLE FLUID

WARNING
After driving, the axle oil tempera-
ture may be high enough to burn
you. Wait until axle oil and filler
plug are cool before checking oil
level.
Check the oil level only when the engine is Service Interval, Specification and Capacity
off, the vehicle is level and the axle is cool
Inspect frequently
enough so that you can rest your fingers Service interval
on the axle housing.
Remove the filler plug to check the level. Front Axle API GL-5 or
Specification
The oil should come to the bottom edge of SAE 80W/90
it begins to run out of the filler hole. Rein- Capacity 1.4 L ~ 1.5 L
stall the plug securely. Inspect frequently
Use only the specified oil as given in the Service interval
lubricant chart.
After installing the plug, visually check the Rear Axle API GL-5 or
Specification
axle housing for leaks or damage. SAE 80W/90
Capacity 2.2 L
GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER STEERING FLUID COOLANT

Service interval Capacity
Check and replenish as
necessary. Approx. 1.1 L
(ATF DEXRON II, III)
WARNING
Operating the vehicle with insuffi-
cient amount of power steering fluid
Check fluid level with engine turned off. could cause damage to the power The cooling system is filled with an ethyl-
The fluid level should lie between the MIN steering unit. ene glycol base coolant.
and MAX marks on the reservoir. • Check level regularly. In the correct concentration the coolant pro-
If it drops to or below the MIN mark, top up • Top up if required. vides excellent corrosion and freeze protec-
with the specified fluid. • If frequent top up is required, have tion for the entire cooling and heating sys-
system checked by Ssangyong tem and must therefore not be replaced by
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized plain water even in summer.
bricant chart.
Service Operation. The coolant level should be between “MAX”
The level in the reservoir should be checked and “MIN” mark on the coolant surge tank
in accordance with the intervals specified when the engine is cool. The level rises at
in this manual. engine operating temperature and drops
again when the engine cools down.
GETtheMANUALS.org
If the level falls below the “MIN” mark, refill WARNING CAUTION
the radiator with a 50/50 mix of soft water
Scalding hot coolant and steam The engine or cooling system could
and antifreeze specified, to provide freez-
could be blown out under pressure, be damaged.
ing and corrosion protection.
which could cause serious injury. • The antifreeze content of the cool-
In order to protect your vehicle in extremely
Never remove the coolant surge tank ant should be maintained at a
cold weather, use a mix 40% soft water and
cap when the engine and radiator minimum of 50%. The antifreeze
60% antifreeze specified.
are hot. content must not be allowed to
exceed 60%.
Coolant concentration • Do not use alcohol or methanol an-
Coolant concentration WARNING
tifreeze or mix them with the speci-
Antifreeze Water Take precautions to prevent anti- fied coolant.
freeze coming in contact with the • Use only soft (demineralized) wa-
General area 50 Vol% 50 Vol% skin or eyes. ter in the coolant mixture.
• If contact happens, rinse affected • Do not overfill the coolant.
Extremely cold
60 Vol% 40 Vol% areas immediately with plenty of • If frequent additions are required,
area
water. contact Ssangyong Dealer for cool-
• If irritation persists, consult doc- ing system check.
CAUTION tor.
Use of non-recommended coolant
and anti-freeze could cause damage
to the cooling system.
• Only use Ssangyong recommended
coolant and anti-freeze.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Coolant Change Service Interval and Capacity

Before replenishment, turn off the engine and
Model Service interval Capacity
wait for until engine cool down.
1. Open the coolant surge tank cap slowly. Indirect Injection Diesel Engine 10.5 ~ 11.0 L
2. Remove the radiator drain plug to drain Direct Injection Diesel Engine Change every 60,000 km. 11.0 ~ 11.5 L
the coolant completely. And, inspect and replenish as
3. Tighten the drain plug and fill the cool- G23D Engine necessary. 10.0 ~ 10.5 L
ant after mixing the antifreeze and wa- G32D/G28D Engine 11.3 ~ 11.5 L
ter properly through coolant surge tank
inlet.
4. Tighten the coolant surge tank cap and
start and run the engine until the upper
and lower radiator hoses become hot.
5. Check the coolant level again and add if
necessary.
CAUTION
Check for coolant leaks after chang-
ing coolant.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR CLEANER
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or
sandy areas, replace more often than at the
usual recommended intervals. If it is dirty,
shake the element to remove dust. Clean the
inside of the air cleaner housing and cover
with a damp cloth.
Clean the air cleaner element by blowing
compressed air through it in the opposite
direction to normal air flow.
WARNING Gasoline Engine

IDI Diesel Engine
Engine can be damaged.
Do not operate the vehicle without Service Interval
air cleaner element.
Engine Interval
Diesel Clean every 10,000 km

Replace every 30,000 km
Clean every 15,000 km
Gasoline
* Under severe condition, the service

interval should be shorter than the
usual recommended.
DI Diesel Engine
GETtheMANUALS.org
WASHER FLUID
WARNING
• The washer fluid includes flam-
mable materials to prevent
freezing. There could be a fire
when directly contacted with
flames. When checking the washer
fluid, avoid the flames near to
washer fluid tank.
• Driving without washer fluid can
be dangerous.
Blow the compressed air through the ele- Frequently check the washer fluid level and • Check your washer fluid level be-
ment in the opposite direction to normal air add with specified washer fluid. fore starting to drive.
flow to clean the element as shown above. • Do not use radiator antifreeze in
CAUTION windshield washer. It can damage
CAUTION the washer system and paint.
If you operate the washer switch with-
If you blow the compressed air to • Fill washer fluid tank only 3/4 full
out washer fluid, the motor could be
normal airflow, the engine will be when it is very cold. This allows for
damaged due to overloads.
damaged due to entering the foreign expansion, which could damage
Therefore, if no water, do not oper-
materials. the tank if it is completely full.
ate the washer motor.
If you use plain water as washer
fluid, it will freeze during the winter
and damage the washer fluid tank
and motor. Use only specified washer
fluid.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SPARK PLUGS (FOR GASOLINE

WIPERS ENGINE)
If the blades are not wiping properly, clean
G32D G23D, G28D
both the window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thor-
oughly with clear water.
Repeat if necessary.
To replace the wiper blade, press the retain-
ing clip and pull the wiper blade off the arm.
Simply push the new wiper blade onto the
arm.
Properly functioning windshield wipers are WARNING Spark plugs should be inspected periodically
essential for safe driving and clear vision. Solvents, gasoline, kerosene and for carbon deposits. When carbon accumu-
Check condition of wiper blades from time paint thinner can damage wiper lates on a spark plug, a strong spark may
to time. Hardened, brittle or smearing blades blades. not be produced.
must be replaced. Keep them away from wiper blades. If necessary, clean the electrodes with a
fine wire brush and carefully scrape the
Since there is no way to successfully re-
carbon off the insulator with a small file. The
move traces of silicone from any glass, be
spark plugs should then be blown clean with
certain not to apply any polish containing
compressed air and the upper insulator
silicone to the windshield of your vehicle
wiped clean. And adjust the spark plug gap.
since this will result in streaks which impair
vision. Service interval
Contamination of either the window or the G23D, G28D G32D
wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce Change every Change every
the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. 30,000 km 60,000 km
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER
BOSCH : F8DC4
(G23D, G28D) BERU : 14F-8DU4
Specification CHAMPION : C11YCC
Gap 0.8 + 0.1 mm
(G32D) NGK: BKUR5ETZ-10

Specification
Gap 1 ± 0.1 mm
CAUTION
• When replacing the spark plugs, Indirect Injection Diesel Engine Equipped Direct Injection Diesel Engine Equipped
disconnect the negative terminal Vehicle Vehicle
of the battery and turn off all the
If the filter is contaminated, the supplied fuel If the impurities in fuel gets into the engine
switches.
will be reduced, main components will be and fuel related devices, it may cause seri-
• It is recommended that the engine
be cool or cold when changing the damaged due to entering the contaminated ous damage in affected components. Make
spark plugs (you could burn your- materials and the performance of catalytic sure to replace the fuel filter according to
self). converter will be deteriorrated. the specified maintenance schedule.
• Do not use non-recommended Replace the fuel filter according to the Be careful not to get into the foreign materi-
spark plugs. specified maintenance schedule. als while changing hen replacing the fuel
• Do not allow contaminants to en- filter, clean around it to prevent the impuri-
• Service Interval
ter spark plug hole. ties from flowing into the filter.
Replace every at 40,000 km
Press the primimg pump until it becomes rigid.
WARNING WARNING • Service Interval
Spark plugs may be very hot. To avoid firing, clean around the Replace every 30,000 km
Be careful not to burn yourself. fuel filter before starting the engine.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Draining The Water From Fuel Filter

Drain the water from fuel filter whenever
replacing the engine oil.
After draining the water, press the primimg
pump until it becomes rigid. Do not start the
engine before doing this procedure. For the
detailed draining procedures, please refr to
"How to drain the water from fuel filter" in
water separator warning light section.
CAUTION Gasoline Engine

1. Fuel filter 2. Drain plug
3. Priming pump • Replace the fuel filter according
If the filter is contaminated, the supplied fuel
A. Opening direction of drain plug to the specified maintenance
will be reduced, main components will be
B. Closing direction of drain plug schedule.
damaged due to entering the contaminated
• Drain the water from fuel filter
materials and the performance of catalytic
Water Separating Function whenever replacing the engine oil.
converter will be deteriorated.
If the water in fuel gets into the engine and • After replacing the fuel filter or
Replace the fuel filter according to the
fuel system, it may cause serious damage in draining the water, press the
specified maintemamce schedule.
fuel system. The fuel filter offers the water primimg pump until it becomes
separating function to block the inflow of rigid.
water. When the water level in fuel filter Replace at every 60,000 km
reaches a certain point, the water separator
warning light in instrument panel comes on.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVE BELT BRAKE PEDAL

Checking pedal free play
Turn off the engine and depress the brake
pedal several times to deplete the vacuum
in the brake system. Gently depress the
brake pedal by hand and measure the dis-
tance it moves until slight resistance is felt.
If the free play is more or less than speci-
fied, have the brakes adjusted by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
Gasoline Engine Diesel Engine (D29ST)
Brake pedal
You do not need extra tension adjustment, Belt replacement: Diesel Engine 1~4 mm
free play
but check belt for wear or tension by push- 1. Loosen the tensioning lever nut.
ing the belt and replace if necessary. 2. Insert a proper lever as shown and push
Belt replacement: Gasoline Engine downwards to pull out the bolt.
Install a device onto the tension adjuster and 3. Lift up the lever to release the tension
rotate clockwise to release the tension and of the tensioning spring and to take off
take off the belt. the belt.
WARNING
The engine could inadvertently start
while checking the belt and cause
moving parts to crush or cut. Remove
key from ignition switch.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CLUTCH PEDAL PARKING BRAKE CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Checking pedal free play Check the stroke of the parking brake by The catalytic converter is located between
Depress the pedal by hand until clutch re- counting the number of notch clicks heard exhaust manifold and center muffler. The
sistance is felt; ensure free play is within while fully applying it from the released po- catalytic converter consists of monoliths
specification. sition. with honeycomb shaped structure of ce-
If the free play is more or less than specified, Also, the parking brake alone should se- ramic material which are elastically mounted
have the clutch or linkage adjusted by curely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep in a wire mesh structure.
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized grade. If the number of clicks is more or less This precious metal coating on the monoliths
Service Operation. than specified, have the parking brake ad- accelerate the reduction and/or oxidation of
justed by a Ssangyong Dealer or toxic components.
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. On vehicles with a catalytic converter for
Clutch pedal unleaded fuel, lead fuel will damage the cata-
5~10 mm
free play lytic converter and parts of the electronic
4~7 notches at a
Stroke system, thereby rendering them inoperative.
force of 20kg
Damage to the catalytic converter or
the vehicle may result if the following
points are not observed :
Consult a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Operation as Quickly as
possible in the event of misfiring, irregular
engine running following a cold start, a sig-
nificant loss of engine power or other un-
usual malfunctions which may indicate a fault
in the ignition system.
If necessary, driving may be continued for
a short time at a low speed and with low
engine revolutions.
GETtheMANUALS.org
OVM TOOLS LOCATION OF HYDRAULIC JACK

You should therefore avoid :
• Frequent repeated cold starts.
• Actuation of the starter for an unnec-
essarily long time during starting (fuel is
injected during the starting procedure).
• Allowing the tank to become empty (an
irregular fuel supply leads to
overheating)
• Starting the engine by pushing or tow-
ing (unburned fuel may enter the cata-
lytic converter) : use jump leads.
1 Screw jack • Lift up the cover lever located at left side
Have all maintenance work carried out by a 2. Driver (+, -) of the luggage room to open the cover.
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized 3. Open end wrenches • Rotate the yellow colored handle coun-
Service Operation. You can then be certain 4. Wheel nut wrench terclockwise to release the jack and pull
that all components of the vehicle’s 5. Pliers out jack.
electrical, injection and ignition system will 6. Connecting rod
be operating correctly, that your vehicle has 7. Tools bag CAUTION
a low level of pollutant emission and that the When installing the jack, insert it
catalytic converter system will have a long and rotate the handle clockwise to
life. hold the jack firmly and not to move
during driving.
GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCATION OF OVM TOOLS AND

CONNECTING ROD WHEELS AND TYRES
Factory-fitted tyres are matched to the chas-
sis and offer optimum driving, comfort and
safety. Consult your Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation
before changing over to different tyres or
rims and obtain their advice as regards tech-
nical possibilities. Use of unsuitable tyres or
rims may lead to accidents.
Tyre Inflation Pressure

Maintaining the specified tyre pressure is
• Fold the seat back of second seat, and essential for driver comfort, driving safety Increased pressure resulting from tyre
lift up the seat. and long tyre life. Check the tyre pressure, warm-up must not be reduced, otherwise
• Open the cover on the floor and pull out including the spare wheel, at least every 14 the pressure may drop below the permis-
the tools. days and prior to any long journey. The tyres sible minimum.
should be checked in a cold condition using Securely retighten valve caps after check-
CAUTION an accurate tyre pressure gauge. ing pressure.
Incorrect inflation pressures will increase
After folding the seat back, press the
Tyre Pressure tyre wear and will impair safety, vehicle han-
upper portion of the seat back to
dling, comfort and fuel economy.
lock, then lift up the seat. If lifting it Tyre Wheel PSI
If the pressure is too low, this can result in
up without locking, there could be
P255/65R16 7JJ x 16 29 considerable tyre warm-up and internal dam-
interventions between the rear con-
age, leading to tread separation and even
sole box cover lever and the seat to P235/70R16 7JJ/6.5JJ x 16 30 to tyre blowout at high speeds.
be damaged.
Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by sub-
sequently adjusting the inflation pressure.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING Make sure that both tyres on an axle are the

same size, the same design, and the same
To reduce the risk of loss of vehicle
make and have the same tread pattern.
control and personal injury;
• Property inflate tyres. WARNING
• Do not overload vehicle.
Mixing tyres could cause you to lose
Tyre Condition, Rim Condition control while driving.
Driving over sharp edges can lead to hid- Using tyres of different sizes may also
den tyre damage and rim damage which is cause damage to the vehicle.
only noticed later on : there is a danger of Be sure to use the same size and type
tyre blowout. tyres of the same manufacturer on all
Check tread depth regularly. To help you
Drive over edges slowly and at right angle wheels.
detect when the tyres should be replaced,
if possible. When parking, ensure that the the tyres on your vehicle have built-in tread
tyres are not pressed against the edge of WARNING
wear indicators that appear between the
the curb. tread grooves when the tread is 1.6mm or Driving on worn, old or damaged
Check tyres regularly for damage (foreign less. The tyres should be replaced when the tyres is very dangerous and can
bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in tread worn down as far as one of the wear cause accidents.
side walls). A damaged tyre could burst. indicators. The wear indicator’s position is Replace tyres if ;
Check rims for damage. In the event of dam- indicated by markings on the tyre side wall. • The tread wear indicator appears,
age or abnormal wear, consult a Ssangyong For safety reasons, it is recommended that or
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service the tyres be replaced when their tread depth • Tyres have been damaged.
Operation. has worn down to 2~3mm.
Abnormal wear is usually caused by incor- When replacing the tyres, the radial tyres WARNING
rect tyre pressure, lack of regular rotation, should be fitted in pairs, or for preference Dispose of worn tyres in accordance
improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance in sets. with local environmental regulations.
tyres, severe braking or poor driving habit.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Tyre Rotation Winter Tyres

If winter tyres are used they must be fitted CAUTION
to all 4 wheels. Do not exceed the maximum
Front Rear speed specified by the tyre manufacturer.
When you didn’t fit the snow tires
When using winter tyres, the tyre pressures
before driving on snow or icy road,
supplied by the tyre manufacturer must be
drive in 4WD (4L, 4H) mode with low
adhered to.
speed.
WARNING
Using of winter tyres could adversely
affect safety and handling of the ve-
hicle.
Front and rear tyres perform different jobs
• Use equivalent size and type to
and can wear differently depending on the
vehicle’s standard tyres.
tyres of road driven, driving habit, etc.
• Change over from winter to sum-
To avoid uneven wear of tyres and to pro-
mer tyres as son as road condition
long tyre life, inspect and rotate your tyres
allow.
every 5,000km. After rotating, adjust the tyre
pressure and be sure to check wheel bolts
tightness. WARNING
Using of tyre chains could adversely
hicle.
If necessary, consult your Ssangyong
Dealer.
GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOVING THE SPARE WHEEL HOW TO CHANGE A FLAT TYRE
1. Insert the spare wheel handle into the 4. Slide the lift plate through the center of If a tyre goes flat, follow these safety in-
hole above the rear bumper. the spare wheel, then place the spare structions before you change the tyre:
2. Then attach the wheel nut wrench into wheel near the flat tyre.
the spare wheel handle. Tyre Change Safety Precautions
3. Rotate the wheel nut wrench counter-
clockwise until the winch wire is 1. Turn on hazard flashers.
loosened. 2. Move off the road to a safe place away
from traffic.
3. Park on a firm and level surface.
4. Turn off engine and remove key.
5. Set parking brake.
6. If vehicle has an automatic transmission,
shift to P. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, shift to first or reverse.
7. Have all passengers get out of vehicle
and stand in safe a place.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Changing a Wheel
8. Use a wedge, block of wood, or rocks
in front of and behind the tyre that is di-
agonal from the tyre you plan to change.
Failure to follow these safety precautions

can cause your vehicle to slip off the jack
possibly causing serious injury.
WARNING
When refitting the spare tyre to the
carrier, please follow these instruc- 1. Remove the spare wheel from stowage
Front Jack up point
tions:. area with jacking tools. 5. Locate the jack at proper position.
1. Lay the tyre flat on the ground and 2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the 6. Place the jack vertically at the front or
ensure the outer surface of the wheel nuts one turn each. rear jacking location closest to the wheel
wheel rim is facing DOWN (tyre 3. Insert the jack connection rod and the you plan to change.
valve stem facing down). wheel wrench into the jack. 7. Jack up the vehicle by rotating the jack
2. Locate the carrier cradle correctly 4. Rotate the jack connection rod clockwise connection rod clockwise until the tyre
through the centre of the rim. to raise the lift head slightly. is off ground about 1inch (3cm).
3. When securing the tyre in the car-
8. As the jack begins to raise the vehicle,
rier, ensure that it is seated against
CAUTION make sure jack is properly placed so it
the floor pan correctly and do not
Do not remove any of the nuts until will not slip.
overtighten.
you have raised that wheel off the 9. Remove wheel nuts completely by turn-
4. If the spare tyre is in flat, you must
ground. ing counterclockwise.
keep it in the luggage room.
10. Remove tyre and wheel.
11. Mount spare tyre on the wheel hub.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear Jack up point

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly according
CAUTION
12. Replace and lightly seat the wheel nuts to sequence No. of above figure.
by turning clockwise. 15. Check and adjust tyre pressure. • If over tightened, the wheel nuts
13. Turn jack connection rod counter-clock- 16. Secure the jack and tools in their proper could be damaged. Do not over
wise and lower vehicle to the ground. locations. tighten the wheel nuts by pressing
17. Secure the flat tyre in the spare tyre the wheel nut wrench by foot or
CAUTION well. using assist pipe.
• Do not completely tighten a wheel
Do not attempt to raise vehicle until nuts at a time. Tighten it with sev-
the jack is in the proper position, eral times in a crisscross sequence.
and secure both to the vehicle and • Never use oil or grease on wheel
the ground. nuts.
• Always use the correct wheel nuts.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY MAINTENANCE
WARNING WARNING
When using the jack the vehicle • Before jacking ensure parking
could become unstable and move, brake is on and the transmission
damaging the vehicle or badly injur- is set in 1st or reverse gear
ing. (manual transmission) or P (auto-
• Use jack supplied at correct jack- matic transmission).
ing position. • Do not jack the vehicle and change
• When installing the jack for lift- the wheel where traffic is close.
ing the vehicle, it should be per-
pendicular to the ground.
• Do not go under a jacked-up CAUTION Your vehicle is fitted with a maintenance free
vehicle. • When the tyre has been replaced, (MF) battery without seal plugs.
• Do not start engine while jacked up. retighten it after 50,000 km of driv- It needs no periodic maintenance.
• Before jacking, get all passengers ing.
out of the vehicle and clear of ve- • As soon as possible, take your car CAUTION
hicle and other traffic. to a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong When the battery charge warning
• Use jack only for changing wheels. Authorized Service Operation and light on the instrument panel comes
• Do not jack vehicle on an inclined have the wheel nuts tightend accord- on, the battery is not normally
or slippery surface. ing to Ssangyong specifications. charging. If the warning light comes
• Use jacking position nearest to re- on while driving, turn off all unnec-
quired wheel change. essary electrical devices and have
• Block wheel diagonally opposite checked the system by Ssangyong
the wheel to be changed. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
vice Operation.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Check the battery terminals for corrosion (a For best battery service, do the following. WARNING
white or bluish powder). To remove it, cover 1. Keep battery securely mounted.
Used batteries can be a hazard to
the terminals with a solution of baking soda 2. Keep battery top clean and dry.
health and the environment.
and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. 3. Keep terminals and connections clean,
• Do not dispose of used batteries
When this stops, wash it off with plain tight and coated with petroleum jelly or
with household waste.
water. Dry off the battery with a cloth or terminal grease.
• Use your local authorized waste
paper towel. 4. Rinse off any spilled electrolyte immedi-
disposal facilities.
ately with a solution of water and bak-
Coat the terminals with petroleum jelly to help
ing soda.
prevent future corrosion.
5. If vehicle is not being used for an ex- CAUTION
If the terminals are severely corroded, clean
tended time, disconnect the cable from The polarity of battery, i.e. the con-
them with baking soda and water.
the negative (-) terminal of the battery nections for positive and negative
Use a wrench to loosen and remove the to prevent discharge and charge battery cables, must not be interchanged.
cables from the terminals. Always discon- every six weeks.
nect the negative (-) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery terminals with WARNING
a terminal cleaning tool or wire brush. Re- The battery have acid that can burn
connect and tighten the cable, then coat the you and gas that can explode.
terminals with petroleum jelly. You can badly hurt if you are not
careful.
CAUTION • Keep naked flames, sparks and
If you disconnect the battery termi- smoking items away from battery.
nal when the engine is running, the • Do not let any parts of body,
electrical equipment could be clothes or paintwork contact the
damaged. sulfuric acid.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUSE Fuse Change

WARNING Pull out the blown fuse by using the fuse
puller from the fuse box and insert with the
The use of different types or differ- same ratings of fuse.
ent rating fuses could cause damage
to the electrical system and even start
CAUTION
a fire.
• Always replace fuse with one with If you remove the fuse when the elec-
the same rating. trical power is supplying, the electri-
• Never use anything else but a fuse. cal equipment could be damaged.
• Do not use anything metal to re- Replace the fuse when the ignition
move fuse. key is in LOCK position.
For fuse replacement, withdraw the cover
and extract blown fuse.
A defective fuse can be recognized by its
melted wire. A new fuse should only be in- Fuse Ratings
stalled after the cause of the trouble has You can find the descriptions on each
been located and eliminated. fuse’s function, location and capacity from
Only fuses of the specified rating should be the fuse box cover.
installed. The rating is given on all fuses.
GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
The fuse box is located at the left side of

instrument panel.
To access into interior fuse box, open the
driver’s door and remove the fuse box
cover.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUSE BOX IN ENGINE

COMPARTMENT IDI (Indirect Injection) Diesel Engine

engine compartment.
To access into this fuse box, open the hood
and remove the fuse box cover.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Direct Injection Diesel Engine PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Direct Injection Diesel Engine FFH (Fuel Fired Heater)
GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline Engine
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS IN REPLACING
BULBS BULB SPECIFICATION
Bulbs Rating Number
CAUTION
• Before replacing the bulb, turn the Low Beam/High Beam 55W/55W 2 each
ignition key to LOCK position and Head lamp
Position lamp 5W 2
turn OFF the relevant switch.
• If you use unspecified bulb, the rel- Tail lamp 8W 2
evant device will be damaged and
Tail/Stop lamp 8W/27W 2 each
there could be a fire due to elec-
trical over loads. Use only speci- Stop lamp 27W 2
fied capacity bulb.
Rear High mounted stop lamp 5W 4
Reversing lamp 27W 2
CAUTION
Turn signal lamp 27W 2
Greasy fingers will cause stains, re-
sulting in a dull light. License plate lamp 5W 2
• Do not touch halogen bulbs with
Turn signal lamp 28W/8W 2
bare hands.
• Clean with a clean non fluffy cloth Front Fog lamp 27W 2
using alcohol or white spirits.
Side repeater lamp 5W 2
Front room lamp 8W 2
Rear room lamp 10W 1 each
Interior
Front door/Rear door lamp 2 each
Glove box lamp 10W 1
GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCATION OF LAMPS
1. Headlamp – Low beam 6. High mounted stop lamp 11. Reverse lamp
2. Headlamp – High beam, Position lamp 7. Tail and stop lamp 12. Rear reflector
3. Position lamp 8. Tail lamp 13. License plate lamp
4. Turn signal lamp 9. Stop lamp 14. Side repeater lamp
5. Fog lamp 10. Turn signal lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
HEAD LAMP
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 5. Separate the head lamp from the vehicle 8. Rotate the dust cover counterclockwise
cable. body. to remove.
2. Remove the radiator grille. 6. Disconnect the head lamp connector. 9. Press the spring to remove.
3. Remove the upper and lower bolts from 10. Pull out the bulb.
the head lamp. 11. Install new bulb with same rating.
4. Loosen the head lamp cover from the 12. Install in the reverse order of the re-
wheel housing side and remove the bolt moval.
from the head lamp.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TURN SIGNAL LAMP AND FOG

LAMP REAR COMBINATION LAMP
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 5. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-
cable. cable. clockwise.
2. Remove the head lamp. 2. Unscrew two fixing screws from rear 6. Install new bulb with same rating.
3. Disconnect the connector while pulling combination lamp. 7. Install in the reverse order of the re-
out the lamp from bumper. 3. Disconnect the connector from rear com- moval.
4. Remove the lamp. bination lamp.
5. Install new bulb with same rating. 4. Remove the rear combination lamp from
6. Install in the reverse order of the re- body.
moval.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SIDE REPEATER LAMP HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP LICENSE PLATE LAMP
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable. cable. cable.
2. Remove the lamp body by pushing for- 2. Remove two fixing screws from air 2. Remove the licence plate lamp assem-
ward and pulling out its rear end. spoiler on tailgate. bly.
3. Install new bulb with same rating. 3. Disconnect the connector from high 3. Remove the bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order of the re- mounted stop lamp. 4. Install new bulb with same rating.
moval. 4. Remove the bulb by turning it counter- 5. Install in the reverse order of the re-
clockwise. moval.
5. Install new bulb with same rating.
6. Install in the reverse order of the re-
moval.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT ROOM LAMP REAR ROOM LAMP
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable. cable.
2. Remove the cover with driver. 2. Remove the cover with driver.
3. Install new bulb with same rating. 3. Install new bulb with same rating.
4. Install in the reverse order of the 4. Install in the reverse order of the
removal. removal.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES (DIESEL ENGINE)

Maintenance service and record retention are the owner’s responsibility. You should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service chart.
MAINTENANCE Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
Drive belt I I I I I I I I
* Engine oil & filter Direct Injection (Diesel Engine) R* R* R* R* R* R* R* R*
(1)* (3)* (4)* Indirect Injection (Diesel Engine) Initial change: 5,000 km, then change every 10,000 km
Cooling system hose & connections I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant (3)* (4)* I I I R I I I R
Fuel filter Direct Injection (Diesel Engine) I R* I R* I R* I R*
Indirect Injection (Diesel Engine) I I R*(40) I R*(80) I I R*
Fuel line & connections I I I I I I I I
Air cleaner (2)* I R* I R* I R* I R*
Injection timing (See NOTE1) I I I I I I I I
NOTE 1: Adjust as required; -When excessive smoke is visible (black or white) - Poor performance/economy
Chart Symbols:
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replenish, adjust or replace.
R - Replace or change.
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: short (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty con-
distance driving, extensive idling or driving in dusty dition or sandy condition, frequently inspect the air cleaner, if
condition. Shorten the service interval. Inspect the necessary, change the air cleaner.
engine oil at any time, occasionally, if necessary re- (3)* More frequent maintenance is required if under dusty driving
fill the engine oil. condition.
(4)* Refer to “Recommended fluids, coolant and lubricants”.
* Water separator: When replace the engine oil, also drain the water from water separator.
GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY
Exhaust pipes & mountings I I I I I I I I
Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* I R* I R* I R* I R*
Parking brake / Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* I I R*(40) I R*(80) I I R*
Brake line & connections (including booster) I I I I I I I I
Manual transmission oil (5)* I I I R* I I I R*
Clutch & brake pedal free play I I I I I I I I
Front & Rear differential fluid (3)* I R* I R* I R* I R*
Transfer case fluid (3)* I I I R* I I I R*
Automatic transmission fluid (6)* I I I R* I I I I
Chart Symbols:
* - mileage (km) intervals only
(3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”.
(4)* More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions:
- Short distance driving - Extensive idling - Extremely dusty conditions
(5)* Inspect manual transmission fluid every 10,000 km (Inspect the leak of fluid at any time,occasionally), then change every 60,000 km
(6)* Change automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under severe conditions.
(Inspect the leak of fluid at any time,occasionlly)
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 32°C (90°F) or higher, or
- In hilly or moutainous terrain, or
- When doing frequent trailer towing, or
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY
Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts tight / Secure (6)* I I I I I I I I
Tyre condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I I I
Wheel alignment (7)* Inspect when abnormal condition is noted
Steering wheel & linkage I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid & lines (3)* I I I I I I I I
Drive shaft boots (8)* I I I I I I I I
Seat belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I
Lubricate locks, hinges & bonnet latch I I I I I I I I
Wheel bearing grease I I I I I I I I
Propeller shaft grease - Front / Rear (9)* Inspect every 10,000 km
Chart Symbols:
(6)* After completion of off-road operation, the underbody of the vehicle should be throughly inspected. Examine threaded fasteners
for looseness.
(7)* If necessary, rotate and balance wheels.
(8)* After completion of off-road operation, the drive shaft boots should be inspected.
(9)* Inspect propeller shaft grease every 5,000 km or 3 months if the vehicle is mainly driven under severe condition.
- In off-road or dusty road, or
- In hilly or moutainous terrain.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES (GASOLINE ENGINE)

INTERVAL x1,000 km 1 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 0.6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
MAINTENANCE ITEM Months - 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Drive belt I I I I I I I I I
Engine oil & engine oil filter (1)* (3)* I R** R R R R R R R
Cooling system hose & connections I I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant (3)* I I I I R I I I R
Fuel filter (2)* - - - - R - - - R
Fuel line & connections I I I I I I I I I
Air cleaner (2)* - I I I R* I I I R*
Ignition timing - I I I I I I I I
Spark plugs G23D, G28D - - R - R - R - R
G32D - - - - R - - - R
Charcoal canister & vapor lines - - - I - - I - -
Chart Symbols:
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: short distance (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty
driving, extensive idling or driving in dusty condition, shorten condition or sandy condition, frequently inspect the air
the service interval. cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
** - In order to secure engine long life and effective break-in, first oil (factory filled) would be recommended to drain with in 10,000 km.
GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 1 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 0.6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
CHASSIS AND BODY
Exhaust pipes & mountings - I I I I I I I I
Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* I I R* I R* I R* I R*
Parking brake / Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* - I I I I I I I I
Brake line & connections (including booster) I I I I I I I I I
Manual transmission fluid (5)* - I I I R I I I R
Clutch & brake pedal free play - I I I I I I I I
Front & Rear differential fluid (3)* - I R* I R* I R* I R*
Transfer case fluid (3)* - I I I R I I I R*
Automatic transmission (6)* - I I I R* I I I I
Chart Symbols:
(5)* Inspect manual transmission fluid every 10,000 km (Inapect the leak of fluid at any time,occasionaly) then change every 60,000 km
(6)* Change automatic transmission fluid every 60,000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under severe conditions.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain, or
GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 1 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 0.6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
CHASSIS AND BODY
Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts tight / Secure (6)* I I I I I I I I I
Tyre condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I I I I
Steering wheel & linkage I I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid & lines (3)* I I I I I I I I I
Drive shaft boots I I I I I I I I I
Seat belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I I
Lubricate locks, hinges & bonnet latch I I I I I I I I I
Wheel bearing grease I I I I I I I I I
Propeller shaft grease - Front / Rear (8)* I I I I I I I I I
Chart Symbols:
for looseness.
GETtheMANUALS.org
LUBRICATION CHART
Lubricant Capacity Classification
API : CG grade or above,
IDI Engine 6.0~8.0 L Quality ACEA : B2, B3 or B4
Diesel class**
MB sheet : 229.1/3 (preferable)
DI Engine 6.8~8.3 L
Engine oil Viscosity MB sheet No. 224.1
API : SJ grade or above,
G23D 5.5~7.5 L Quality ACEA : A2 or A3
Gasoline class**
G32D/G28D 7.0~9.0 L
Viscosity MB sheet No. 224.1
IDI Engine 10.5~11.0 L
MB sheet 325.0
Engine coolant DI Engine 11.0~11.5 L
(Antifreeze and soft water mixed) G23D 10.0~10.5 L BASF GLYSANTIN G05-11,
G32D/G28D 11.3~11.5 L HOECHST GENANTIN SUPER 8023/14
Manual transmission oil 4WD : 3.6 L, 2WD : 3.4 L ATF DEXRON II, III,
Brake/Clutch fluid (Level must be
Properly SAE J 1703, DOT 3 or DOT 4
maintained between MAX & MIN level)
Power steering fluid 1.1 L ATF DEXRON II, III
Automatic transmission fluid 4-speed: 9.5 L CASTROL TQ 95
5-speed: 8.0 L SHELL or FUCHS ATF 3353
Transfer case fluid IDI Engine Part time 1.2~1.4 L
DI Engine, Part time 1.4~1.5 L ATF DEXRON II, III,
Gasoline Full time(TOD) 1.4~1.5 L
*IDI: Indirect Injection

DI: Direct Injection
GETtheMANUALS.org

Front 1.4~1.5 L
Axle fluid SAE 80W/90, API GL-5
Rear 2.2 L
Wheel bearing grease Properly SHELL Retinax “A” grade
Propeller shaft grease - Front/Rear Properly ALVANIA EP#2
* Please contact Ssangyong Dealer for approved alternative fluid.

** In only case not available MB 229.1 or 229.3, API or ACEA oil may be accepted, however it would rather recommend
to shorten the change interval around 30%.
GETtheMANUALS.org
9
VEHICLE CARE
GETtheMANUALS.org
9–2 VEHICLE CARE
CARE AND CLEANING OF THE

CLEANING AGENTS INTERIOR GLASS SURFACES
Follow the manufacturer’s advice whenever With the use of modern trim materials, it is Glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regu-
cleaning agents or other chemicals are used, very important that you use proper cleaning lar basis. The use of glass cleaner or a liq-
inside or outside the vehicle. Some clean- techniques and cleaners. Failing to do this uid household glass cleaner will remove
ers may be poisonous or flammable, and on the first cleaning may result in water normal tobacco smoke and dust films some-
improper use may cause personal injury or spots, spot rings, or setting of stains or times caused by ingredients used in vinyl’s
damage. When cleaning the inside or outside soils-all of which are more difficult to remove and interior plastics.
of the vehicle, do not use volatile cleaning in a second cleaning. Never use abrasive cleaners on any vehicle
solvents such as : acetone, lacquer thinners, Dust and loose dirt that collect on interior glass, as they may cause scratches. If abra-
enamel reducers, nail polish removers: or fabrics should be frequently removed with sive cleaners are used on the inside of the
cleaning materials such as laundry soaps, a vacuum cleaner or soft bristle brush. Wipe rear window, any electric demister element
bleaches or reducing agents, except as vinyl or leather trim regularly with a clean may be damaged. Avoid placing decals on
noted in the fabric cleaning advice on stain damp cloth. Normal trim soils, spots or stains the inside rear window, since they may
removal. Never use carbon tetrachloride, can be cleaned with cleaners: have to be scraped off later.
petrol, benzene, or naphtha for any cleaning
purpose. Open all vehicle doors for ventilation Safety Belt Care Cleaning the Outside of Windshield
when any cleaning agents or other chemical • Keep belts clean and dry. If your windshield is not clear after using the
are used in the interior. Overexposure to some • Clean safety belts only with mild soap windshield washer, or if the wiper blade
vapors may result in a health problem which and lukewarm water. chatters when running, wax or another
is more likely to occur in small, unventilated • Do not bleach or dye belts since this may material may be on the blade or windshield
spaces. severely weaken them. Clean the outside of the windshield with
To avoid possible permanent discoloration of cleaning powder or an equivalent non abra-
light colored seats, do not let materials with sive cleaner. Your windshield is clean if
non-fast colors come in contact with seat trim beads do not form when rinsing with water.
materials until these materials are totally dry.
This includes certain types of casual clothing,
such as colored denims, corduroys, leathers
and suedes : also decorative paper, etc.
GETtheMANUALS.org
VEHICLE CARE 9–3

EXTERIOR
Exterior Finish Polishing and Waxing Cleaning aluminum wheels, rally
The paint finish on your vehicle provides Periodic polishing and waxing is recom- wheels, and wheel covers
beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and mended to remove surface residue from Preserve the original appearance of wheels
durability. your paint finish. Approved products are or wheel covers by keeping then clean and
supplied through your Ssangyong Dealer. free from build-up of road dirt and/or road
Washing your Vehicle
salt. Regular cleaning is recommended. Do
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s Protecting exterior bright metal parts
not use abrasive cleaners or cleaning
finish is to keep it clean by frequent Bright metal parts should be cleaned regu-
brushes, as they could damage the finish.
washings. larly to keep their luster. Washing with wa-
Wash the vehicle in lukewarm or cold water. ter is all that is usually needed.
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle Use special care with aluminum trim. To
in the direct rays of the sun. Do not use avoid damaging protective trim, never use
strong soap or chemical detergent. All clean- automotive or chrome polish, steam, or caus-
ing agents should be flushed promptly from tic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
the surface and not allowed to dry on the rubbed to a high polish, is recommended for
finish. all bright metal parts.
Ssangyong vehicles are designed to oper-
ate under normal environmental conditions
and to withstand the natural elements. How-
ever, unusual conditions, such as high pres-
sure car washes, may cause water to en-
ter inside the vehicle.
GETtheMANUALS.org
9–4 VEHICLE CARE
CORROSION PROTECTION
Your car was designed to resist corrosion. all of these deposits. Other cleaners may be Take care to clean any areas where mud
Special materials and protective finishes needed. and other debris can collect. Sediment
were used on most parts of your car when When using chemical cleaners, be sure they packed in closed areas of the frame should
it was built to help maintain a good appear- are safe for use on painted surfaces. be loosened before being flushed. If desired,
ance, strength and reliable operation. Some your Ssangyong Dealer can do this service
parts which normally are not visible (such Finish damage for you.
as certain parts located in the engine com- Any stone chips, fractures or deep
partment and the underbody of the vehicle) scratches in the finish should be repaired CAUTION
are such that surface rust will not affect promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and When an engine is washed, fuel,
their reliability. Therefore, corrosion protec- may develop into a major repair expense. grease and oil residues are washed
tion is not needed or used on these parts. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired off. Therefore you should use only a
with touch-up materials. Larger areas of fin- filling station or a Ssangyong Dealer
Sheet metal damage ish damage can be corrected in your who has oil separator equipment in
If your car is damaged and requires body Dealer’s body and paint shop. the car wash bay.
panel repair or replacement, make sure the
Used engine oil, brake fluid, trans-
mission fluid, antifreeze, batteries
body repair shop applies proper anticorro- Underbody maintenance and tyres should be disposed of by
sion material to the parts repaired or re- Corrosive materials used for ice and snow using the local authorized waste dis-
placed so that corrosion protection is re- removal and dust control can collect on the posal facilities, or have them dis-
stored. (Also see “Finish damage” which underbody. If these materials are not re- posed of by the vendor who is under
follows). moved, accelerated corrosion (rust) can oc- a statutory obligation to do so when
cur on underbody parts such as fuel lines, you replace them.
Foreign material deposits On no account must any of these
frame, floor pan and the exhaust system
Calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting items be placed in the household
even though they have been provided with
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird drop- refuse bins or the fluids poured down
corrosion protection.
pings, chemicals from industrial chimneys the drains.
At least every spring, flush these materials Everyone should be concerned about
and other foreign matter may damage ve-
from the underbody with plain water. environmental protection.
hicle finishes if left on painted surface.
Prompt washing may not completely remove
Help by doing your share.
GETtheMANUALS.org
10
SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE DATA
GETtheMANUALS.org
10–2 SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE DATA
DIMENSIONS
*( ) : when applied optional items
GETtheMANUALS.org
SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE DATA 10–3
ENGINE NUMBER
IDI Diesel Engine (D29ST) DI Diesel Engine (D27DT) Gasoline Engine (G28D, G32D)
The engine number is stamped on the upper The engine number is stamped on the lower The engine number is stamped on the lower
area of cylinder head. area of cylinder block in exhaust manifold area of cylinder block in exhaust manifold
side. side.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CERTIFICATION LABEL CHASSIS NUMBER
The certification label is affixed on the bot- Chassis number is stamped on the front
tom of driver side B-pillar. right-hand side front wheel of the frame
member.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SPECIFICATIONS
Diesel ( ): Optional item / [ ]: 2WD
Indirect Injection Diesel Direct Injection Diesel
Systems Items
D29ST D27DT
General Overall length (mm) 4,720 (4,795) ←
Overall width (mm) 1,870 ←
Overall height (mm) 1,760 (1,830) ←
Gross vehicle AT 2,415 (2,470) [2,315 (2,370)] 2,520 (2,575)
weight (kg) MT 2,380 (2,430) [2,230 (2,280)] 2,505 (2,550)
Curb weight (kg) AT 1,960 (2,015) [1,860 (1,915)] 2,065 (2,120)
MT 1,925 (1,975) [1,825 (1,875)] 2,050 (2,095)
Min. turning radius (m) 5.6 ←
Ground clearance (mm) Front axle: 220 / Rear axle: 200 ←
Fuel Diesel ←
Fuel tank capacity 80 L ←
Engine Model D29ST D27DT
No. of cyl. / Compression ratio 5 / 22 : 1 5 / 18 : 1
Total displacement 2,874 cc 2,696 cc
Camshaft arrangement SOHC DOHC
Max. power 120 ps / 4,000 rpm 165 ps / 4,000 rpm
Max. torque 26.1 kg·m / 2,400 rpm 34.7 kg·m / 2,400 rpm
Idle speed 770 ± 50 rpm 750 ± 50 rpm
Cooling system Water-cooled / forced circulation ←
Coolant capacity 10.5 ~ 11.0 L 11 ~ 11.5 L
Lubrication Gear pump, forced circulation ←
Max. oil capacity 8.9 L 9.3 L
Turbo charger and cooling type Turbo charger, air-cooled ←
GETtheMANUALS.org

Systems Items
D29ST D27DT
Manual Type Semi-Remote control,
←
transmission floor change type
st
Gear ratio 1 4.007 4.315
2nd 2.365 2.745
3rd 1.473 1.536
4th 1.000 1.000
5th 0.872 0.807
Rev. 3.700 3.591
Automatic Model Electronic ←
transmission Type Floor change type ←
Gear ratio 1 st 2.742 3.595
2nd 1.508 2.186
3rd 1.000 1.405
4th 0.708 1.000
5th - 0.831
Rev.1st 2.428 3.167
Rev.2nd - 1.926
Transfercase Model Part-time Part-Time / Full-time(TOD)
Type Planetary gear type ←
Gear ratio High 1.000 : 1 ←
Low 2.483 : 1 ←
Clutch Type Hydraulic ←
Disc type Dry single diaphragm type ←
GETtheMANUALS.org

Systems Items
D29ST D27DT
Power steering Type Rack and pinion ←
Steering angle Inner 36°17´ ←
Outer 32°40´ ←
Front axle Drive shaft type Ball joint type ←
Axle housing type Build - up type ←
Rear axle Drive shaft type Ball Joint Type ←
Brake Master cylinder type Tandem type ←
Booster type Vacuum booster ←
Type Front Disc ←
Rear Drum (Disc) ←
Parking brake Cable type (internal expansion) ←
Suspension Front Wishbone + Coil Spring ←
Rear Build-up Axle + Coil Spring ←
Air conditioner Refrigerant R134a ←
Battery type / Capacity (V-AH) MF / 12 - 90 ←
Electrical Starter capacity (V-kW) 12 - 2.2 ←
Alternator capacity (V-A) 12 - 75 (12 - 90) 12 - 140 (12 - 115)
GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline ( ): Optional item

Systems Items G23D (M161) G32D (M162)

Gross vehicle AT 2,495 ←
weight (kg) MT - ←
Curb weight (kg) AT 2,040 ←
MT - ←
Fuel Gasoline ←
Engine Model G23D G32D
No. of cyl. / Compression ratio 4 / 10.4 : 1 6 / 10 : 1
Camshaft arrangement DOHC ←
Max. power 149.6 ps / 5,500 rpm 220 ps / 6,100 rpm
Coolant capacity 10.0 ~ 10.5 L 11.3 ~ 11.5 L
Max. oil capacity 9.8 L ←
Turbo charger and cooling type - -
GETtheMANUALS.org

←
Gear ratio 1st
4.007 ←
2nd 2.365 ←
3rd 1.473 ←
4th 1.000 ←
5th 0.872 ←
Rev. 3.700 ←
2nd 1.508 2.423
3rd 1.000 1.486
4th 0.708 1.000
5th - 0.833
Rev.1st 2.428 3.147
Rev.2nd - 1.930
Transfercase Model Part-time Part-time / Full-time (TOD)
Low 2.483 : 1 ←
GETtheMANUALS.org

Outer 32°40´ ←
Type Front Disc ←
Alternator capacity (V-A) 12 - 115 ←
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL
SAE viscosity classes Engine
The SAE classes (viscosity) should be se- The viscosity should be selected according to outside temperature. Do not switch to a
lected in accordance with the average sea- different viscosity in the event of brief temperature fluctuations.
sonal air temperature.
Applying the SAE classes exactly on the
basis of the outside air temperatures would
necessitate frequently changing the engine
oil. The temperature limits for the SAE
classes should therefore be regarded as
reference temperatures and the actual air
temperature may be higher or lower for a
short period of time.
GETtheMANUALS.org
11
INDEX
GETtheMANUALS.org
11–2 INDEX
4-wheel drive operation ...................... 2-17 B Child restraint ...................................... 4-17

4-wheel drive switch - full-time (TOD)* .. 2-16 Child security door locks ..................... 1-10
Battery charge warning light ................ 3-8
4-wheel drive switch - part-time* ....... 2-16 Cleaning agents ..................................... 9-2
Battery maintenance ............................ 8-35
4WD check warning light .................... 3-11 Clutch fluid (for manual transmission) .. 8-12
Before driving off .................................. 1-2
4WD high indicator (for part-time 4WD) .. 3-12 Clutch pedal ......................................... 8-27
Before entering the car ......................... 1-2
4WD low indicator ............................... 3-12 Coming on 4WD CHECK, 4WD LOW,
Before starting the engine ..................... 2-4
4WD HIGH indicator while driving ......... 7-4
A Brake fluid ........................................... 8-14
Coming on abs/ebd warning light while
Brake pedal ......................................... 8-26
A note on safety ................................... 8-3 driving .................................................... 7-3
Brake system warning light ................. 3-17
ABS warning light* .............................. 3-15 Coming on battery charge warning light
Brake ................................................... 2-20
Air bag warning light* ......................... 3-16 while driving .......................................... 7-3
Bulb specification ................................ 8-42
Air bag* ............................................... 4-20 Coming on brake system warning light
Air cleaner ........................................... 8-20 C while driving .......................................... 7-3
Air conditioner controls ......................... 5-5 Coming on engine check warning light
Cannot start the engine ......................... 7-4
Air conditioner switch ........................... 5-8 (direct injection diesel and gasoline
Care and cleaning of the exterior ......... 9-3
Air source selection switch ................ 5-10 engine equipped) ................................... 7-4
Care and cleaning of the interior .......... 9-2
AMB switch ........................................... 5-7 Coming on oil pressure warning light
Care of seat belts ............................... 4-16
Anti-lock brake system* (ABS) ........... 2-21 while driving .......................................... 7-2
Catalytic converter .............................. 8-27
Assist grip ........................................... 3-50 Coolant ................................................ 8-17
Cautions in 4-wheel drive operation ... 2-18
Auto shift indicator (for automatic Corrosion protection .............................. 9-4
Cautions in replacing bulbs ................. 8-42
transmission) ....................................... 3-11 Courtesy light ...................................... 3-46
Cautions in second seat folding
Auto switch ........................................... 5-6 Cruise control indicator*
operation ............................................. 4-12
Automatic dimming inside (for gasoline engine) ........................... 3-20
Cautions in the power seat operation ... 4-5
rearview mirror* .................................. 3-44 Cruise control* ..................................... 3-36
Cautions in using the turbo-charger ...... 6-2
Automatic door locking system ............. 1-5
Center armrest (second seat) ............... 4-9 D
Automatic transmission emergency
Center armrest console ....................... 3-48
shifting procedure ............................... 2-14 Defogger indicator ............................... 3-12
Certification label ................................. 10-4
Automatic transmission fluid* .............. 8-10 Defroster switch ................................... 5-8
Chassis number ................................... 10-4
Automatic wiper control switch .......... 3-30
GETtheMANUALS.org
INDEX 11–3
Digital clock .......................................... 3-41 Engine exhaust gas caution Front head restraints ............................. 4-7
Dimensions .......................................... 10-2 (carbon monoxide) .............................. 2-27 Front passenger’s air bag* .................. 4-24
Direct injection diesel engine equipped Engine hood ......................................... 1-13 Front room lamp ................................... 3-46
vehicle (general type) ........................... 3-4 Engine number (DI diesel engine) ........ 10-3 Front room lamp ................................... 8-47
Direct injection diesel engine equipped Engine number (gasoline) .................... 10-3 Front seat back reclining adjustment
vehicle* (black-face type) ..................... 3-3 Engine number (IDI diesel engine) ....... 10-3 (manual seat) ........................................ 4-2
Direction control .................................... 5-3 Engine oil pressure warning light .......... 3-8 Front seat back reclining adjustment
Door lock button .................................... 1-5 Engine oil ............................................. 10-8 (power seat)* ........................................ 4-3
Door open warning light ...................... 3-13 Engine oil ............................................... 8-8 Front seat back storage pocket ............ 4-6
Drive belt ............................................. 8-26 ESP off switch* ................................... 2-18 Front seat slide adjustment
Driver’s air bag* .................................. 4-23 ESP warning light* ............................... 3-14 (manual seat) ........................................ 4-2
Driver’s check list .................................. 8-3 Front seat slide adjustment
Driver’s seat height adjustment F (power seat)* ........................................ 4-4
(manual seat) ........................................ 4-3 Fan speed control switch ..................... 5-6 Front seat warmer (power seat)* ........ 4-5
Driver’s seat height adjustment Finding defectives while driving ............ 7-2 Fuel filler door release lever ............... 1-14
(power seat)* ........................................ 4-4 Foldable outside rear view mirror ....... 3-35 Fuel filter ............................................. 8-23
Driver’s seat lumbar support ................. 4-6 Folding second seat (from outside) .... 4-11 Fuel gauge ............................................. 3-7
Driver’s seat tilt adjustment Folding second seat (from rear side) ... 4-9 Fuel recommendation ............................. 2-2
(power seat)* ........................................ 4-4 Folding third seat Full flatting the seat ............................. 4-14
Driving tips for automatic transmission* .. 2-15 (making a luggage room) ..................... 4-13 Fuse box in engine compartment ........ 8-39
Driving with a manual transmission ....... 2-5 For getting maximum cooling and Fuse .................................................... 8-37
Driving with an automatic transmission* ... 2-6 heating ................................................. 5-11
Front air bag/pretensioner may not be G
E triggered* ............................................. 4-25 Gasoline engine equipped vehicle*
EBD warning light* .............................. 3-15 Front and rear axle fluid ..................... 8-16 (black-face type) ................................... 3-2
Emergency towing ............................... 7-10 Front cigarette lighter .......................... 3-42 General .................................................. 5-2
Engine check indicator Front cup holder .................................. 3-47 Glass surfaces ..................................... 9-2
(for gasoline engine) ............................. 3-9 Front electric socket ............................ 3-51 Glove box ............................................ 3-47
Engine compartment .............................. 8-4 Front fog lamp switch ......................... 3-33 Glow indicator (for diesel engine) ...... 3-13
GETtheMANUALS.org
11–4 INDEX
H Light switch ......................................... 3-26 Overhead console ............................... 3-49

Location of hydraulic jack ................... 8-28 OVM tools ........................................... 8-28
Hazard warning flasher switch .......... 3-41
Location of lamps ................................ 8-43
Hazardous driving ............................... 2-28 P
Location of OVM tools and
Head lamp ........................................... 8-44
connecting rod .................................... 8-29 Parking aid system* ............................. 2-25
Headlight levelling switch* ................... 3-29
Locking/unlocking doors with key Parking brake ....................................... 2-23
High beam indicator ............................. 3-18
(driver’s door) ....................................... 1-4 Parking brake ....................................... 8-27
High beam switch ................................ 3-28
Low fuel level warning light ............... 3-13 Passenger’s seat side storage pocket .. 4-6
High mounted stop lamp ...................... 8-46
Lubrication chart ................................. 8-54 Passing light switch ............................ 3-28
Horn switch ......................................... 3-45
Luggage cover (except for 7-seater) . 3-49 Power mode indicator (for automatic
How to change a flat tyre ................... 8-32
transmission) ....................................... 3-10
How to drain the water from fuel filter M Power steering fluid ............................ 8-17
& water separator (direct injection diesel
Manual operation of each function ..... 5-11 Power sun roof* .................................. 1-15
engine equipped) ................................. 3-19
Manual transmission fluid .................... 8-11 Power window lock switch
I Mode switch ........................................ 2-11 (on driver’s door panel) ...................... 1-11
Mode switch .......................................... 5-9 Pregnant women ................................. 4-16
Ignition switch ....................................... 2-3
Multi-meter* .......................................... 3-21 Preventive maintenance ........................ 6-3
Immobilizer system* ............................... 1-7
Indirect injection diesel engine equipped O R
vehicle (general type) ........................... 3-5
Odometer/trip odometer ......................... 3-6 Rear air conditioner switch* ................. 5-7
Inside rearview mirror ......................... 3-44
Off switch ............................................. 5-8 Rear cigarette lighter ........................... 3-43
Interior fuse box .................................. 8-38
Opening the door from inside ............... 1-9 Rear combination lamp ........................ 8-45
K Opening the door from outside ............. 1-8 Rear console box ................................ 3-48
Opening the tailgate .............................. 1-9 Rear cup holder ................................... 3-47
Key ........................................................ 1-3
Operating tips for ventilation system .... 5-10 Rear electric socket ............................ 3-52
Kickdown function .............................. 2-13
Outside rear view mirror control switch . 3-33 Rear fog lamp switch* ........................ 3-33
L Outside rear view mirror folding switch* . 3-35 Rear head restraints (second seat) ...... 4-8
Outside rearview mirror & tail-gate glass Rear room lamp ................................... 8-47
Lap belt ............................................... 4-19
defogger switch .................................. 3-35 Rear room/luggage room lamp ............. 3-46
License plate lamp .............................. 8-46
GETtheMANUALS.org
INDEX 11–5
Reclining rear seat back (second seat) .... 4-8 Specifications ...................................... 10-5 Turn signal/hazard flasher indicator .... 3-18
Remote keyless entry system (REKES)* ... 1-3 Speedometer ......................................... 3-6
Removing the spare wheel ................. 8-32 SSPS warning light* ............................ 3-14 U
Removing the spare wheel ................. 8-32 Starting the engine with jumper cables .. 7-5 Unfolding second seat (from rear side) .. 4-10
Replacing air conditioner filter ............. 5-13 Starting the engine ................................ 2-4 Unlocking switch on driver’s door ........ 1-6
Rheostat (black-face type)* .................. 3-6 Storage box (for 7-seater) .................. 3-50 Unlocking switch on passenger’s door .. 1-6
Running-in period .................................. 1-2 Suggestions for more economical
operation ............................................. 2-27 V
S Sun visors ........................................... 3-48 Vent ....................................................... 5-3
Safety mode Supplementary heating device (direct Volume control ....................................... 5-3
(5-speed automatic transmission) ....... 2-13 injection engine equipped vehicle) ...... 5-12
Scheduled maintenance services W
(diesel engine) ..................................... 8-48 T Washer fluid ........................................ 8-21
Scheduled maintenance services Tachometer ............................................ 3-7 Water separator warning light (direct
(gasoline engine) ................................. 8-51 Tailgate lock button ................................ 1-6 injection diesel engine equipped) ........ 3-18
Seat belt height adjustor ..................... 4-20 Tailgate window washer switch ........ 3-32 Water separator .................................. 8-24
Seat belt precautions .......................... 4-14 Tailgate window wiper switch ............ 3-31 Wheels and tyres ................................ 8-29
Seat belt reminder ................................. 3-9 Tailgate window* ................................. 1-12 When comes on the air bag
Seat position memory setting and Temperature control switch ................... 5-6 warning light* ...................................... 4-25
operation* ............................................ 3-40 Temperature gauge ............................... 3-7 When the engine is overheating ........... 7-7
Seat under tray* (for passenger’s seat) .. 4-7 Third seat* (7-seaters) ........................ 4-13 When the selector lever doesn’t move . 7-8
Seat warmer switch* .......................... 3-45 Three point seat belt ........................... 4-18 When using the seat belts .................. 4-15
Seatbelt pretensioner (front seats)* .... 4-24 Tiltable steering wheel ........................ 3-43 Window switch (driver’s seat) ........... 1-10
Selector lever positions ......................... 2-7 Towing a disabled vehicle ..................... 7-9 Window switch (except driver’s seat) .. 1-11
Service precautions .............................. 8-2 Trailer towing* ..................................... 7-11 Windshield washer switch .................. 3-31
Side air bag* ........................................ 4-24 Transfer case fluid ............................. 8-13 Windshield wiper switch ..................... 3-29
Side repeater lamp .............................. 8-46 Turbocharger inspection ....................... 6-4 Winter mode indicator
Side vent - side bleed function ........... 5-11 Turn signal lamp and fog lamp ............ 8-45 (for automatic transmission) ............... 3-11
Spark plugs (for gasoline engine) ....... 8-22 Turn signal switch .............................. 3-28 Wipers ................................................. 8-22
GETtheMANUALS.org
REXTON (LHD)
OWNER’S MANUAL
ISSUED BY
INTERNATIONAL A/S TEAM
SSANGYONG MOTOR CO., LTD.
150-3, CHILGOI-DONG, PYUNGTAEK-SI

GYEONGGI-DO, 459-711 KOREA
TELEPHONE : 82-31-610-2740
FACSIMILE : 82-31-610-3762
NOTE: All rights reserved. Printed in SSANGYONG Motor Co., Ltd.

No part of this book may be used or reproduced without the
written permission of International A/S Team.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EDITION HISTORY
No. CODE NO. PRINTING DATE MODEL YEAR REMARKS

1 LRX-2OM3E-2B-500A Feb. 2002 2002
2 LRX-2OM3E-4B-500A Feb. 2004 2004
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOREWORD
This manual has been prepared to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new
REXTON and to provide important safety information. We urge you to read it carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure the most enjoyable, safe, and trouble-free operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your SSANGYONG dealer knows your vehicle best and is
interested in your complete satisfaction.
We would like to take this opportunity to thank you for choosing REXTON and assure you of our
continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction.
This manual should be considered as a permanent part of your vehicle, and must remain with the
vehicle at the time of resale.
PYUNGTAEK, KOREA
New Rexton00_EN_RHD_¼-À¯·´Áö¿ª.P65 Page 3 2004-10-18, ¿ÀÈÄ 2:59

Adobe PageMaker 6.5K/Win
GETtheMANUALS.org
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Please read this manual and follow the CAUTION All information, illustrations, and specifica-
instructions carefully. tions in this manual are based on the latest
CAUTION indicates a potentially
: This is the safety alert symbol used product information available at the time of
hazardous situation which, if not
to alert you to potential hazards publication.
avoided, may result in minor or
including injuries or damage to your
moderate injuries, or damage to Ssangyong reserves the right to change
vehicle or other property. Obey all
your vehicle or other property. specifications or designs at any time without
safety messages that follow this
notice and without incurring obligation.
symbol.
Throughout this manual, you will find special NOTE This vehicle may not comply with the
notations: NOTE indicates information which standards or regulations of other countries.
• Warning will assist you with maintenance or Before attempting to register this vehicle in
• Caution other instructions concerning your any other country, check all applicable
• Note vehicle. regulations and make any necessary
modifications.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially
* : fies
The asterisk in this manual signi-
an item of equipment that is not
This manual describes options and trim
available at the time of publication. Some of
hazardous situation which, if not included on all vehicles. Such items the items covered may not apply to your
avoided, could result in serious include engine options, model vehicle. Contact your Ssangyong dealer for
injury or death. variations specific to one country, information on option and trim availability.
and optional equipment.
Non-Ssangyong Genuine parts and
accessories have not been examined or
approved by Ssangyong. We can not certify
the suitability or safety of non-Ssangyong
Genuine parts and accessories and are not
liable for damage caused by their use.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. BEFORE DRIVING YOUR CAR ................................................................................................................ 1-1

2. STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................................... 2-1
3. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS .......................................................................................................... 3-1
4. SEAT AND RESTRAINT ............................................................................................................................. 4-1
5. VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ............................................................................. 5-1
6. TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 6-1
7. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ...................................................................................................................... 7-1
8. SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 8-1
9. VEHICLE CARE ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1
10. SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE DATA .................................................................................................. 10-1
11. INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................ 11-1

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR CAR

GETtheMANUALS.org
RUNNING-IN PERIOD BEFORE ENTERING THE CAR BEFORE DRIVING OFF

There are no particular brake-in rules for • Ensure that windows, outside rear view • Be sure you understand your car and
your new Rexton. However, following a few mirrors and lights are clean, undamaged its equipment and how to operate it
simple precautions for the first few thou- and unobstructed. safely.
sand kilometers can add to the good future • Visually note inflation condition of tyres. • Adjust your seating position.
performance, economy and long life of your • Check that all lights, switches and con- • Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Rexton. trols work properly. • Ensure that all occupants of the car
• Check the area behind the vehicle if you have fastened their seat belts.
• Do not race the engine.
are about to reverse. • Check the operation of the warning
• While driving, keep your engine speed
• Check under the vehicle for leaks. lights when the ignition key is turned to
(RPM) below the red zone.
• Check the engine oil level and other fluid/ “ON” position.
• Avoid full-throttle starts.
oil levels in engine compartment. • Check all gauges.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies.
• Release the parking brake and ensure
This will allow the breaks to bed in prop-
that the brake warning light goes out.
erly.
• Drive at varying speeds, trying not to
WARNING
“strain” the engine.
• Refrain from towing a trailer or an other Check to ensure that all light, signal-
vehicle. ing systems and warning indicators
• Avoid harsh operations such as abrupt are in working order.
start, sudden acceleration and prolonged
high speed driving.
These operations not only have a detri-
mental effect on the engine but also
cause excessive fuel and oil consump-
tion, which could result in the malfunc-
tion of the engine components.
Especially, avoid full-throttle acceleration
in low gear.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

KEY SYSTEM (REKES)*
Two keys are provided which fit all key cyl- 1. LOCK button: Locks all doors. Battery Replacement
inders. Keep one of the two keys as a Tail lamps will flash twice. If the LED fails to illuminate, the transmitter
spare. 2. UNLOCK button: Unlocks all doors. can still be used for a while. However, it is
Tail lamps will flash once. an indication that a new battery is needed.
WARNING
Do not leave the key with the vehicle. NOTE Use a CR 2025 battery for replacement and
• Lock the vehicle. adopt the following replacement procedure:
Do not get the transmitter wet.
• Take the key with you.
Avoid shock to the transmitter. 1. Unscrew the screw from the rear cover.
If you lost the transmitter and re- 2. Remove the battery, taking care to avoid
placed with new, the correct code touching the circuit board or other com-
must be newly programmed for the ponents.
operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCKING/UNLOCKING DOORS
WITH KEY (DRIVER’S DOOR)
3. Fit the new battery, ensuring that cor- CAUTION
rect polarity is maintained (positive (+)
Transmitter can be damaged.
side facing down towards the base).
• Do not reverse the polarity.
Finger marks will adversely affect bat-
• Avoid dropping.
tery life ; if possible, avoid touching the
• Do not place heavy objects on it.
flat surfaces of the battery and wipe
• Keep transmitter away from water
them clean before fitting.
and direct sun light.
4. Reassemble the cover of the transmitter.
5. Check the transmitter operation.
NOTE
CAUTION If transmitter gets wet, wipe it with Front doors can be locked or unlocked
soft cloth. from outside by using the key.
Used lithium battery can be a haz- Operational distance of REKES is To lock all doors, turn the key towards the
ard to health and the environment. about 5 m to the vehicle. rear of the vehicle.
• Do not dispose of used battery with Use only designated battery. To unlock all doors, turn the key towards the
household waste. When the REKES is replaced with front of the vehicle.
• Check with local authority or new, reprogram the code from our To open the door, pull the door handle while
Ssangyong Dealer for safe dis- service networks. the door is not unlocked.
posal facilities. The life of battery will be reduced a
lot if you use very frequently or re- CAUTION
placed with poor battery. Lock all doors and tailgate when
Operate the REKES when all the leaving the vehicle unattended.
doors are closed. If a door is opened,
the telltale lamps will not flash when
the button is pressed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING

DOOR LOCK BUTTON SYSTEM
WARNING Automatic door locking
All the doors will be automatically locked
Never leave children or animals un-
when you drive over 50 km/h while the doors
attended in the vehicle.
are unlocked.
• They can move the vehicle
unexpectedly.
• They can be suffocated in espe- Door unlocking
cially hot weather. If you press the door unlock switch or pull
the inside door handle, all the doors will be
unlocked automatically(Available from
driver’s seat).
Each door can be locked or unlocked from The doors locked by automatic door locking
the inside by pushing or pulling the door lock system will be automatically unlocked when
button. the vehicle is over a certain speed and at
1. Unlocking the event of collision.
2. Locking
CAUTION
When you press the button on the
driver’s or passenger’s door, buttons on Automatic door locking system may
all doors will be positioned to the lock not function when the door or/and
(Door lock buttons can be positioned to body is deformed by collision.
the lock only when all doors are closed).
3. To open the door from the inside, lift the NOTE
door lock button and pull the inside All doors will be automatically
handle. locked again if you drive over 50km/
h when auto door locking system is
released.

GETtheMANUALS.org
UNLOCKING SWITCH ON
DRIVER’S DOOR TAILGATE LOCK BUTTON IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM*
The Immobilizer System provides an addi-
tional theft deterrent to the vehicle in which
it is installed and prevents it from being
started by unauthorized persons.
When the ignition key with integrated tran-

sponder is turned to the ON position, ECU
(Engine Control Unit) checks the crypto code
of key and, if correct, allow your Rexton to
start the engine.
If you can not start the engine, have the
To unlock all doors in driver’s seat, press Tailgate can be locked or unlocked from the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer.
the inner side of the switch. inside by pushing or pulling the tailgate lock
The valid key for a vehicle equipped with a
button.
Immobilizer System is a mechanical ignition
NOTE key with integrated transponder, which is
electronically coded. The transponder is
Tailgate and tailgate window will be
placed invisibly in the ignition key.
locked or unlocked simultaneously.
Only valid ignition keys can be used to start
the engine.
The immobilizer system isolates fuel injection
control system in ECU (electric control unit)
when invalid keys are used.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Transponder code CAUTION

The 2 keys have respectively coded
Brief lighting of this indicator means
transponders.
that the communication between ig-
When lost the keys nition key and engine control unit is
When lost the keys, you have to erase the in normal condition.
transponder key from the engine control unit. If the indicator remains flickering,
To prevent the vehicle from being stolen by have the immobilizer system checked
lost keys, contact our service networks. by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
When the transponder has damaged
When the transponder has damaged, you
Immobilizer Indicator*
must replace it with new one and register WARNING
new code on engine control unit at our ser- This indicator indicates the operating condi-
tions of immobilizer system. In any cases, the immobilizer system
vice network. Otherwise, the engine cannot
If this indicator flickers, it may indicate that can not be removed from the vehicle.
be started.
there is something wrong in the immobilizer If you attempt to remove it and dam-
system. age the system, starting will be
impossible, so never attempt to
remove, damage or modify it.
And, remote engine starter can not
start the vehicle equipped with immo-
bilizer system. So never install a re-
mote engine starter.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING THE DOOR FROM OPENING THE DOOR FROM

OUTSIDE INSIDE
CAUTION
• Do not drop or shock to the tran-
sponder in the key, or it could be
damaged.
• If the transponder has damaged,
replace the key from Ssangyong
Dealer and register the code to the
engine control unit to be started.
• Be careful not to lose your key, or
the vehicle could be stolen. When
you lost the key, erase the lost To open the door, pull the outside door handle To open the door, pull the inside door handle
key’s transponder code from the outward. inward.
engine control unit in Ssangyong
Dealer to prevent the vehicle from CAUTION CAUTION
being stolen by lost key. The door should be already The door should be already
• When you have to replace the en- unlocked. unlocked.
gine control unit, replace all tran- However, even though the doors are
sponders at the same time. locked, door opening is available
• Immobilizer system could be from driver’s side and all doors will
inspected, replaced, serviced, and be unlocked.
coded only in Ssangyong Dealer. And
the only authorized personnel in
Ssangyong Dealer could work on it.
• When you erase the code or regis-
ter an extra key, please attend on
the site.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING THE TAILGATE CHILD SECURITY DOOR LOCKS

WARNING
Exhaust gases are poisonous.
Do not drive with the tailgate open
to avoid exhaust gas in passenger
compartment.
To open the tailgate, lift the tailgate handle Child security locking helps prevent rear
upward. doors from being accidentally opened by
children in the car.
CAUTION Child security door locks are provided with
The door and tailgate should be al- both rear doors.
ready unlocked. When the child-safe lever is in “LOCK” posi-
tion, the door can not be opened from the
inside.
WARNING Moreover, the inside door catch will be fixed
An open tailgate while vehicle is in at the locking position and can not be pulled.
motion could obscure rearward Rear doors locked with the child safe mecha-
vision, resulting in an accident. nism can still be opened from the outside if
Do not travel with the tailgate open. the door button is in the unlock position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINDOW SWITCH (DRIVER’S

SEAT)
Driver’s window
WARNING
The driver’s window switch operates in two
Children in rear seats can open rear
stages.
doors.
When the front of the switch is lightly
• Move child security door lock
pressed (stage 1), the window will be low-
latch to lock position.
ered while the switch is pressed. When
pressed to its end (stage 2), the window
will open automatically until it is fully open.
CAUTION
If you want to stop the window while auto-
Inside door handle could be matic lowering, lightly press the switch
damaged. (stage 1) again or pull up the switch.
• Do not pull inside door handle 1. Driver’s window
when using child security door 2. Passenger’s window
Operating time lag
locks. 3. Rear left window
The operation of power window can be
4. Rear right window
continued for 30 seconds even after turn-
You may operate the power windows when ing the ignition switch off.
the ignition switch is ON by using the power
window switches on each door panel.
• To lower the window, press down the

front area of the switch.
• To raise the window, pull up the front
area of the switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH WINDOW SWITCH (EXCEPT

(ON DRIVER’S DOOR PANEL) DRIVER’S SEAT)
WARNING
Accidental closing of the power win-
dow can result in serious injury.
• When carrying children on the
rear seat, press the rear door win-
dow lock switch to make the rear
door switches inoperative.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power window switch and rear
door window switches.
If this switch is pressed, all door windows Passenger’s and rear door window • When closing the passenger’s and
are operated only by driver’s door window switches are located on each door to op- rear windows from driver’s seat,
switches. To deactivate, press the switch erate the corresponding door window. make sure of safety conditions
again. The driver’s window operates with- To lower the window press down on the before operation.
out relations to window lock switch. switch.
To raise the window lift up on the switch.
NOTE WARNING
Release the switch when the window
The rear door window does not open reaches the desired position. Parts of the body can be trapped in
fully. power window and struck by passing
objects.
• Keep a close watch on the windows
when closing them.
• Do not stick hands, head or any-
thing else out of the opening.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE WINDOW*
WARNING
Always remove the ignition key when
leaving the car to avert the risk of
injury arising from unattended chil-
dren operating the windows.
To unlock the tailgate window, pull the left To open the tailgate window, hold the outer
tailgate lever with tailgate unlocked. tailgate window handle and lift up the win-
dow.
WARNING
When the tailgate window is opened,
emission gas could be flowed into
the interior and harmful to
passengers, so completely close the
window if engine is running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE HOOD
WARNING
An open engine hood with engine
running exposes moving parts which
can crush, cut or entangle.
• Do not wear loose clothing.
• Keep hands and hair away from
moving parts.
WARNING
1. To open the engine hood, pull the release 2. Pull the safety catch lever located un- If it is necessary to check beneath the
knob located on left lower side of instru- der the hood and lift the engine hood. engine hood with engine running ;
ment panel to unlatch the engine hood. • For manual transmission place
The engine hood will then be unlocked gearshift in neutral.
and partially open. • For automatic transmission place
gearshift in P (park).
• Set parking brake fully.
• Do not wear any clothing such as
ties and handkerchiefs.
• Do not wear loose clothing.
• Keep hands and hair away from
moving parts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE

LEVER
WARNING
The vehicle can still move from an
stationary position while the engine
hood is open. Before releasing the
engine hood latch;
• Remove ignition key.
• For manual transmission place
gearshift in 1st or reverse.
• For automatic transmission place
gearshift in P (Park).
• Apply parking brake fully. Fill Fuel Tank 3. Open the fuel filler cap by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
1. Stop the engine
4. After refueling, tighten the fuel filler cap
WARNING 2. Open the fuel filler door by pulling the
by turning it clockwise and push the fuel
An open engine hood while the ve- release lever located on left upper side
filler door properly until it latches.
hicle is in motion obscures forward of instrument panel.
vision, resulting in an accident. WARNING
• Check that the engine hood is fully
latched in position by pulling at Gasoline vapor is highly flammable.
it’s front edge before driving. It burns violently and that can cause
• Do not operate the engine hood re-
very bad injuries.
lease handle while vehicle is in When refueling,
motion. • Switch off engine.
• No smoking.
• Do not move the vehicle with en-
• No naked flame.
gine hood in raised position.
• No sparking material.

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER SUN ROOF*

WARNING Sliding the Sun Roof
Fuel may be under pressure. 1. To open the sun roof automatically, press
• Unscrew fuel filler cap slowly. OPEN on the switch for 0.5 second.
• Wait for “hiss” noise to stop. 2. If you press the switch again during the
• Unscrew cap completely. sliding operation, sun roof will be
stopped.
3. To close the sun roof, press CLOSE on
CAUTION the switch. Release the switch when
Engine and exhaust system will be sun roof reaches the desired position.
damaged. Open Open Open
Make sure to use designated fuel to Before operating the sun roof you first have
the vehicle. to open the blind panel by pushing rearward.
CAUTION
Close Close Close
Gasoline damages paintwork.
• Open • Stop • Close
If gasoline spills onto paintwork
wash with cold water immediately.
NOTE
The fuel filler door may not open in
cold weather.
Push or tap fuel filler door lightly to
open.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tilting Up the Sun Roof CAUTION WARNING

To tilt up (vent position) the sun roof, press • The sunroof will operate when the Parts of the body protruding from
CLOSE on the switch with the sun roof ignition key is ON position (engine the vehicle can be struck by passing
closed. is not running), however operation objects.
To return closed position, press OPEN on under engine running is Do not stick hands, head, or anything
the switch. recommended. else out of the sun roof opening.
• For the driving safety, operate the
Open Open Open
sunroof while the vehicle is
stopped. WARNING
• When the sunroof operation is Care must be taken when operating
completed, release the switch. If the power sun roof. There is a risk of
keeps pressing the switch, could be injury, particularly for children, and
Vent Vent Vent a cause of malfunction. Especially a danger that limbs or articles could
• Vent • Stop • Close in winter, never operate the become trapped in sun roof.
sunroof if operation areas are iced Ensure the sun roof opening is clear
and wait for deicing. before closing it.
• During charging after battery dis-
charge, press the switch for 5 sec-
onds respectively when the sunroof WARNING
is completely opened, closed, tilted When leaving the vehicle
down and tilted up to reset the unattended, close the sun roof fully.
each position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING
Debris on the sun roof can damage
operation.
• Clean the sun roof before opening.
• Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from on top of the sun roof
before opening.
• Do not place heavy objects on the
sun roof or surrounding area.
Opening/Closing the Blind Panel

To open the blind panel, push it rearward.

GETtheMANUALS.org
2
STARTING AND OPERATING

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Commercially available high-quality fuels are CAUTION Operation in Foreign Countries
suitable. Fuel quality has a decisive influence If you are going to drive your Rexton in an-
on the power output, driveability and life of other country, be sure to :
the engine. The additives contained in the
damaged.
• Do not use leaded fuel to the ve- • Observe all regulations regarding regis-
fuel play an important role in this connection. tration and insurance.
hicle for unleaded fuel.
You should therefore use only high-quality • Check that a suitable fuel is available.
• Use the fuel with specified or
fuels.
higher Research Octane Number
recommended for your country by Vehicle Fueling from Drums or Storage
Diesel Engine Ssangyong. Containers
Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher. It is not covered by warranty. For safety reasons (particularly when us-
ing noncommercial fueling systems) fuel
Gasoline Engine Do not Use Methanol containers, pumps and hoses must be prop-
Fuel with too low an octane number can Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) erly earthed.
cause pre-ignition (detonation). Ssangyong should not be used in your Rexton. This type Static electricity build up can occur under
can not be held liable for resultant damage. of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and certain atmospheric and fuel flow conditions
damage components of the fuel system. if unearthed hoses, particularly plastic, are
CAUTION fitted to the fuel dispensing pump.
For correct octane rating setting and NOTE It is therefore recommended that earthed
other use of gasoline (ex. Leaded), The warranty policy will not cover pumps with integrally earthed hoses be
consult your Ssangyong Dealer. damage of the fuel system and any used, and that storage containers be prop-
performance problems that are erly earthed during all noncommercial fuel-
caused by the use of methanol or ing operations.
fuel containing methanol.

GETtheMANUALS.org
IGNITION SWITCH
3. ACC Position 5. START Position
The engine can be turned off without lock- This position activates the starter motor,
ing the steering wheel. starting the engine.
Some electrical accessories such as the Release the key when the engine starts, and
radio and cigarette lighter can be operated it will be returned to the “ON” position auto-
in this position. matically.
CAUTION
WARNING
Battery can discharge.
Never remove or turn the key off
Do not leave key at “ACC” position
while driving.
for periods.
1. PUSH • This can cause the driver to lose
control of vehicle.
To turn the key from “ACC” to “LOCK” posi-
• This can result in serious vehicle
tion, you must push it in. 4. ON Position
damage or personal injury.
This position turns on the ignition system and
2. LOCK Position the electrical accessories such as power
The steering is locked by removing the key. window, sun roof, heater, and air WARNING
Rotate the steering wheel until lock is conditioner.
Steering wheel can suddenly turn.
engaged.
CAUTION Never reach for the ignition switch
For easier key operation when unlocking,
Battery will discharge. key through the steering wheel.
move the steering gently from right to left
and turn the key to the “ACC” position. Do not leave key at “ON” position
without running the engine for long.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

• Make sure the area around the vehicle 1. Apply the parking brake. 3. Crank the engine without touching the
is clear. accelerator pedal by turning the igniting
• The maintenance items in this manual 2. Manual transmission : key to the “START” position.
should be checked periodically, e.g., Move the gearshift lever to Neutral po- Release the key when the engine starts.
each time you check the engine oil. sition and depress the clutch pedal to the If the engine starts, but fails to run, re-
• Check that all the windows and lights are floor while cranking the engine. peat the above procedure.
clean. Automatic transmission* :
• Visually inspect the tyres for their ap- Move the selector lever to “P” (Park) or
pearance and condition. Also check the “N” (Neutral), although “P” is preferred.
tyre pressures for proper inflation. The starter is designed not to operate if
• Position seat and adjust head restraints. the selector lever is in one of the driv-
• Adjust inside and outside mirrors. ing positions.
• Fasten your seat belts and ask all pas-
sengers to do likewise. Diesel engine model :
• Check the operation of the warning The glow indicator light will come on and
lights when the key is turned to the “ON” go out when the glow plugs are suffi-
position. ciently heated for cold engine starting.
As soon as the glow indicator light goes
out, start the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING WITH A MANUAL

TRANSMISSION
CAUTION CAUTION
To help prevent the start motor dam- Shifting to reverse gear while vehicle
age; is moving forward could damage the
• Do not operate the starter for more transmission.
than 15 seconds at a time. Stop your vehicle completely before
• If the engine does not start, wait 10 shifting into reverse.
seconds before trying again. To help prevent clutch damage, do
not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving.
CAUTION Never take the vehicle out of gear
Excessive temperature can damage The manual transmission in your Rexton has and coast down a hill.
the exhaust system. 5 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed.
Do not idle at high speed for more
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
than 5 minutes.
pedal. Then, move the gearshift lever.
Fully depress the clutch pedal, or the
After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
engine will not start.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while starting the engine.
Depress the brake pedal when you
start the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING WITH AN AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION*
WARNING WARNING
The vehicle could move unexpectedly To help prevent transmission
when shifting. You could lose control damage;
and hit people or objects. • Do not depress the accelerator
Always depress brake pedal firmly pedal while shifting from “P” or
while shifting from “P” (Park) or “N” “N” to “R”, “D”, “3”, “2”, or “1”.
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse Always depress the brake pedal
gear. until shifting is completed.
• Never shift to “P (Park)” or “R (Re-
verse)” while the vehicle is in mo-
5-speed automatic transmission CAUTION tion.
Always use the parking brake. Shift to “P” or “R” only after ve-
Do not depend on “P” position to hicle is stopped completely.
keep the vehicle from moving. • When stopping the vehicle on an
uphill gradient, do not hold the
vehicle by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. The foot brake should
be used for this purpose.
• To drive on a slope, set the lever
to “3”, “2” or “1” position accord-
ing to road condition.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS

Starting the Car
• After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before shifting the
selector lever to the “R”, “D”, “3”, “2” or
“1” position. Be sure the vehicle has P: Park N: Neutral
completely stopped before attempting to Use this position when the vehicle is parking, It indicates neutral position and use this po-
shift the selector lever into “R” or “P”. starting the engine or stationing the vehicle. sition for temporarily parking.
To shift into any other position, depress the
1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
brake pedal(ignition switch “ON”) CAUTION
and shift into a driving gear.
To shift into P position, you have to com- Never shift into N position while
2. Release the parking brake and foot
pletely stop the vehicle. driving, or the transmission will be
brake. Depressing the accelerator pedal
slowly will gradually set the vehicle in damaged.
motion. When you stopping the vehicle on the
uphill or downhill roads in N
position, depress the brake pedal.
To shift into D or R from N position
after stopping the vehicle, you have
R: Reverse to depress the brake pedal.
Use this position to reverse the vehicle. To
shift into R position from P or N position,
completely stop the vehicle and depress the
brake pedal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING
pectedly while driving, the shiftable
- D + : Drive gear may be changed. It can make
(5-speed automatic transmission the vehicle unstable. Be carefule not
equipped vehicle) to touch the selector lever while
driving.
• Use this position in normal driving
conditions.
• The gear is changed from 1st to 5th ac-
cording to the vehicle speed and the ac-
Adjustment for the shiftable gear in
celeration with accelerator pedal.
• The shift indicator in instrument panel “- D +” position
shows the selected gear as shown ablve. (5-speed automatic transmission
equipped vehicle)
CAUTION The shiftable gear is down/up by one step as
Please note that the vehicle may the lever is moved to left(-)/right(+) direction.
slowly move forward when the selec-
tor lever is at “- D +” position.
: when moving the lever to left (-) direction

: when moving the lever to left (+) direction

GETtheMANUALS.org
• The gear is automatically downshifted to

lower gear according to the vehicle speed
and the accelerator pedal position while
pushing and holding the lever to (-) direction. The drive position for maximum braking D: Drive (4-speed)
• The gear is change to “D” position that can effect, e.g. when driving down severe gra-
The drive position for normal driving condi-
be shifted to all forward gears while push- dients; the transmission does not shift be-
tions in first to fourth gear.
ing and holding the lever to (+) direction. yond first gear.
CAUTION
• When pushing and holding the lever
The drive position for driving conditions in to left (-)/right (+), the gear may be
first, second, third and fourth gear. shifted through several steps in series.
3: 3rd Gear (4-speed)
Make sure to shift one step at a time.
• If you apply excessive force when The drive position for driving conditions in
moving the lever to left (-)/right (+), first, second and third gear.
the gear may not be shifted to You might choose 3 instead of D under the
The drive position for driving conditions in other gears. Soft and smooth op- following condition:
first, second and third gear. eration is recommended.
• When driving on long hilly roads
• When driving in heavy city traffic
WARNING • When going down a steep hill
The drive position prevents the transmission pectedly while driving, the shiftable
from shifting into third or fourth gear. gear may be changed. It can make the
Select drive range 2 for more power when vehicle unstable. Be carefule not to
climbing hills, for engine braking effects touch the selector lever while driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Shift Lever Operation

WARNING (5-speed automatic transmission)
The vehicle can move suddenly when
2: 2nd Gear (4-speed) unattended.
• Turn off the engine, apply the park-
The drive position prevents the transmission
from shifting into third or fourth gear.
ing brake fully and remove the ig-
Select drive range 2 for more power when
nition key when leaving the
climbing hills, for engine braking effects
vehicle.
• Do not use “P” (Park) position in
place of the parking brake.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended
while the engine is running.
CAUTION
1: 1st Gear (4-speed)
Even the gear is in D position, your
The drive position for maximum braking vehicle can be moved back on the
effect, e.g. when driving down severe gra- uphill according to gradients, so you
dients; the transmission does not shift be- have to depress the brake pedal.
yond first gear.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MODE SWITCH
(4-speed automatic transmission) S: Standard mode
Shift lever moves without • Press the “S” portion of the mode switch
depressing the brake to select “STANDARD” driving mode.
pedal. • Use the STANDARD mode for your nor-
mal driving.
Shift lever moves when
the brake pedal is
W: Winter Mode
depressed.
In this mode, the vehicle starts from 2nd gear.
Shift lever moves without Press the “W” portion of the mode switch to
depressing the brake select “WINTER” driving mode and “WINTER”
• 5-speed automatic transmission has
pedal, however for safety indicator lamp will be displayed on the instru-
STANDARD (S) mode and WINTER (W)
reasons, the brake pedal ment panel.
mode.
should be depressed. Use this mode in the event of starting-off or
• Use the STANDARD mode in normal driv-
driving difficulties on slippery roads.
ing conditions and use the WINTER mode
on slippery road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4-speed
• 2nd reverse gear starting off in WINTER Power Mode
mode For increased power, improved acceleration
If you start off the vehicle with 2nd reverse or driving up long slopes, press the “P” por-
gear, the slipping between tire and road sur- tion of the mode switch.
face on the slippery road can be eliminated. The transmission will shift into the power
driving pattern. The transmission will shift at
higher engine revolutions, allowing more
• How to start off the vehicle with 2nd
powerful acceleration.
reverse gear
1. Press the “W” portion of the mode Normal
switch to select “WINTER” driving mode. Winter Mode Use this mode for your normal driving.
2. Place the selector lever to “D” position This driving mode can be selected when both
and check if the shift lever indicator In this mode, the vehicle starts from 2nd
“W” and “P” portions are not pressed.
shows “D2”. gear.
3. Place the selector lever to “R” position Press the “W” portion of the mode switch to
to start off the vehicle with 2nd reverse select “WINTER” driving mode and “WINTER”
gear. indicator lamp will be displayed on the instru-
ment panel.
CAUTION Use this mode in the event of starting-off or
• Do not use WINTER mode on nor- driving difficulties on slippery roads.
mal driving condition.
• When started off with WINTER
mode, stop the WINTER mode af-
ter the vehicle speed is reached at
a certain level.

GETtheMANUALS.org
KICKDOWN FUNCTION (BTRA: SAFETY MODE (5-SPEED

4-SPEED) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
NOTE When the transmission has electric or me-
chanical fault, the transmission operates in
Kickdown? safety mode to maintain minimum driving
If you need to accelerate rapidly, cinditions and to prevent the transmission
depress the accelerator pedal com- from being damaged.
pletely to the floor to push the When the transmission is defective, the
kickdown switch on the floor. Then, symptoms that can be occurred are as
the kickdown will be operated and follows:
the transmission shift to a lower • Heavy shock when moving the selector
gear automatically. lever
• Decreased driving force while driving at
Kickdown switch is located under the ac- high speed
celerator pedal. Use it for rapid or uphill • Fixed gear position during driving
acceleration. The electronic pedal installed on 5-speed
• Fixed at 3rd gear
When the accelerator pedal is depressed automatic transmission provides kick-down
• Fixed at a gear other than 3rd gear when
fully, there will be contacting sound or feel- function according to the level of accelera-
the 3rd gear is defective
ing and kickdown function starts. tor pedal movement without kick-down
When the kickdown switch is operated, the switch.
POWER light in the meter cluster comes ON.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EMERGENCY SHIFTING
If the shifting is not available, reset the CAUTION PROCEDURE
safety mode. Your vehicle has a shift lever lock control
• If you find any symptom caused by
system. Before you can shift from park (P),
• How to reset the safety mode mechanical or electrical defective
in transmission, stop the vehicle
1. Park the vehicle and place the selector press the brake pedal.
immediately and reset the safety
lever to “P” position. If you cannot shift out of P with the ignition
mode.
2. Stop the engine and wait for over 10 ON and the brake pedal depressed:
• If abnormal operation of the trans-
seconds. 1. Turn ignition off.
mission (fixed at 2nd forward gear
3. Start the engine. 2. Push the shift lock release lever by in-
in “D” position or 2nd reverse gear
serting a proper stick. Then, with the
• Symptoms after resetting the safety in “R” position) is still present,
brake pedal depressed, move the selec-
mode have the transmission checked as
tor lever to N (neutral).
soon as possible at the nearest
- If the vehicle is normally operational af- 3. Start engine and shift into the gear you
ter resetting, the troubles are corrected. want.
- The gear may be fixed at 2nd forward 4. Have your vehicle repaired by
gear in “D” position or 2nd reverse gear Ssangyong dealer or authorized service
in “R” position. operation as soon as possible.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING TIPS FOR AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION*
Starting the Car Engine Braking Maneuvering the Car
After starting the engine and before shifting In order to utilize the engine braking effect To maneuver the car back and forth during
into a drive range, depress the brake pedal when driving downhill, select drive range attempts to park or in garage entrances uti-
since the vehicle will otherwise start to “3”, “2” or, if necessary, “1”. lize the creeping effect. Regulate your speed
“creep”. Never use accelerator and brake by lightly releasing the brake pedal. Never
The braking action is most effective in drive
pedals simultaneously. press the accelerator and brake pedals
range “1”. If drive range “1” is selected at
For normal driving conditions the “D” should simultaneously.
too high a speed, the transmission remains
be selected.
in second gear until the shift point for first NOTE
If the accelerator pedal is depressed gen-
gear is reached, e.g. as a result of decelera- • CREEP effect
tly and evenly the transmission will shift
tion. The vehicle will move slowly with-
into the fuel-saving higher gears at an early
stage. The drive range needs to be out acceleration when the engine
Stopping the Car is running if you select “R”, “D”,
changed manually only in exceptional
cases. Select “3”, “2” and “1” only when The selector lever can be left in the chosen “3”, “2”, “1” positions and it is
automatic shifting up is to be avoided or if drive range with the engine running. When called “CREEP” effect. It is very
additional use is to be made of the engine stopping on gradients engage the parking unique characteristics of auto-
braking effect. brake or depress the brake pedal. Do not matic transmission system in
Return to “D” as soon as conditions permit. increase the engine revolutions to ensure which weak power is continuously
smooth idling while standing if a drive range delivered to the transmission in
has been selected. order to rotate the torque
Before leaving the vehicle, apply parking converter.
brake, then place selector lever in position
“P” and remove ignition key.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH - 4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH -

PART-TIME* FULL-TIME (TOD)*
1. ‘2H’ (2-Wheel drive)
This is rear wheel drive with high speed. Use
this for normal driving. This position gives
greater economy, quieter ride and least drive
train wear.

Use this for driving on wet or slippery roads
such as roads with snow, mud or sand.
This position provides greater traction than
2-wheel drive. The front hubs will be locked
DRIVING POSITION DRIVING POSITION
automatically.
The 4WD indicator light illuminates when the The 4WD LOW indicator light illuminates
4WD switch is in ‘4H or 4L. when the 4WD switch is in 4L.
Use this for maximum power and traction.
Use ‘4L’ for climbing or descending steep
Use this for normal driving. This position
hills, hard pulling in sand, mud or deep snow.
gives greater economy, quieter ride and least
drive train wear.

Use this for maximum traction in slippery
roads, steep hills and rough roads.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

‘2H’ ↔ ‘4H’ (Part-time only) ‘2H’ or ‘4H’ ↔ ‘4L’ WARNING
Depending on the road conditions, select the To shift from ‘2H’ or ‘4H’ to ‘4L’, the vehicle
In case of part-time 4WD, do not use
4WD switch to ‘4H’ by pushing before driv- should be stopped.
4WD for normal driving on dry pave-
ing off or during driving. Shifting is possible Depressing the clutch pedal (with manual
ment. It will cause unnecessary noise,
while driving at the speed of 70km/h or less. transmission) or moving the selector lever
wear and fuel economy.
The 4WD HIGH (‘4H’) indicator light may to ‘N’ position (with automatic transmission),
come on. select the 4WD switch to ‘4L’ by pushing it.
When 4WD is in no longer needed, select The 4WD LOW (‘4L’) indicator light may come WARNING
the 4WD switch from ‘4H’ to ‘2H’. This will on. To shift ‘4L’ position, completely stop
avoid unnecessary heavy steering, tyre When ‘4L’ operation is no longer needed, the vehicle and always depress the
wear and fuel consumption. select the 4WD switch from ‘4L’ to ‘2H’ or clutch pedal, for manual transmission,
‘4H’. To shift from ‘4L’ to ‘2H’ or ‘4H’, stop or position the selector lever to “N”,
NOTE the vehicle and depress the clutch pedal (on for automatic transmission, and select
Perform this operation when driving manual transmission) or move the selector the 4WD switch to ‘4L’.
straight. lever to ‘N’ position (on automatic transmis-
Shifts between high-speed modes sion) and select the 4WD switch to ‘2H’ or
NOTE
(2H↔ 4H) do not require clutch op- ‘4H’.
eration and available while the ve- When shifting ‘4L’ → ‘4H’ in auto-
hicle speed is less than 70Km/h, how- matic transmission, foot brake and
ever recommend you to shift when shift the selector lever to
the vehicle speed is low. “N→ R→ N” after 4WD LOW indica-
tor OFF for smooth shifting.
In case of TOD 4WD, the 4L indica-
tor in instrument panel will blink
during mode changes, then will come
out or come on after completion.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS IN 4-WHEEL DRIVE

OPERATION ESP OFF SWITCH*
• Changing from high speed modes (2H, ESP System*
4H) to low speed mode (4L) during driv-
The ESP system is an electronic vehicle sta-
ing is very dangerous, so the self con-
bility control system and driving safety
trol system controls not to happen (avail-
supplementary system that helps to avoid
able when the vehicle speed is less than
dangerous situations by applying brakes on
3km/h).
the wheels or the engine torque to compen-
• When the 4H or 4L mode is selected, the
sate vehicle stability when it is extremely
relevant indicator in the instrument panel
unstable under conditions such as sharp
will come on (4L only for TOD).
cornering. This system also includes brake
If the indicator continues to blink or two
assist function for the handicapped persons
indicators are come on simultaneously,
If you press the ESP OFF switch, the ESP because they depress the brake pedal softly
there might be malfunction in 4-wheel
function stops and the indicator lamp in in- even when hard braking is required. If the
drive system to be inspected.
strument panel comes on. system recognizes that it is an emergency
• If you operate the switch, there could
Press this switch again to resume the ESP case requires hard braking, it delivers high
be mechanical noises and shocks in
function. At this time, the indicator lamp goes braking pressure to the wheels. The ESP
shift, however it is normal conditions oc-
out. function works when vehicle stability is very
curring in mode changes.
If the ESP function operates while driving, unstable. The ESP system does not work
• Select the proper 4-wheel drive mode
the indicator lamp flickers and the alarm under normal driving conditions.
according to road conditions (slippery,
steep hills, roughness, etc.) sounds.
• Never use 4-wheel drive operations as
engine brake while descending hills.
• 4-Wheel Drive doesn’t mean the perfect
protection for any conditions. Please rely
on safety driving habits other than
system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Stopping ESP Function with ESP OFF ESP & ABS* CAUTION
Switch* The ESP system is activated unless you • The ESP system deactivates when
If the driving wheels are slipping on the press the ESP OFF switch. However, the stopping the engine. It will be re-
snowy or icy road, the engine rpm may not ABS system operates only when the tyres sumed when the engine is started
be increased even when you depress the are slipping on the road surface due to sud- again.
accelerator pedal, and accordingly, you may den braking. Basically, the ESP system is • If the vehicle is controlled by ESP
not start off your vehicle. In this case, stop advanced vehicle control system that inte- during driving, the ESP OFF
the ESP function by pressing the ESP OFF grates the ABS system and vehicle stability switch will not work.
switch. When the ESP switch is pressed, control system. • The ESP system does not operate
the ESP function stops and the vehicle is during reverse driving.
driven independently from the sensor • If the ESP function operates while
outputs. driving, the indicator lamp flick-
ers and the alarm sounds.
Driving Impression when ESP is Working
The ESP system may transfer noise and vi-
bration to the driver due to the pressure
changes caused by the motor and valve
operations in a very short period of time.
Extreme cornering will trigger the ESP op-
eration and this will make the driver feel
noise and vibration due to strong braking
operation. Also, the ESP system controls the
engine output. So, the driver may notice the
engine output decrease even when the ac-
celerator pedal is being depressed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE
WARNING WARNING • If one brake circuit should fail, the ve-
hicle can still be stopped with the sec-
• If the ESP warning light comes on, • The ESP system is only a supple- ond remaining circuit. If this happens, the
the ESP related system is defective. mentary device for the vehicle. brake pedal must be fully depressed
At this moment, the ABS works in When the vehicle exceeds its physi- with greater pedal pressure. The brak-
a basic way. However, make sure cal limits, it cannot be controlled. ing distance is increased. Have the brak-
to check the vehicle at the nearest Do not rely on the system. Keen on ing system checked and repaired by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong the safe driving. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
Authorized Service Operation. rized Service Operation before continu-
• If the ESP warning light and the ing your journey.
ABS warning light come on • After being parked, check to be sure the
simultaneously, both ESP and ABS parking brake is not engaged and that
system are not working. Do not the parking brake indicator light is out
over speed your vehicle and be before driving away.
sure to check or repair the vehicle • Do not coast down hills with the vehicle
at the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or out of gear. This may be extremely haz-
Ssangyong Authorized Service ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
Operation. times, use the brakes to slow down.
• If the ESP warning light flickers • If a tyre goes flat while driving, apply the
and the alarm sounds, it means brakes gently and keep the vehicle
that the vehicle stability is con- pointed straight ahead while you slow
trolled by the ESP function when down. When you are moving slowly
vehicle stability is extremely enough for it to be safe to do so, pull
unstable. In this situation, drive off the road and stop in a safe place.
the vehicle with maximum safety.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM*

(ABS)
WARNING WARNING Anti-lock brake system is an advanced elec-
tronic braking system that will help prevent
Brakes can have temporary loss of Brakes can have temporary loss of a braking skid.
performance due to overheating. performance due to wet brake The anti-lock brake system prevents the
• On descents shift to a low gear. components. wheels from locking up during sudden brak-
• Do not continually apply brakes. • After checking the rear for other ing or braking on a slippery road to help the
vehicles, lightly apply brakes for vehicle remain steerable and stable.
performance loss. This system becomes operative only when
WARNING
• Keep safe forward speed. it senses differences in rotational speed of
Do not drive with your foot resting • Keep plenty of space ahead, to the the wheels, and that they are about to lock
on the brake pedal. This could result rear and to the sides. up. The system detects the wheel speed
in the brakes overheating and losing • Lightly apply brakes until perfor- and electronically controls the pressure ap-
their effectiveness, wear out the mance is normal. plied to the brake.
brake pads. • Always apply this procedure after When the ignition is switched on, the ABS
driving through water deep warning light comes on. It goes out after
enough to wet brake components about 2 seconds. If it does not go out, or if
or having the vehicle washed, to it comes on during driving, there is a de-
help reduce the risk of personal fect in the ABS. In this case the brake sys-
injury. tem performs its regular function but with-
out the anti-locking capability.
In the event of a defect in ABS, the trac-
tion control system (TCS) is shut off as well.
Have the ABS checked by Ssangyong
Operation as soon as possible.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTION Braking with ABS WARNING

Don’t pump the brakes. Press the brake pedal
Driving too fast, particularly in cor- Stopping distances can vary greatly
hard down regardless of the road surface
ners, aquaplaning and driving too depending on the road surface and
(dry, wet, slippery, etc.), hold it down and
close to the vehicle in front in- conditions.
let ABS work for you.
creases the risk of an accident. This • Maintain safe distance to the ve-
The ABS modulates the braking pressure to
risk can not be reduced by the ABS hicle in front.
the respective wheels to maintain the maxi-
system. • Drive slowly on wet or slippery
mum braking effect on the vehicle, reducing
road.
the loss of directional stability or steering
control.
Slight vibration accompanied by noise usu- WARNING
ally occurs while ABS is operating. Such
ABS cannot prevent accidents result-
vibration and noise simply indicates that the
ing from careless or dangerous driv-
ABS is functioning normally.
ing techniques.
In an emergency, apply full force on the
• Drive carefully.
brake and clutch pedal simultaneously.
• Slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system will be activated
• Press brake pedal hard and hold.
immediately, thus allowing you to retain full
steering control of your vehicle.
We recommend that you familiarize yourself
with this braking technique. However, avoid
taking unnecessary risks.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING When Parking Your Vehicle
1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly
Brake system and ABS warning light
apply the parking brake.
illuminating at the same time indi-
2. Manual transmission models :
cates a failure in the base brake sys-
When parking on level ground, place the
tem due to malfunction of ABS.
gearshift lever in the “NEUTRAL”
• Stop the vehicle and consult your
position.
Ssangyong Dealer.
When parking on a downhill gradient,
• Have the system checked and re-
place the gearshift lever in the “RE-
paired before continuing your
VERSE” position.
journey.
When parking on an uphill gradient,
The parking brake acts on the rear wheels.
place the gearshift lever in the “1st”
It engages automatically when applied. The
position.
parking brake lever is located between the
front seats. Automatic transmission models :
Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
To apply the parking brake, depress the
position.
brake pedal and pull the lever up fully.
3. Close all windows and sun roof*.
To release, depress the brake pedal, pull the
4. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” posi-
lever up slightly and push the button in the
tion and remove the key.
tip of the lever. Then lower the lever while
5. Lock all doors and tailgate.
holding the button in.
6. Be sure the vehicle is not moving.
Ensure the parking brake is fully released
before driving off.
See your Ssangyong Dealer if adjustment of
the parking brake is required.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking Brake Warning Light and Buzzer CAUTION CAUTION

If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds Things that can burn could touch hot Under cold weather conditions, the
(over 10 km/h) while the parking brake is exhaust parts under your vehicle and parking brake can freeze in the en-
applied, the parking brake warning light ignite. gaged position.
comes on and warning buzzer sounds. Do not park or operate vehicle over This is most likely to happen if the
If it occurs, immediately stop the vehicle and combustible materials. brakes are wet.
release the parking brake. If there is a risk that the parking
brake may freeze after driving
CAUTION
through water deep enough to wet
The vehicle can move when parked. brake components or having the ve-
• Always apply parking brake fully. hicle washed;
• Park on firm, level ground. • Apply the parking brake only tem-
• When hill parking, do not leave porarily while you put the gear se-
front wheels in straight ahead ma- lector lever in “P” (automatic
terials. transmission) or in first or reverse
gear (manual transmission), and
CAUTION • Block the rear wheels.
• Then release the parking brake.
Driving with parking brake applied
could damage rear brake system.
• Before driving, fully release park-
ing brake.
• Check brake system warning light
off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING AID SYSTEM*

• Each end side sensor and two center Tips on Parking Aid System
portion sensors will activate the alarm The alarm will not work or improperly work
when the distance between your vehicle under following cases:
and the obstacle is around 120~80cm A. Certain obstacles that sensors can
and 100~80cm respectively. not detect
: Intermittent alarm 1. Wires, ropes, chains.
Beep 2. Cotton, sponge, clothes, snow that ab-
“ON” sorb ultrasonic waves.
Beep 3. Obstacles lower than the bumper.
“OFF”
B. The sensors can not detect

The parking aid system will be activated
• When the distance is between 80~50cm 1. When they are frozen.
when the automatic transmission selector
: Regular alarming 2. When they are blocked by snow or mud.
lever is shifted into “R” position and the re-
3. When they are receiving other ultrasonic
verse lamps are turned on when ignition
signals (metal sounds and air-braking
switch is in ON or engine is running. At this Beep
noises from heavy commercial vehicles).
time, you can figure out the distance be- “ON”
tween your vehicle and obstacles with the Beep
alarming sound. “OFF”
• When the distance is between 50cm

: Alarm stays on
Beep
“ON”
Beep
“OFF”

GETtheMANUALS.org
C. Narrowed sensing scopes CAUTION

1. When the sensing scope is narrowed
• The parking aid system is a park-
due to partially blocked by snow or mud
ing aid system. You should con-
on the surface of the sensors (it will
tinue to utilize the mirrors or turn-
work again after cleaning).
2. When the ambient temperature is too
ing your head. Normal precau-
tions when reversing should be
high (approx. over 80oC).
yyyyyy
;;;;;;
maintained.
3. When the ambient temperature is too low
• Do not press or shock the sensors
(approx. lower than -30oC).
by hitting or high-pressure water
gun while washing, or the sensors
D. Not defective but improperly work-
will be damaged.
ing NOTE
• When the parking aid system is not
1. When driving on the rough roads, gravel • In the parking lot as shown above,
road, hill and grass.
activated but the alarm sounds for
3 seconds, check and repair your the upper portion of the vehicle
2. When the bumper height is changed due can be hit before the sensor opera-
vehicle at Ssangyong Dealer or
to the heavy load. tion, so check with outside rear-
3. When the sensing portion is frozen.
Ssangyong Auyhorized Service
operation. view mirrors or by turning your
4. When the sensing portion is covered by head during parking.
However, do not confuse with the
rain, water drops, snow or mud. • Please note the ‘Tips on parking
5. When receiving other ultrasonic signals
sounds that continue when the ob-
stacles are within 50cm. aid system’.
(metal sound or air braking noises from • The parking aid system will oper-
heavy commercial vehicles). ate correctly flat vertical surfaces.
6. When the sensor is hindered by improp-
erly fitted accessories.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SUGGESTIONS FOR MORE ENGINE EXHAUST GAS

ECONOMICAL OPERATION CAUTION (CARBON MONOXIDE)
Your car’s fuel economy is mainly dependent • Do not carry unnecessary weight in the • Avoid inhaling engine exhaust gases.
on your style of driving. vehicle. Engine exhaust gases contains carbon
How you drive, where you drive, and when • Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal monoxide, which has no color or odor.
you drive has an effect on how many kilo- while driving. This can cause needless Carbon monoxide is a dangerous gas.
meters you can get from a liter of fuel. wear, possible damage to the brakes • It can cause unconsciousness and can
To obtain maximum fuel economy from your and poor fuel economy. be lethal if inhaled.
car: • Always ensure your vehicle is maintained • If at any time you suspect that exhaust
• Start gradually and accelerate gently. to the manufacturer’s specification. gases are entering the vehicle, have the
• Avoid excessive and unnecessary vehicle inspected and repaired immedi-
idling. ately by a Ssangyong Dealer or
• Keep your engine properly tuned. Ssangyong Authorized Service
• Do not race the engine. Operation. If it is necessary to drive
• Use the air conditioning only when nec- under such conditions, do so only with
essary. all windows fully open.
• Slow down when driving on rough • To protect against exhaust gases enter-
roads. ing the vehicle, the exhaust system and
• Always keep your tyres inflated to the body should be inspected:
recommended pressure for longer tyre - each time the vehicle is raised for an
life and optimum fuel economy. oil change.
• Keep your distance from other vehicles - whenever a change is noticed in the
to avoid sudden stops. This will reduce sound of the exhaust system.
wear on brake linings and improve - whenever the exhaust system, under
economy as extra fuel is required to body or rear of the vehicle is damaged
accelerate back up to driving speed. or becomes corroded.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAZARDOUS DRIVING
• Do not operate the engine in confined ar- When hazardous driving is encountered
eas such as garages or other closed because of water, snow, ice, mud, sand or
areas any more than needed to move similar hazard, follow these suggestions.
the vehicle in or out of the area. • Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
• When the vehicle is stopped in an un- tance for braking.
confined area for more than a short time • Avoid sudden movements in braking or
with the engine running, place the air steering.
intake lever to the fresh air mode to • When braking depress the brake pedal
draw the outside air into the vehicle and with a light up-and-down motion until the
set the fan switch to high speed. vehicle is stopped.
• Never sit (or leave the children) in a • If stalled in snow, mud or sand, use 2nd
parked or stopped vehicle for any ex- gear for manual transmission or “WIN-
tended period of time with the engine TER” mode for automatic transmission
running. and accelerate slowly. Accelerate
• Avoid driving with tailgate open, as ex- slowly to avoid spinning.
haust gases could enter the vehicle. If • Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or
you must drive with the tailgate open, other nonslip material under the rear
close all windows, place the air intake wheels to provide traction when stalled
lever to the fresh air mode to draw the in ice snow or mud.
outside air into the vehicle, and set the
fan switch to high speed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

GETtheMANUALS.org
GASOLINE ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE*

(BLACK-FACE TYPE)
1. Speedometer 10. Defogger indicator 19. Tachometer

2. Auto shift indicator (A/T) 11. Low fuel level warning light 20. EBD waring light
3. Odometer/Trip odometer 12. Fuel gauge 21. SSPS warning light
4. Engine oil pressure warning light 13. Temperature gauge 22. Brake system warning light
5. Battery charge warning light 14. WINTER mode indicator (A/T) 23. ABS warning light
6. Seatbelt reminder 15. High beam indicator 24. Aigbag warning light
7. Engine CHECK indicator 16. Turn signal indicator (right) 25. Door open warning light
8. 4WD LOW indicator 17. Turn signal indicator (left) 26. Trip odo meter reset button/Rheostat button
9. 4WD CHECK indicator 18. ESP warning light 27. Cruise contor indicator

GETtheMANUALS.org
DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE*

(BLACK-FACE TYPE)
1. Speedometer 11. Glow indicator 20. Turn signal indicator (left)

2. Auto shift indicator (A/T) 12. Water separator warning light 21. ESP warning light*
3. Odometer/Trip odometer 13. Defogger indicator 22. Tachometer
4. Engine oil pressure warning lightt 14. Low fuel level warning light 23. EBD waring light
5. Battery charge warning light 15. Fuel gauge 24. SSPS warning light
6. Seatbelt reminder 16. Temperature gauge 25. Brake system warning light
7. Engine CHECK indicator 17. WINTER mode indicator (A/T) 26. ABS warning light
8. 4WD LOW indicator 18. High beam indicator 27. Aigbag warning light
9. 4WD HIGH indicator 19. Turn signal indicator (right) 28. Door open warning light
10. 4WD CHECK indicator 29. Trip odo meter reset button/Rheostat button

GETtheMANUALS.org
DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE

(GENERAL TYPE)
x1000r/min
1. Speedometer 10. 4WD LOW indicator* 20. EBD waring light

2. Auto shift indicator (A/T) 11. WINTER mode indicator (A/T) 21. ABS warning light*
3. Odometer/Trip odometert 12. 4WD HIGH indicator* 22. Aigbag warning light*
4. Glow indicator 13. Temperature gauge 23. Fuel gauge
5. Engine oil pressure warning light 14. Turn signal indicator (left) 24. Low fuel level warning light
6. Battery charge warning light 15. High beam indicator 25. Water separator warning light
7. Seatbelt reminder 16. Turn signal indicator (right) 26. Defogger indicator
8. Engine CHECK indicator 17. Brake system warning light 27. Door open warning light
9. 4WD CHECK indicator* 18. Tachometer 28. Trip odo meter reset button
19. ESP warning light*

GETtheMANUALS.org
INDIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE

(GENERAL TYPE)
x1000r/min
1. Speedometer 10. WINTER mode indicator (A/T) 19. ABS warning light*
2. Auto shift indicator (A/T) 11. 4WD HIGH indicator* 20. Aigbag warning light*
3. Odometer/Trip odometer 12. Temperature gauge 21. Fuel gauge
4. Glow indicator 13. Turn signal indicator (left) 22. Low fuel level warning light
5. Engine oil pressure warning light 14. High beam indicator 23. Defogger indicator
6. Battery charge warning light 15. Turn signal indicator (right) 24. Door open warning light
7. Seatbelt reminder 16. Brake system warning light 25. Trip odo meter reset button
8. 4WD CHECK indicator* 17. Tachometer
9. 4WD LOW indicator* 18. EBD waring light*

GETtheMANUALS.org
SPEEDOMETER ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER RHEOSTAT (BLACK-FACE TYPE)*

Black-Face Type Black-Face Type
The speedometer indicates the vehicle When the reset button located in the right Press and hold the Trip odo meter reset
speed in kilometers per hour (km/h) or mile and lower area of odometer is pressed button/Rheostat button to adjust the instru-
per hour (m/h). once, the first driving distance (TRIP A) will ment panel illumination. Release the button
be indicated and pressed again, the second when the illumination reaches the brightness
driving distance (TRIP B) will be indicated. you want.
When the button is pressed once more, to-
tal distance (ODO) will be indicated.
NOTE
If you press and hold the reset but-
ton for over 3 seconds in TRIP A or
TRIP B mode, the trip odo meter re-
sets to zero.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE FUEL GAUGE

General Type Black-Face Type Black-Face Type
General Type
Black-Face Type(Diesel) Black-Face Type(Gasoline)
The tachometer indicates engine speed in The temperature gauge indicates the tem- This gauge indicates the level of fuel remain-
revolutions per minute. perature of engine coolant when the ignition ing in the fuel tank. This gauge operates only
Multiply 1,000 to the current number, then it switch is in the “ON” position. when the ignition switch is in “ON” position.
will be the current number of engine revolu- • H : hot When the fuel is added, the gauge slowly
tions. • C : cool changes to the new fuel level after the igni-
Ideal engine idle speed tion is turned on. The needle moves when
CAUTION braking, accelerating or making turns. This
Diesel 700~800 rpm
The engine can overheat. is caused by the movement of the fuel in the
Gasoline 650~750 rpm tank.
• If the pointer reaches the red zone,
stop the vehicle. • F : Full
WARNING • Allow engine to cool. • E : Empty
Excessive speed can damage engine.
Do not let engine reach excessive NOTE
speed, indicated by pointer being in Fill up fuel tank before the needle
red zone. reaches “E”.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE BATTERY CHARGE WARNING

WARNING LIGHT LIGHT
CAUTION
Severe engine damage could result.
• Do not run the engine with the en-
gine oil pressure warning light il-
luminated.
• If oil level is normal, take vehicle
to Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
This warning light comes on when the igni- This warning light indicates that the battery
tion is switched on (as a check of bulb op- is being discharged.
eration) and should go out after the engine When the ignition is switched on, this warn-
is started. If the light comes on while driving, ing light comes on and should go out when
it indicates that the oil pressure is danger- the engine is started.
ously low. Stop the engine immediately and
check the engine oil level.
If the oil level is low, add the specified en-
gine oil to the proper level.
If the oil level is normal, have the lubricating
system checked at the nearest Ssangyong
Dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE CHECK INDICATOR

(DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL AND
SEAT BELT REMINDER GASOLINE ENGINE EQUIPPED)
If the light illuminates while driving,
• Pull off the road and stop your car.
• Check the alternator drive belt for loose-
ness or breakage.
• If the belt is OK, there is a problem some-
where in the charging system. The prob-
lem should be located and corrected as
soon as possible. Have the system
checked and repaired immediately by
your nearest Ssangyong Dealer.
CAUTION The seat belt warning light comes on when- It comes on when the ignition key is turned
ever the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” to ON and goes out if the engine is normal.
Do not continue driving if the belt is
position unless the driver’s seat belt is se- If the light stays ON, inspect your vehicle by
loose or broken.
curely fastened. Also the seat belt warning Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Engine can overheat, damaging
chime will sound for about 6 seconds when Service Operation.
engine.
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position
unless the driver’s seat belt is secured fas-
tened.
Attention should be paid to ensure that the
seat belts are fastened before driving off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER MODE INDICATOR

(FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
CAUTION Your vehicle was designed in compliance
with European On Board Diagnostic (EOBD)
Do not drive with the engine check
requirements which were specified by Eu-
indicator lamp on.
ropean Economic Community Directive.
The indicator lamp signals that your
The engine check indicator will illuminate if
vehicle has a problem that requires
a fault exists in the emission related compo-
attention.
nents or related sub systems.
Driving with the engine check indi-
It will stay on as long as the Engine Control
cator lamp on can damage the emis-
Unit (ECU) detects the fault.
sions control system and can affect
If a severe misfire is detected, fuel is cut
the fuel economy and drivability or
automatically to avoid catalytic converter
your vehicle. The indicator will come on when the Power
damage.
Consult a Ssangyong distributor or mode (P) switch near the gear selector le-
Your vehicle’s electronic system will switch
a Ssangyong Authorized Service ver is selected.
to an emergency running program so you
Operation to repair the problem as Use this mode if you need more power dur-
may continue to drive.
soon as possible. ing abrupt acceleration, driving on steep hills.
However, you should consult a Ssangyong
Distributor or Ssangyong Authorized Service At this time, gear shifting time delays than
Operation to repair the problem as soon as normal to get more traction power.
possible.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINTER MODE INDICATOR AUTO SHIFT INDICATOR

(FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION) (FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION) 4WD CHECK WARNING LIGHT
DI engine or gasoline engine equipped vehicle
The indicator will come on when the Winter The indicator comes on when the ignition These indicators come on when the ignition
mode (W) switch near the gear selector le- switch is ON and the indicator shows the switch is turned to ON and should go out if
ver is selected. automatic transmission selector lever the system is normal. If the “4WD LOW” and
Use this mode to drive off smoothly under position. “4WD HIGH” warning light come on or blink
icy and slippery road. (IDI Engine), or “4WD CHECK” warning light
stays on, have the 4WD system checked at
NOTE Ssangyong Dealer or Ssang Authorized
In winter mode, vehicle starts with Service Operation.
2nd gear so the power could be a
little bit reduced.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4WD HIGH INDICATOR

4WD LOW INDICATOR (FOR PART-TIME 4WD) DEFOGGER INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the 4WD LOW This indicator comes on when the 4WD HIGH The indicator comes on when the tailgate
mode is selected by pushing 4L switch. mode is selected by pushing 4H switch. glass defogger is switched “ON”.
Shift the driving mode from 2WD to 4WD It goes out after specified time.
CAUTION HIGH only when the vehicle speed is under
To shift ‘4L’ position, completely stop 70 km/h.
the vehicle and always depress the
clutch pedal, for manual transmission, NOTE
or position the selector lever to “N”, When shifting the driving mode from
for automatic transmission, and select 4WD LOW to 4WD HIGH, this indica-
the 4WD switch to ‘4L’. tor will blinks until the shift is
When the switch is selected and the completed. After completion of shift,
mode is shifting into 4L, the indica- the indicator stays on.
tor blinks for a moment. The indicator comes on without
blinking when shifting from 2WD to
4WD HIGH.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING GLOW INDICATOR

DOOR OPEN WARNING LIGHT LIGHT (FOR DIESEL ENGINE)
This light comes on when a door or tailgate This warning light indicates that the fuel will This indicator comes on when the ignition
is either opened or not closed completely. soon be exhausted. switch is turned on and stays on for a short
If you drive not closing the door, the warn- Fill up the fuel tank as soon as possible if time or may go off right away. The waiting
ing light blinks. this warning light comes on. time will vary according to the engine cool-
ant temperature. When the glow plugs are
WARNING CAUTION sufficiently heated for cold starting, the light
Driving with door open can cause in- Running out of fuel could causes will go out. Then, the engine should be
jury to people inside and outside the damage to the catalytic converter. started.
vehicle. Fill up fuel tank as soon as possible
• Before driving off, close all doors. when warning light comes on.
• Check warning light is off.
NOTE
During driving on steep hill or rough
roads, this warning light may come
on if the remaining fuel is low.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ESP WARNING LIGHT* SSPS WARNING LIGHT*

SSPS?*
In traditional constant power assist steering
system, the steerability gets lighter as ve-
hicle speed rises, and this may cause dan-
gerous situation.
SSPS, by providing appropriate steerability to
driver according to the changes of vehicle
speed, gives steering stability. In other words,
the steering wheel gets lighter by adjusting
steerability in stop or low speed and provides
If you press the ESP OFF switch, the ESP IThis warning light comes on when the SSPS steering stability by adjusting steering wheel
function stops and the indicator lamp in in- system is defective. When this warning light to become heavier in high speed.
strument panel comes on. comes on, the steerability becomes heavy.
Press this switch again to resume the ESP
function. At this time, the indicator lamp goes out. CAUTION
If the ESP function operates while driving, the If this light comes on, have the SSPS
indicator lamp flickers and the alarm sounds. system checked by Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service
CAUTION Operation.
If the ESP warning light comes on, the
ESP related system is defective. At
this moment, the ABS works in a
basic way. However, make sure to
check the vehicle at the nearest

GETtheMANUALS.org
EBD WARNING LIGHT* ABS WARNING LIGHT*

NOTE
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribu-
tion)?
When the brake pedal is applied, it
controls the braking pressure elec-
tronically to effectively distribute the
braking forces to the front wheels
and rear wheels. EBD operates when
the speed differences between the
most fast front wheel and the rear
When the ignition is switched on, this warn- wheel are over 1cm/h and if ABS is This warning light illuminates when the igni-
ing light comes on and should go out after 2 engaged, it does not operate. tion is switched on and should go out after
seconds. about 2 seconds.
If the EBD system is abnormal, the warning
If this light doesn’t come on when the igni-
light comes on and when the relative ABS
tion is switched on or if this light doesn’t go
system is also abnormal, it comes on with
out, contact your nearest Ssangyong Dealer
ABS warning light.
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
CAUTION
If this light illuminates while driving, a mal-
If this warning light fails to go out function of ABS is indicated. In this case the
or comes on, have the system brake system performs its regular function
checked and repaired immediately but without the anti-locking capability. Have
by your nearest Ssangyong Dealer. the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer
as soon as possible if this condition occurs.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT*

WARNING NOTE
If the brake system warning light and ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)?
ABS warning light illuminate at the When you brake abruptly or on the
same time while driving, it may in- slippery road, the vehicle keeps go-
dicate a failure in the base brake ing on ahead but the wheels are
system due to the malfunction of locking not to rotate. At this time,
ABS. your vehicle will not be steered or
• Stop the vehicle and consult your rotate and could be resulted in acci-
Ssangyong Dealer. dent. ABS controls the wheels prop-
• Have the system checked and re- erly not to be locked and allows
paired immediately before con- steering to increase the vehicle’s When the ignition is switched on, this warn-
tinuing your journey. stability. ing light illuminates and then should go out,
to confirm that the air bag is operational.
If it does not come on, or if it does not go
CAUTION out, or if it flashes or illuminates continuously
Even though your vehicle is equipped while driving, it means that there is malfunc-
with ABS, your vehicle may need tion in the system. The air bag system would
normal braking distances like con- therefore not be triggered in the event of an
ventional brake vehicles or could be accident. Have the air bag system checked
longer according to road conditions, without delay by a Ssangyong Dealer or
so keep the safety distance. Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
ABS is auxiliary system for safety.
Do not over rely on the system and
keep on safety driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT

Make sure the parking brake is fully released
CAUTION
before driving.
If this warning light comes on even when The brake system warning light may
the parking brake is completely released, it not come on with parking brake ap-
may indicate that the brake fluid in the res- plied and ignition on, indicating
ervoir is low. Then ; brake system fault.
1. Pull off the road and stop carefully. • Check for bulb failure.
2. Check the brake fluid and add the rec- • If bulb is working properly, have
ommended brake fluid up to the MAX brake system checked.
mark.
3. If the brake operates normally and you NOTE
This warning light comes on when the park- judge it to be safe, drive carefully at a Low brake fuel level may increase
ing brake is applied with the ignition on and safe speed to the nearest Ssangyong the stopping distance and require
goes out when the parking brake is released. Dealer for inspection immediately. greater pedal effort as well as
(But, if the parking brake is applied, this 4. If leaks are found, if the warning remains greater pedal travel.
warning light still remains on until the park- on, or if the brakes do not operate prop-
ing brake released.) erly, have the vehicle towed to nearest
Ssangyong Dealer for inspection and re-
pairs.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with the brake
fluid warning light on is dangerous.
Have the brake system checked and
repaired immediately by nearest
Ssangyong Dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD LASHER WATER SEPARATOR WARNING

INDICATOR HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHT (DIRECT INJECTION
DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED)
When the turn signal switch is turned on, This indicator illuminates when the headlight
this indicator flashes to indicate operation of high beam is switched on. When the water level inside water separa-
the external turn signal. tor in fuel filter exceeds a certain level, this
Shorter flashes indicate the failure of a turn warning light comes on and buzzer sounds.
signal lamp bulb. Also, the driving force of the vehicle
Both right and left lights flash when the decreases. If these conditions occur, imme-
hazard warning switch is turned on. diately drain the water from fuel filter.
For the draining procedures, please refr to
NOTE
“How to drain the water from fuel filter” on
If a bulb is burned out, replace it im- next page.
mediately to help avoid an accident. This warning light goes out when the drain-
If the indicating arrows don’t go on ing is completed.
at all when you signal a turn, check
the fuse and for burned-out bulbs.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO DRAIN THE WATER FROM FUEL FILTER

(DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
• Drain the water from fuel filter im-
Priming
mediately after the warning light
pump
comes on. If you cannot do that by
Fuel filter
yourself, visit nearest Ssangyong
Service Operation.
• For the draining procedures, Drain plug
please refer to “How to drain the
water from fuel filter” on next
page. After draining the water, 1. Locate the fuel filter in engine 5. Wait until a certain amount of fuel gets
press the primimg pump until it compartment. out from the port, then turn the drain
becomes rigid. 2. Place the water container under the fuel plug to “B” direction to tighten it.
filter.
3. Disconnect the connector under the drain
WARNING CAUTION
plug.
• The fuel system in engine may get 4. Turn the drain plug to “A” direction to • Be carefule not to be injured by
serious damage if you keep driv- drain the water. surrounding equipment during the
ing while the warning light is com- working procedures.
ing on. Prompt correction should
be necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR*

(FOR GASOLINE ENGINE)
6. Engage the connector under the drain This indicator illuminates when the cruise
plug and press the primimg pump until it control is switched on.
becomes rigid.
7. Close the engine hood and start the
engine.
WARNING
• If the priming pump is not prop-
erly operated, air may get into the
fuel line. It may cause starting
problem or fuel system problem.
Make sure to perform the job in
step 6.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MULTI-METER*
The multi-meter indicates the vehicle’s cur-

rent direction, atmospheric pressure and
altitude.
1. Barometer 6. Adjustment switch

2. Electronic compass 7. Down switch
3. Speed sensing indicator 8. Power switch
4. Relative altimeter 9. Up switch
5. Altimeter 10. Mode switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
Electronic Compass
NOTE
• You can turn to any direction, left
or right.
• When the calibration is completed,
the compass does not flash
anymore.
• If the compass continues to flash,
turn again slowly until it goes off.
1. It indicates 16-direction by intervals of Turning calibration

22.5° according to the vehicle’s driving 1. If you press the adjustment switch for
direction. 0.5~5 seconds, the current direction
• When the first equipped to the vehicle flashes.
or the battery is exchanged, you have 2. Turn the vehicle over 1 complete circle
to perform calibration by circulating your within 128 seconds slowly, then the
vehicle. If not, there will be misreading calibration will be accomplished.
in direction. 3. When the calibration is finished, the
vehicle’s new direction will be indicated.
NOTE
The direction will be indicated while
driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SPEED SENSING INDICATOR

CAUTION
• Warning for turning occurs if the
abnormal signals has been re-
ceived more than 5 minutes
continuously, however, it is not the
malfunction of the vehicle and re-
turns to normal condition if the ex-
ternal magnetic field becomes to
normal.
• The direction indicator may be de-
Release conditions for turning calibration layed when you drive on sharp The flashing interval of the road signs
• When the adjustment switch is pressed corner, however it is normal, not changes gradually according to the vehicle
over 0.6 second. malfunction. speed.
• When the vehicle is not turned within 128 • On the place where the terrestrial
Flashing intervals by speed ranges
seconds after calibration mode started. magnetism is dispersed, the com-
pass may not indicate the correct Speed range Flashing interval
Warning for turning direction, however, when you leave Less than 1.8km/h All “ON”
When the vehicle has been turned out of the the place, it returns to normal. Less than 40km/h per 1 second
specification due to external elements, direc- (Examples: in the tunnel, parking Less than 60km/h per 0.8 second
tion indicator flashes to inform you that there lot in a building, underground per 0.5 second
Less than 80km/h
are abnormal signals. parking lot, building complex, Less than 100km/h per 0.3 second
above the subway lines, near to - per 0.2 second
substation, under the power lines
of the electric railways, etc.)

GETtheMANUALS.org
BAROMETER ALTIMETER (ABSOLUTE ALTIMETER)

How to erase the calibrated altitude value
Press the UP and DOWN switches simulta-
neously for more than 1 second then the
calibrated altitude value will be erased and
the current altitude will be indicated after
showing –0000 for 2 seconds.
Altitude calibration ranges

The difference between minimum value and
maximum value is 3000m: the calibration is
available within the altitude range of –200 ~
It indicates the current atmospheric pressure It operates by atmospheric pressure. 0m +2800m.
up to 600 hpa~1100 hpa by 1 hpa. above the sea level is equivalent to 1013.25
hpa and the altimeter convert the difference
between this pressure and atmospheric
pressure to altitude and shows by every
20m. (however, if less than 20m, it indicates
as 0m)
How to calibrate the altitude
Switch Time to press Indication
Up “1” ON (less than 0.5 sec.) Increase by 20m
ON (more than 0.5 sec.) Automatic increase by 20m (per 0.2 sec.)
Down ON (less than 0.5 sec.) Decrease by 20m
“2” ON (more than 0.5 sec.) Automatic decrease by 20m (per 0.2 sec.)

GETtheMANUALS.org
RELATIVE ALTIMETER
Use this to see the specific area’s altitude; • To see the difference of the altitude • To see the destination’s altitude
it shows the specific area’s relative altitude Set the vehicle’s altitude to 0 by press- 1. Enter the altitude of the point where you
based on the current altitude of the vehicle. ing UP and DOWN switches simulta- know the altitude from the sea level.
neously over 1 second. read the in- 2. The indicated value on the destination is
Mode setting of the relative altimeter dicated altitude after arrival. the altitude from the sea level.
1. Press the MODE switch over 1 second.
X Indication type CAUTION
The altimeter operates by using
changes of atmospheric pressure.
So, sometimes, the indicated altitude
may different due to changing atmo-
spheric pressure in the same place,
however, it is normal, not
malfunctions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LIGHT SWITCH
Coming out order of the road signs CAUTION
• If the vehicle stops, the currently turned • Fog lamps will turn on according
off area of the signs will remain as it is. to lights switch positions when the
• If the vehicle drives off again, the next fog lamps switch is ON.
area from the turned off signs will start • Do not lay anything on the auto
to flash. light sensor located in passenger
side instrument panel. AUTO light
may operate incorrectly, if covered.
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob

on the end of the combination switch lever.
OFF position
All lights are off.
Position
Position, tail, license plate, fog and instru-
ment panel lights are illuminated.
Position
Headlight (low beam) and all the above lights
are illuminated.
AUTO Position (optional)

Turn on and off all lights automatically.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LIGHT SWITCH WARNING CHIME

AUTO Light CAUTION The chime sounds to remind you to turn off
the lights if the driver’sdoor is opened with
Headlamp and tail lamp will automatically • Do not place any objects blocking them switched on when the ignition key is
come on or off according to the ambient il- the sensor. Do not clean the sen- removed
lumination intensity when the light switch is sor with detergent or wax.
at “AUTO”. • In a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy
day, be sure to use manual mode.
Battery Saver (Automatically Turns Off
The turning on or off time of the
the Lights) lamps varies depending on the
To prevent the battery from discharging, the climate, season, or circumstances.
tail lamp will be go out automatically when • The sun proof coating that can af-
the driver get off (open and close the fect the illumination intensiry in-
driver's door) with the tail lamp ON. side the vehicle may cause the mal-
• You may turn the tail lamp on by posi- function of the lighting system.
tioning the ignition switch on or turning • Ssangyong recommends you to use
the light switch off then turn on again. this device restrictively in only a
sunrise or sunset. For the normal
operation of the lamps, turn on or
off manually.
• To prevent the battery from
discharging, do not leave the light
on while engine is off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HIGH BEAM SWITCH PASSING LIGHT SWITCH TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
To turn on the high beam headlights push the To flash the high beam, pull the lever to- Move this lever up to the stop position to
lever towards the instrument panel with the wards the steering wheel and release it. signal a right turn.
low beam headlights on. The lever will return to the normal position Move this lever down to the stop position to
The headlight high beam indicator light in the when released. signal a left turn.
instrument panel comes on when the head- The high beam headlights stay on as long When the turn is completed, the signal will
lights are on high beam. as you hold the lever. cancel and the lever will return to the nor-
For low beam headlights, pull the lever back mal position. When changing lanes, move the
towards the steering wheel to the normal switch part way and hold it there. When re-
position. leased, the switch will spring back to the
normal position.
NOTE
The light switch must already be in CAUTION
the position. Battery will discharge.
Do not leave the lights on while en-
gine is off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH* WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH

CAUTION
Wiper operation on dry windshield
can scratch glass and wear the
blades prematurely.
Do not operate wipers when wind-
shield is dry.
CAUTION
Wiper operation with obstructions,
With the low beam switched on, adjust the To operate the windshield wipers, move the such as snow, can damage wiper
aiming angle of headlights to suit the vehicle lever in 3 downwards steps with the igni- motor.
load. tion on. Clear obstruction before operating.
• To lower the aiming angle, push the OFF = Off

switch downward. AUTO = Operates automatically according to CAUTION
• To raise the aiming angle, push the the vehicle speed or amount of rain (rain Wiper blades can freeze to wind-
switch upward. sensor equipped vehicle) shield in cold weather.
LO = Continuous wipe, slow speed Wiper operation while the blades are
NOTE HI = Continuous wipe, fast speed frozen can damage the wiper motor.
According to load condition, adjust Check blades are not frozen to wind-
the aiming angle of headlights. shield before operating.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC WIPER CONTROL

SWITCH
AUTO Position Recognition Function CAUTION
• When you start the engine with the wiper • Auto position recognition, espe-
switch “AUTO” position, the wiper will cially in winter, may reduce the
operate once to remind you that the life span of the wiper blade. Make
wiper switch is in “AUTO” position. sure the wiper switch is at “OFF”
• When you move the wiper switch to position unless it rains.
“AUTO” from “OFF” position, the wiper • During winter time, the wiper blade
will operate once. can be frozen to windshield. Wiper
operation while blade is frozen can
CAUTION
damage wiper motor. Be sure to
The interval of wiper swings can be ad- If the wiper switch is at “AUTO” check the blade before operation.
justed by twisting the control knob upward position, place turn it to “OFF” po- • The wiper operation on dry wind-
or downward when the windshield wiper sition before stopping the engine. shield can scratch glass and wear the
switch is in AUTO position. blade prematurely. Do not operate
wiper when the windshield is dry.
F : Fast interval
• When you clean the windshield
S : Slow interval
over the sensor with damp cloth,
the wiper may operate suddenly. It
could cause serious injury. Make
sure to place the wiper switch and
ignition switch to “OFF” position
when not in use.
• Make sure to place the wiper
switch to “OFF” position before
wash-ing the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE WINDOW WIPER

WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH SWITCH
CAUTION
In freezing weather, washer fluid can
form ice on windshield, blocking for-
ward vision.
Warm windshield before operating
washer.
CAUTION
The washer motor can be overheated
To spray washer fluid on the windshield, pull and damaged. The tailgate window wiper and washer
the lever towards the steering wheel with • Do not operate the washer when switches are located on the instrument
the ignition on. washer fluid tank is empty. panel separately.
• Do not operate the washer con-
When you pull the lever for less than about tinuously for more than 10 To operate the tailgate window wiper, push
0.6 seconds, the washer fluid is sprayed seconds. the switch. To cancel the operation of the
onto the windshield, but the windows wip- window wiper, push the switch again.
ers are not operated.
When you pull the lever for more than about
0.6 second, the washer fluid is sprayed onto
the windshield while you pull the lever and
then the windshield wipers are operated for
several cycles. When you release the lever,
the wipers automatically returns to the rest
position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE WINDOW WASHER

SWITCH
CAUTION CAUTION
Replace the blade when it is worn or In cold weather, washer fluid can
when it no longer wipers properly, to form ice on rear window, blocking
avoid loss of vision when in use. your vision. Warm rear window be-
fore operating washer.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Tailgate window can be scratched or
Washer motor will be overheated and
wiper blade can be worn
damaged.
prematurely.
To spray the washer fluid, push the tailgate Do not operate the washer when
Do not operate the wiper when the
washer switch. washer fluid tank is empty or con-
window is dry.
When you press the switch for more than tinuously for more than 10 seconds.
about 0.6 second, the washer fluid is
sprayed onto the tailgate window and the
CAUTION
rear wiper is operated.
Wiper blades can freeze to rear win-
dow in cold weather.
zen can damage wiper motor.
Check that blade is not frozen before
operating.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH DIGITAL CLOCK
2. M : Minute Adjusting Button
To go forward one minute, press MIN
button once using a pointer, such as
button depressed.
3. S : Setting Button
To reset the time by the time signal, press
the SET button using a pointer, such as
To turn on the hazard warning flashers, When the ignition is on, the time is displayed For example, if this button is pressed
push the hazard warning flasher switch. All in the digital clock. while the time is between 8:00 and 8:29
turn signal lamps will flash simultaneously There are three adjusting buttons for the digi- the display is set to 8:00. If this button
with the hazard warning indicators. tal clock. is pressed while the time is between 8:
Push this switch again to turn them off. 30 and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.
The switch can be operated with the igni-
1. H : Hour Adjusting Button 8:00 ~ 8:29 → 8:00
tion on or off.
To go forward one hour, press H button 8:30 ~ 8:59 → 9:00
once using a pointer, such as ball-point
Use the hazard warning flasher to warn
pen, with the ignition on. NOTE
other drivers when you stop or park under
emergency conditions, or when your vehicle When disconnecting the battery or
button depressed.
becomes a traffic hazard. Avoid stopping on replacing the fuse, the clock should
the road if possible. be adjusted again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR

FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH* CONTROL SWITCH
To turn on the front fog lamp, push this To turn on the rear fog lamp, push this Adjust the outside rear view mirrors with the
switch while the light switch is placed in switch while the light switch is placed in adjusting switches so that you can see not
position. position. only each side of the road behind you but
also each side of your vehicle. This helps
Pushing this switch again will turn off the Pushing this switch again will turn off the
you determine the location of objects seen
rear fog lamps. rear fog lamps.
in the mirror.
Rear fog lamps can dazzle people behind.
CAUTION Use rear fog lamps in severe weather con-
You may adjust the outside rearview mirrors
Do not use the fog lamp as a substi- ditions.
up or down and left or right using the mirror
tute for the headlight. switch located on the driver's door panel.
The ignition switch must be ON to adjust the
mirrors.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1. Select the mirror as you want to adjust OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

CAUTION
by using the left/right switch located in- The outside rearview mirror on the
side the mirror adjustment pad, to the left All round vision can be impaired,
passenger’s side is convex if it says “OB-
for left mirror or to the right for right increasing potential for accidents.
JECTS IN MIRROR ARE CLOSER THAN
mirror. • Adjust mirror angles before
THEY APPEAR”. Use this mirror to get a
driving.
wider view of the road behind.
2. Adjust the selected mirror up, down, left, • Check glass surface for damage.
or right using the corresponding edges • Use deicer, spray or blower to re- WARNING
of the mirror adjustment pad. move ice.
Side convex mirrors make objects ap-
CAUTION pear smaller and farther away than
CAUTION when viewed in a flat mirror.
When the selection switch is in neu- • Use the inside mirror to determine
tral position, you can not adjust the Glass surface may be damaged.
the size and distance of objects
outside rearview mirrors. Do not scrape ice from mirror face.
seen in the side mirror.
• Maintain rearward vision from
CAUTION driver’s seating position.
Do not force mirror to adjust if ice
should restrict movement of mirror.
Use deicer, spray, or blower to re-
move ice.
CAUTION
Adjust mirror angles before driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FOLDABLE OUTSIDE REAR OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR & TAIL-
VIEW MIRROR FOLDING SWITCH* GATE GLASS DEFOGGER SWITCH
If necessary, the outside rearview mirror can To fold the outside rearview mirrors, press To demist or defrost the tailgate window or
be folded flat to the rear by pushing them the switch for more than 0.5 second. To side rear view mirror, push the defogger
rearward when driving on narrow roads or unfold the mirrors, press again. switch when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
washing the vehicle, etc.. position.
The defogger indicator in the cluster illumi-
nates when the defroster is operating.
Pushing it again will turn off the demister
operating.
If you operate this function again within 10
minutes after completion of first operation,
it will operate for about 6 minutes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL* Setting a Desired Speed

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of tailgate
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the defogger wires.
Do not clean inside of tailgate win-
dow with sharp instruments or win-
dow cleaners containing abrasives.
NOTE
In snowy condition, use this defog- Cruise control is an automatic speed control 1. To operate the cruise control, acceler-
ger switch only after removing any system that maintains a desired driving ate to your desired speed using the
snow from the tailgate window. speed without using the accelerator pedal. acceleration pedal more over 36km/h.
The vehicle speed must be greater than 36 2. When the desired speed is reached,
NOTE km/h to engage cruise control. This feature push up the ACCEL.SET. switch of a
The defogger uses a lot of power and is especially useful for motorway driving. cruise control lever or push down the
can discharge the battery. DECEL.SET. switch for 1 second per one
• Do not use the defogger when CAUTION switching and then release the accelera-
starting the vehicle or the engine Improper use of cruise control could tion pedal, slowly.
is not running. be dangerous. 3. Now, the vehicle is cruised by this sys-
• Switch off defogger when tailgate • Do not use on winding roads. tem with set speed.
window is clear. • Do not use in heavy traffic. 4. And you can set to other vehicle speed
• Do not use on slippery, wet roads. again with above steps after accelera-
This could result in a loss of control, tion pedal intervention during cruise con-
collision, and/or personal injuries. trol running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Accelerating with Cruise Control System Decelerating with Cruise Control System
• While cruise control system is running • Tap up while cruise control system is • While Cruise control system is running
running
1. Push up the ACCEL.SET. switch of a 1. Push down the DECEL.SET. Switch of a
cruise control lever and hold it until the 1. Push up the ACCEL.SET. switch of a cruise control lever and hold it until the
desired speed is reached without an cruise control lever less than 0.5 sec- desired speed is reached without a
acceleration pedal intervention. ond per one switching while the cruise brake pedal intervention. But the cruise
2. When the desired speed is reached, control system is running. This is a tap control system cannot maintain the
release the lever. up switching. cruise function at less than 34km/h.
2. When you operate a tap-up switching, 2. When the desired speed is reached,
• While cruise control system is not run-
the vehicle is accelerated for 1.3km/h release the lever.
ning
over the previous set speed.
• When Cruise control system is not run-
1. Accelerate using the acceleration pedal 3. If you want to accelerate for 13km/h, op-
ning
more over 36km/h. erate the tap-up switching ten times
2. Push up the ACCEL.SET switch of a without accelerating with cruise control 1. Push down the DECEL.SET. Switch of a
cruise control lever and hold it. system. cruise control lever and hold it.
3. And then release the acceleration pedal, 2. And then release the acceleration pedal,
slowly. slowly.
4. When the desired speed is reached, 3. When the desired speed is reached,
release the lever. release the lever. But the cruise control
system cannot maintain the cruise func-
tion at less than 34km/h.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Recovery of Set Speed Normal Cancellation of Cruise Control

• Tap down while cruise control system The cruise control system will be canceled
is running when one or more items of the following
conditions is applied;
1. Push down the DECEL.SET. Switch of a
cruise control lever less than 0.5 sec- 1. When the brake pedal is depressed.
ond per one switching while the cruise 2. When the cruising speed is downed less
control system is running. This is a tap than 34km/h.
down switching. 3. When the off switch is operated by
2. When you operate a tap-down switching, pulling rearward the cruise control lever.
the vehicle is decelerated for 1km/h be- 4. When ABD is activated.
low the previous set speed.
And the cruise control system can be oper-
3. If you want to decelerate for 10km/h, op- Even if the cruise control is canceled, the
ated again in driving state.
erate the tap-down switching ten times previous set cruise speed can be recovered
without brake pedal intervention. by pushing toward the RSM(resume) switch CAUTION
of a cruise control lever when the current
Keep the main cruise control switch
vehicle speed is higher than 36km/h without
as neutral position when not using
acceleration intervention. But if you turn off
the cruise control.
the ignition switch, the memorized set speed
is cleared and you cannot recover the pre-
vious set speed.
CAUTION
The resume position should only be
used if the driver is fully aware of
this speed and wishes to resume this
particular speed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Abnormal Cancellation of Cruise Control Using Cruise Control on Hills

1. When the rapid deceleration is applied How well cruise control works on hills de-
CAUTION
without braking. pends on the speed, load, and the steep-
2. When the rapid acceleration is applied • The speed that has been set may ness of the hill.
without acceleration pedal intervention. not be maintained on uphill or
downhill slopes. When going up steep hills, you may have to
3. When the cruise control lever is failed.
• The speed may drop to less than press the accelerator pedal to maintain your
4. When the brake switch and brake light
the set speed on a steep uphill speed. When going downhill, you may have
switch input signal is unplausible.
grade. The accelerator must be to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your
And the cruise control system cannot be used if you want to maintain that speed down.
operated again in driving state. In this case, speed. Applying the brake takes you out of cruise
you should stop the vehicle, and turn off the • The speed may increase to more control.
ignition switch and then turn it on again. than the set speed on a steep down-
After you do that, you can use the cruise hill grade. When the speed in-
control system again. But if the cruise con- creases too much, turn off the
trol system isn’t recovered, you should con- cruise control.
tact Ssangyong Dealer for diagnosis of the
cruise control system.
CAUTION
Abnormal changes of the selector
lever can damage the engine.
Do not move the shift lever to Neu-
ral while driving at the set speed.
Automatic transmission damage
may result.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT POSITION MEMORY

SETTING AND OPERATION*
Storing Memory Settings Operating Memory Settings
1. Place the selector lever in “P” position 1. Place the selector lever in “P” position
(Automatic transmission) or apply the (Automatic transmission) or apply the
parking brake with the ignition switch parking brake with the ignition switch
“ON”. “ON”.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rear- 2. Keep the position button pushed (for
view mirrors. more than 1.5 second) until driver’s seat
3. Press the “SET” button. Indicating light and outside rearview mirrors start to
on the button will come on and beep move.
sounds. 3. If you press the button driver’s seat
4. Within five seconds, press button you outside rearview mirrors will be recalled
1. “SET” Switch
want among 1,2 or 3 of the position automatically to the memory positions.
2. “STOP” Switch buttons. Adjusted positions will be stored
in the computer with “Beep”. sound. CAUTION
3. Position Switch
• To recall the memory positions,
Up to 3 different drivers, the memory set- CAUTION press the position button for more
ting of seat position is available. Each driver • Never operate the driver’s seat and than 1.5 second.
can set his/her own driver’s seat and out- outside rearview mirror switch • If you press “STOP” button or op-
side rearview mirrors positions and it will be during memory settings, or erate only one switch among the
stored in the computer. Even if someone memory setting will be cancelled. switches in order to adjust the
have moved your seat and outside rearview • If you do not press the position driver’s seat outside rearview mir-
mirrors, the memory positions will be recalled button within 5 seconds after rors, recalling of the memory po-
automatically by pressing the position button. pressing the “SET” button, memory sitions will be stopped.
setting will be cancelled.
• Memory settings are possible up to
3 different drivers.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT CIGARETTE LIGHTER

WARNING CAUTION
• Never adjust the seat and side rear The lighter can be overheated and
veiw mirror positions while the ve- this can cause a fire hazard.
hicle is moving. • Do not hold the lighter pressed in
• Set and operate the seat and side by hand while heating.
rear view mirror position memory • If the lighter does not pop out
function only when the vehicle is within 30 seconds, pull it out and
stationary. have the problem corrected by
Ssangyong Dealer.
To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in

NOTE
all the way when the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position. Use of the lighter socket for plug-in
When it becomes heated, it automatically accessories can cause damage or
pops out ready for use. electrical damage.
CAUTION
during use and can cause burns.
• Do not touch barrel of lighter.
• Do not allow children to operate

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR CIGARETTE LIGHTER TILTABLE STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION
within 30 seconds, pull it out and
have the problem corrected by
Ssangyong Dealer.
To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in The steering wheel can be adjusted up or
NOTE
all the way when the ignition switch is in down to the desired position. To adjust the
the “ACC” or “ON” position. Use of the lighter socket for plug-in steering wheel, push the control lever to
When it becomes heated, it automatically accessories can cause damage or right, adjust the wheel up or down to the
pops out ready for use. electrical damage. proper position, release the control lever to
lock the wheel in place.
CAUTION
WARNING
during use and can cause burns. Control of vehicle can be lost.
• Do not touch barrel of lighter. Do not adjust steering wheel position
• Do not allow children to operate while vehicle is moving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC DIMMING INSIDE

INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR REARVIEW MIRROR*
CAUTION
Maintain rearward vision from
driver’s seating position.
• Select day position and adjust to
obtain best view.
• Select night position to reduce
night glare.
• Selecting night position may re-
duce rearward clarity.
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted At night, when the glare is too high, the mir-
up, down or side ways to obtain the best NOTE ror automatically responds to variations in
view. The inside mirror has day and night Remember that you lose some rear- light, changing from no antiglare to antiglare
positions. view clarity in the night position. as required. The sensor under the mirror
Make adjustment while the adjusting lever automatically detect the glare from head-
is in the daytime position. lights behind you and reduce the glare.
Move the adjusting lever to the night posi-
tion to reduce glare from the headlights of NOTE
vehicles behind you. When the vehicle is reversing, auto-
matic dimming function will be can-
celed to provide you clear view.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HORN SWITCH SEAT WARMER SWITCH* FRONT ROOM LAMP
To sound the horn, press the center of the Warm your seat in the cold weather for your 1. ROOM Position
steering wheel (without driver’s air bag), or comfortable driving. The left lamp comes on if you depress this
far right or left of the steering wheel(with Press the button to warm the seat, and switch. To turn off the light, press the switch
driver’s air bag). press it again to stop the operation. again.
The horn sounds with the ignition switch in
2. DOOR Position
any position.
The lamps come on when either of the
Keep use of the horn to a minimum.
doors is opened. When the DOOR switch is
on, it begins to dim for several seconds af-
ter closing the door.
3. ROOM Position
The right lamp comes on if you depress this
switch. To turn off the light, press the switch
again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR ROOM/LUGGAGE ROOM

LAMP COURTESY LIGHT GLOVE BOX
1. OFF Position The courtesy light is located on the driver’s Open the glove box by pulling the release
The lamps will not come on if you place the and passenger’s door to illuminate the space lever and the indicator lamp comes on for
switch in this position. around the feet. your usage at night when the ignition switch
The courtesy light turns on when the door is in the ACC or ON position.
2. DOOR Position
is opened regardless of the ignition switch Close it with a firm push.
The lamps come on when either of the
position.
doors and tailgate is opened. WARNING
3. ROOM Position Driving with glove box lid open can
The lamps come on if you place the switch cause injury in case of an accident
in this position. or a sudden stop.
Keep glove box lid closed when driv-
ing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT CUP HOLDER REAR CUP HOLDER REAR CONSOLE BOX
W R
N
Use this for holding cups or beverage cans. Use this for holding cups or beverage cans. Insert your finger into the cover hole and pull
If you press the front of the cover, the cup If you press and pull the knob located in the out the console box to store some goods.
holder comes out. upper area of the cover, the cover opens.
Press the cup holder until you hear a click- Then, pull out the cup holder to use.
ing sound when you close it. Press the cup holder until you hear a click-
ing sound when you close it.
CAUTION
When vehicle is in motion, the liquid CAUTION
may spill out. When vehicle is in motion, the liquid
Spilled liquid can damage the ve- may spill out.
hicle and cause burns if it is hot. Spilled liquid can damage the ve-
Do not use cup holder while vehicle hicle and cause burns if it is hot.
is in motion. Do not use cup holder while vehicle
is in motion.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LUGGAGE COVER
CENTER ARMREST CONSOLE SUN VISORS (EXCEPT FOR 7-SEATER)
You can use it as an armrest or a console To block out glare, the main sunvisor and When Unrolling the Luggage Cover
box to store some goods. auxiliary sunvisor can be swung down or Pull the handle of the luggage cover at the
to the left (right), if necessary. center, and fix it into the grooves at left and
Automatic transmission(two levers) The vanity mirror and illumination are pro- right sides of quarter trim inner panels.
Pull the right side lever to open the upper vided to the rear face of the sunvisors.
auxiliary console box. When Rolling the Luggage Cover
Pull the left side lever to open the console CAUTION Take the luggage cover out of the grooves
box. Do not place the sunvisor in such a by pulling the handle and let go the grasp
manner that it obscures visibility of slightly to roll the luggage cover.
Manual transmission(one lever)
the roadway, traffic or other objects.
Pull the lever to open the console box. When Removing the Luggage Cover
After tearing off the edge of luggage cover
at the back of rear seat, remove the luggage
cover assembly by raising up it from the fix-
ing holder’s grooves.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OVERHEAD CONSOLE STORAGE BOX (FOR 7-SEATER)

NOTE
Store the luggage cover separately
to use the luggage room of the ve-
hicle wide.
CAUTION
Don’t put anything on the luggage
cover.
Press the upper portion of the cover to open Flip the lever from each side and lift up the
the console and hold the sunglasses onto cover.
the hook.
CAUTION
Glasses may be damaged, fix it
firmly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ASSIST GRIP
WARNING
Do not hang anything on the assist
grips, unless they are equipped with
a coat hook.
Hanging items on your vehicle’s as-
sist grips can obstruct the driver’s
view.
Obstructing the driver’s view can
lead to an accident resulting in per-
sonal injuries and damage to your
You can store fire extinguisher or other Your vehicle has assist grips above the vehicle or other property.
goods into the storage box in luggage room. front seat passenger’s door and the rear
There is separate tool box under the sec- doors.
ond seat of driver’s side to store lever for The grips above the rear doors includes a
spare tyre removal and other tools. coat hook.
Passengers can use the grips for assistance
in entering/exiting the vehicle, or for hand
holds during spirited driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT ELECTRIC SOCKET REAR ELECTRIC SOCKET

CAUTION
a fire hazard.
There is an auxiliary power outlet in the front There is an auxiliary power outlet in the rear
(left side) of the passenger’s seat for the (right side) of the passenger’s seat for the
extra electrical devices. extra electrical devices.
This power outlet supplies power when the This power outlet supplies power when the
ignition key is in “ACC” or “ON” position. ignition key is in “ACC” or “ON” position.
WARNING WARNING
• For the extra electrical devices, • For the extra electrical devices,
you must use power outlet. If you you must use power outlet. If you
alter vehicle’s wiring lines freely, alter vehicle’s wiring lines freely,
there could be accidents like fire. there could be accidents like fire.
• Abide by the nominal capacity of • Abide by the nominal capacity of
120W. 120W.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTION
a fire hazard.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4
SEAT AND RESTRAINT

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT SEAT BACK RECLINING FRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTMENT

ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL SEAT) (MANUAL SEAT)
WARNING
Do not adjust seat back when vehicle
is moving.
WARNING
Occupants can slide under seat belts.
• Do not recline seat back too much.
• To get maximum protection, adjust
To change the seat back angle, lean for- seat back as upright as you can. To move the seat forward or backward, pull
ward slightly and raise the lever. Then lean and hold the seat slide lever up and move
back to the desired angle and release the the seat as required. Then, release the le-
lever. After adjusting, make sure the lever ver in desired position.
is returned to its original position; otherwise,
the seat back could unlatch while the ve-
hicle is in motion, causing the drive to lose
control of the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK RECLINING

ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL SEAT) ADJUSTMENT (POWER SEAT)*
WARNING
Do not adjust driver’s seat while ve-
hicle is moving.
WARNING
Excessive seat belt slack could re-
duce effectiveness of seat belts.
Adjust front seat before fastening
seat belt. Rotate the front knob (1) forwards to lower To adjust backrest angle, move the switch
the front seat cushion and rotate rearwards in the direction of the arrows.
to raise the front seat cushion. Press the top of the switch forward to move
WARNING Rotate the rear knob (2) forwards to lower the backrest forward and press the top of
Loose objects can interfere with seat- the rear seat cushion and rotate rearwards the switch backward to move the backrest
slide mechanism. to raise the rear seat cushion. backward.
Do not place objects under seat. When the front and rear knobs are rotated
forwards completely, the seat cushion will WARNING
be lowered, and when rotated rearwards Occupants can slide under seat belts.
completely, the seat cushion will be raised. • Do not recline seat back too much.
Perform this adjustment while seating on the • To get maximum protection, adjust
seat. seat back as upright as you can.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT SEAT SLIDE DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT DRIVER’S SEAT TILT

ADJUSTMENT (POWER SEAT)* ADJUSTMENT (POWER SEAT)* ADJUSTMENT (POWER SEAT)*
To move the seat forwards or backwards To adjust the driver’s seat height, move the To adjust the front and/or rear portion of the
electrically, slide the control lever forwards control lever upwards or downwards. Raise cushion respectively, move the front and/or
or backwards. or lower the seat electrically as required by rear of the control lever upwards or down-
Then, slide the seat electrically to the de- seating on the driver’s seat (applying load). wards separately.
sired position and release the control lever.
1. Up : Front portion of the seat cushion
2. Down : Front portion of the seat cushion
3. Up : Rear portion of the seat cushion
4. Down : Rear portion of the seat cushion

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT SEAT WARMER CAUTIONS IN THE POWER

(POWER SEAT)* SEAT OPERATION
CAUTION CAUTION
• Control of vehicle can be lost. Loose objects can interfere with seat-
• Do not adjust driver’s seat while slide mechanism.
vehicle is moving. • Do not place objects under seat.
• Excessive switch operation could • Do not attempt multi-operation in
cause battery discharge. your seat at a time, or it can dam-
• Operate the electric seat while the age your motor.
engine is running. Please operate the seats in order
• Avoid the multi-operation of the one after another.
driver’s seat, it can damage the
By operating the seat warmer switch, you motor. Be sure to operate the elec-
tric seat in order. CAUTION
can warm the seat cushion and seat back.
Press the switch to warm the seat and • Power seats will be operated even You may get burnt.
press again to stop the seat warming. Dur- when the ignition switch is turned • Do not use the seat heater for a
ing warming, the indicator light on the switch to the “OFF” position, however to long time if you are wearing a thin
comes on. prevent the battery discharge, op- skirt or trousers.
erate your seats when the engine
is running.
• When the battery voltage is low, CAUTION
the seat heater may not in opera- Heating wires can be damaged.
tion. • Do not subject the front seats to
heavy impacts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBAR FRONT SEAT BACK STORAGE PASSENGER’S SEAT SIDE
SUPPORT POCKET STORAGE POCKET
To adjust driver’s lumber support, move the The front seat back storage pocket is pro- The passenger’s seat has side storage
lever until the desired angle is achieved. vided to store small items. pocket for storing small items.
Move the lever downward to increase the
amount of lumber support.
To decrease it, raise the lever progressively
through the other position.
1. Original position
2. Stage 1
3. Stage 2

GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT UNDER TRAY*

(FOR PASSENGER’S SEAT) FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS
2 While pushing the release button
sleeve.
WARNING
The seat under tray is located under the Head restraints are designed to help reduce collision.
passenger’s seat. Hold the front of the tray the risk of neck injuries.
and pull forwards to use. Push rearwards For maximum protection, slide the head re-
to return to original position. straint up or down so the top of the WARNING
restraint is level with the top of your ears. Make sure that the head restraint
To lower the front head restraint, press the are in place and adjusted before
release button on top of seatback and push driving.
it down.
To raise the front head restraint, pull it up
without pressing the release button.
Hold the head restraint and move it forward
or backward to adjust its inclination. To re-
turn it to original position, pull it fully and re-
lease.*

GETtheMANUALS.org
RECLINING REAR SEAT BACK REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

(SECOND SEAT) (SECOND SEAT)
sleeve while pushing the release button.
WARNING
collision.
The rear seat backs can be reclined sepa- Head restraints are designed to help reduce
rately for the comfortable driving of passen- the risk of neck injuries.
gers. For maximum protection, slide the head re- WARNING
Pull up the adjustment levers and recline straint up or down so the top of the Make sure that the head restraint
the seat back to the desired position. restraint is level with the top of your ears. are in place and adjusted before
Then, release the adjustment lever to lock To lower the head restraint, press the re- driving.
the seat back into position. lease button on top of seatback and push it
down.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up without
pressing the release button.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER ARMREST FOLDING SECOND SEAT

(SECOND SEAT) (FROM REAR SIDE)
WARNING
WARNING
The center armrest can be folded down for 1. Adjust the head restraint height to the To help avoid injuries, make sure
use when there are only 1 or 2 rear seat lowest position. your hand and any other body parts,
passengers. 2. Press the left and right seat back lever as well as those of other persons, are
to fold the seat back forwards. completely away from the rear seat
compartment when folding the rear
seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
UNFOLDING SECOND SEAT

(FROM REAR SIDE)
3. Pull up the lever from under the left and 4. Completely contact the seat to the front 1. Unhook the strap and put into the bot-
right seat to release the lock and fold the seats and take out the strap from the tom box.
seat forward. bottom box and fasten the seat safely. 2. Lock the seat to the floor (make sure of
The strap should be hooked to the pole the locking-if not locked, the seat may
WARNING of front seat head restraint. fall over during driving).
• After folding the seat back, press 3. Unfold the seat back while pressing the
the upper portion of the seat to lever.
lock and then lift it up. When the
seat is lifted up without locking, CAUTION
there could be interventions be- When unfolding the seat to its origi-
Push
tween rear console box cover nal position, be careful not to cause
to lock
handle and seat to be damaged. injuries on knees or feet to whom
• Before lifting up the seat, make seating on the third seat.
sure that the rear console box
cover is closed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FOLDING SECOND SEAT

(FROM OUTSIDE)
WARNING
WARNING
1. Adjust the head restraint height to the To help avoid injuries, make sure 3. Pull up the lever from under the left and
lowest position. your hand and any other body parts, right seat to release the lock and fold the
2. Pull up the left and right seat back lever as well as those of other persons, are seat.
to fold the seat back and press firmly to completely away from the rear seat
lock. compartment when folding the rear WARNING
seat. When folding the seat back, hold the

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS IN SECOND SEAT

FOLDING OPERATION
WARNING
• Do not stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the front seats.
• Do not allow passengers to sit on
the folded seatbacks while the ve-
hicle is in motion.
• Unrestrained luggage or passen-
gers on a folded seatback can be
thrown about within or ejected
from the vehicle in a sudden stop
4. Completely contact the seat to the front or accident.
seats and take out the strap from the CAUTION • Serious injuries or death can be
bottom box and fasten the seat safely. When unfolding the seat to its origi- resulted from them.
The strap should be hooked to the pole nal position, be careful not to cause • Ensure that the rear seatbacks and
of front seat head restraint. injuries on knees or feet to whom rear seat cushion are locked in po-
seating on the third seat. sition before operating the vehicle
with passengers in the back seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FOLDING THIRD SEAT

THIRD SEAT* (7-SEATERS) (MAKING A LUGGAGE ROOM)
The third seat in the 7-seater model is for 2
persons and you can make luggage room as
in the 5-seater model by removing the head
restraints and folding the seat.
Cautions in using the third seat
• When the third seat is occupied by pas-
sengers, lock the tailgate. And check that
the tailgate is closed correctly before
driving.
• Keep the tailgate locked during driving
and never operate the inner handle. 1. Lower the headrests in third seat to its 3. Release the seat rear protector and fold
• Avoid riding elder people or children to end. forward.
the third seat and if you have to, be care- 2. Pull up the seat back folding ring (1) lo-
ful not to open the tailgate and take nec- cated on the top of the seat and fold the
essary safety measures. seat back forward completely.
• When seating on the third seat, fasten
the seatbelt.
WARNING
The third row seat for 2 persons
should be restricted by 50kg per per-
son.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FULL FLATTING THE SEAT SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

To protect you and your passengers in the
event of an accident, it is compulsory that
the seat belts are worn by all occupants
while the vehicle is in use. Seat belts should
be worn correctly.
Each seat belt is designed to be used by
only one person at a time : they are not
suitable for use by children below 6 years
of age. Suitable child seats/booster cush-
ions should be fitted.
1. Fold the third seat (refer to FOLDING 5. Fold the seat back protector.
THIRD SEAT). WARNING
2. Push the seat back lever (1) to fold the CAUTION Occupants could be injured seri-
second seat. To take a rest after making a bed, ously in collisions or sudden maneu-
3. Press the second seat back to lock it. stop the vehicle to the safe place and vers.
4. Release the locking (2) device for seat block the wheels. • Wear seat belts at all times when
back protector in second seat. driving or riding.
• Never use a belt for more than one
person at a time.
• Do not wear seat belt over hard or
breakable objects in pockets or on
clothing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING WARNING CAUTION

• Seatbelts are designed to bear • It is essential to replace the entire Improper use of seat belt can cause
upon the bony structure of the assembly after it has been worn in more serious injury.
body and should be worn low a severe impact even if damage to • Do not modify the seat belt.
across the front of the pelvis or the the assembly is not obvious. • Do not add adjusting device which
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as ap- Belts should not be worn with restrict removing slack.
plicable; wearing the lap section straps twisted.
of the belt across the abdominal • “EACH BELT ASSEMBLY MUST
area must be avoided. ONLY BE USED BY ONE OCCUPANT; CAUTION
• Seatbelts should be adjusted as it is dangerous to put a belt around Damaged seat belts can cause more
firmly as possible, consistent with a child being carried on the serious injury.
comfort, to provide the protection occupant’s lap.” • Repair or replace damaged seat
for which they have been designed. • No modifications or additions belts immediately.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the should be made by the user which • Never let the seat belt system be-
protection afforded to the wearer. will either prevent the seat belt come damaged by a door or seat.
• Care should be taken to avoid adjusting devices from operating
contamination of the webbing with to remove slack, or prevent the
polishes, oils and chemicals, and seat belt assembly from being ad-
particularly battery acid. Clean- justed to remove slack.
ing may safely be carried out us-
ing mild soap and water. The belt
should be replaced if webbing be-
comes frayed, contaminated or
damaged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN USING THE SEAT BELTS CARE OF SEAT BELTS

To help reduce the risk of personal injury in WARNING Always keep the seat belts clean and dry.
collisions or sudden maneuvers, use the Care should be taken to avoid contamination
High-positioned lap belts and loose
seat belts following these instructions on of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemi-
their proper use maintenance, and use with
fitting shoulder belts both could in- cals, and particularly battery acid.
child restraint systems.
crease the chance of injury or death Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild
due to sliding under the lap belt
soap and water.
WARNING during an accident. Do not bleach or dye belts since this may
Improperly worn seat belts could severely weaken them. Make sure that the
cause serious injury or death. CAUTION belt is not damaged or trapped by sharp
• Adjust the seat belt as firmly as edged objects.
Improper use of seat belt causes
possible. Periodically inspect all parts of the belts and
more serious injury.
• Place the seat back upright posi- have damaged parts replaced. A belt which
• Buckle release button should face
tion as you can. has been overstretched in an accident must
outward.
• Do not recline the seat back when be replaced by a new one.
• Insert seat belt buckle into proper
vehicle is moving. Ssangyong recommends replacing all com-
buckle catch.
• Never wear the seat belt with straps ponent parts of the seat belts in use during
• Do not put anything into the open-
twisted. a collision. No replacement is required after
ing where seat belt passes through
• Never wear the shoulder belt un- a minor collision if a Ssangyong Dealer or
the trim panel.
der your arm. Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation
• Shoulder belt should be positioned finds that no damage has occurred and
midway over the shoulder (never NOTE
judges everything to be in proper working
across neck). order.
• Lap belt should be fitted snugly If the belt locks when being pulled Seat belts and components that were not in
around the hips, not the waist. out, rewind it completely in the use during the collision must also be in-
• 3-point seat belt is designed for the retractor, then pull it out to the de- spected and replaced if they show signs of
person whose height is over 140 cm. sired length. damage or faulty operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PREGNANT WOMEN CHILD RESTRAINTS

CAUTION
Damaged seat belts can cause more
serious injury.
• Inspect seat belt assemblies
periodically.
• Inspect seat belts and other con-
stituent part after every collision.
• Replace seat belts if webbing be-
come frayed, contaminated or
damaged in any way.
• Replace the entire seat belt assem- It is recommended that pregnant women use Anchorage Locations
bly after severe impact even if the seat belts. Contact your doctor for specific Child restraint anchor fittings have been in-
damage is not obvious. recommendations. stalled to coincide with the rear seating po-
sitions as follows.
WARNING
CAUTION Pregnant women and unborn child WARNING
Improper seat belt could cause more could be injured. Unrestrained infants and small chil-
serious injuries. • Use a lap-shoulder seat belt if pos- dren could be injured.
sible (Consult your doctor). • Never transport them unless they
Do not modify seat belts.
• Lap belt should be worn as low as are properly restrained.
possible throughout the pregnancy. • Use restraint system which meet
safety standard.
• Follow directions provided by the
manufacturer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yyyy
;;;;
Secure the child in the restraint in accor-
NOTE
dance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Use the child restraint anchorage If you have any queries regarding the instal-
for designed purpose only.
lation of a child restraint, consult a
;;;;
yyyy
Ssangyong Dealer.
NOTE
WARNING
• Front seat (with Passenger Air Bag)
“It is possible to the forward facing Child restraint system placed in the
universal category child seat.” front seat could cause more serious
• Front seat (with Passenger Air Bag) injury or death
“It is possible install the forward Child Restraint Installation • NEVER INSTALL A REAR-FACING
and rearward facing univesal cat- Your vehicle has been designed to accom- CHILD RESTRAINT IN FRONT SEAT
egory child seat.” WITH FRONT PASSENGER AIR
modate a child restraint on the rear seat.
• Rear seat (3 points s/belt) BAG.
“It is possible to install the for- When using a child restraint, read the instal-
lation instructions supplied with the child A child in a rear-facing child re-
ward and rearward facing univesal straint installed in the front seat
category child seat.” restraint and follow the directions for fitment
carefully. can be seriously injured if the
• Rear seat (2 points s/belt)
“It is possible to install the for- When installing the child restraint, use the front passenger air bag inflates.
ward facing universal category correct anchor bolt (5/16" bolt). Secure a rear-facing child re-
child seat.” The anchor bolt must be engaged at least 5 straint in the rear seat.
full threads in the anchorage. A front-facing child restraint
The child restraint system should be se- should be secured in the rear seat
cured in conjunction with the vehicle's seat whenever possible. If installed in
belt. After installation, push and pull the child the front passenger seat, adjust
restraint to be sure it is secure. the seat as far back as it will go.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING CAUTION Child restraint attaching clip

Loosely secured child restraint sys- Exhaust gases could enter the vehicle
tem can cause serious injury. interior.
• Tighten anchor bolt firmly. Cover the unused anchor holes with
• Anchor bolt must be engaged at the supplied plug or suitable bolts.
least 5 full threads in the anchor-
age.
• Adjust restraint system as firmly NOTE
as possible. Since a safety belt or child restraint
• Never use infant carrier or child system can become very hot if it is
safety seat that hooks over a seat left in a closed vehicle, be sure and Installation of the attaching clip
back. check the seat cover and buckles Positive engagement of the child restraint
before placing a child there. attaching clip is achieved by depressing
retainer spring and then opening of the an-
CAUTION
chor fitting as shown in the illustration.
Unused child restraint system could
move forward.
Remove child restraint system if not
in use, or secure it with safety belt.
CAUTION
Exhaust gases could enter the vehicle
interior.
Cover the unused anchor holes with
the supplied plug or suitable bolts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yyy
;;;
Example (in driving position) WARNING WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de- • When installing a child restraint
signed to withstand only those loads system, follow the instructions pro-
imposed by correctly fitted child re- vided by the manufacturer.
straints. • When not in use, keep your child re-
Under no circumstances are they to straint system secured with a seat
be used for adult seat belts or har- belt or remove it from the vehicle.
nesses or for attaching other items • Do not hold a child while riding
or equipment to the vehicle. in a vehicle.
• Never let a child stand or kneel on
Method of installation of anchor engagement any seat.
1. Child restraint anchor fitting • Do not allow a child in the cargo
2. Attachment bolt areas while the vehicle is moving.
3. Lock washer • Children who have outgrown child
A 5/16"-UNC-2B-bolt with a thread length of restraint systems should sit in the
30 mm is used to attach the anchor fittings rear seat and be restrained with
to the vehicle anchorage. the seat belt.
If child’s seating position has a
For fitting advice, please contact your au- shoulder belt which is on or very
thorized Ssangyong dealer. close to the face or neck, move the
child close to the center of the ve-
hicle, slightly inboard of the
shoulder belt, or move the child to
a position without a shoulder belt
if possible.

GETtheMANUALS.org
THREE POINT SEAT BELT Using the Belt

Each Ssangyong vehicle is equipped with
three point seat belts with automatic retrac-
tors, allowing freedom of body movement
when driving at even, constant speeds, al-
though the spring-tensional belts are always
fitted snugly.
The belt has a “vehicle sensitive retractor” S
ES
which is designed to lock during heavy ac-

PR
celeration or deceleration.
Do not attempt to test the locking device by
Pull the belt evenly out of the retractor and To remove the belt, depress the red push-
intentionally “shooting” your upper torso in
guide it across the body, making certain that button on the buckle. The belt will retract
the forward direction.
it is not twisted. automatically.
This type of belt requires no length Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle.
adjustment. Once worn, the belt adjusts it- WARNING
Make sure the latch plate is securely fas-
self to the movement of wearer, but in the Improper use of seat belts could
tened in the buckle by pulling it.
event of a sudden or strong shock, the belt cause injuries.
automatically locks to restrain the wearer’s NOTE • Do not wear the shoulder portion
body. of seat belt under the arm.
If the belt locks when being pulled • Shoulder belt should be positioned
out, rewind it completely in the midway over the shoulder, never
retractor, then pull it out to the de- across the neck.
sired length. • Lap belt should be fitted snugly

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAP BELT*
CAUTION
Damaged or incorrectly fastened seat
belt could cause serious injury.
PR
ES
S
Do not fasten the metal latch into in-

correct buckle by force.
PR
NOTE
ES
S
When fastening the rear seat shoul-

der belt or the center rear lap belt,
Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle The buckle and metal latch plate of the cen- make sure the metal latch plate is
until it locks. ter rear lap belt are identified by the “CEN- inserted into the correct buckle to
To lengthen, hold the metal latch plate at TRE” mark. Be sure to check the marking obtain maximum protection from the
right angles to the belt and pull on the belt. before wearing the center rear lap belt. seat belt.
To shorten, pull the free end of the belt
The metal latch plate of the center rear lap
away from the metal latch plate, then pull the
belt can be fastened only into the buckle of
belt clip to take up the slack.
center rear lap belt buckle.
Position the lap belt low on the hips.
To remove the belt, depress the red button WARNING
on the buckle.
Improper use of seat belts could
NOTE cause serious injury.
Lap belts are installed in the center • Never wear the lap belt across your
of the second seat. abdomen.
• Lap belt should be fitted snugly

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR THREE POINT SEAT BELT

(CENTER)
WARNING
• Make sure to fasten the seat belt
according to the order as described
so that it functions properly.
• To prevent the seat belt bumping
against the rear glass, unfasten
the seat belt while holding it.
• This seat belt is designed only for
a passenger who sits on the center
seat in the second row seat.
• Tug on the seat belt to make sure
the latch plate is securely locked.
• Make sure that the seat belt is not
twisted.
• Improper wearing of seat belts in-
creases the chance of injury or
1. Pull the Mini-latch plate (A) out of the 4. Pull the latch plate (B) across the hips death in a crash.
seat belt console installed at the ceiling. and insert it into the buckle (2) until it • Do not position the seat belt to pass
2. Pull the Mini-latch plate (A) across the clicks. across your neck and abdomen.
shoulder and insert it into the buckle (3) 5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the red
until it clicks. (black) button on the buckle.
CAUTION
3. Pull the latch plate (B) out of the seat
belt console installed at the ceiling. Stow the seat belt into the console
when it is not in use.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTOR AIR BAG*

WARNING The air bag Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) can provide additional protection for
Improperly worn seat belt could
the driver and passenger against head and
cause severe injury. chest injuries in the event of a collision.
• Adjust seat belt height before driv-
The air bag system activates during a colli-
ing
sion of sufficient force when the ignition key
• Make sure the anchorage is
is in “ON”.
locked in position. When the air bag inflates, an operating noise
• Shoulder belts should be posi-
may be heard and a small amount of smoke
tioned midway over the shoulder, like gas will be released. The gas is harm-
never across the neck. less and does not indicate that there is a fire.
The seat belt height adjustor is provided for Injuries, including fatal injuries, can occur in
the front seat. a severe collision, even if seat belts are
CAUTION
Press the side button and slide the retractor worn properly and the air bags inflate. No
upward or downward to obtain snug and safety system can provide complete protec-
Do not adjust the height of the
fit position. You can adjust to 4 positions. tion in a severe crash. Just from viewing the
driver’s seat belt while driving.
vehicle damage after a crash, it is very dif-
This is particularly important if a smaller ficult to accurately determine if the air bags
person has previously selected a lower po- should or should not have inflated. In some
sition. Too low or high a position can impair cases, where the air bag did not inflate, ex-
comfort. tensive visible damage indicate that the car
absorbed much of the crash energy, and the
air bags were not needed. In other cases,
a severe jolt, such as an impact to the un-
der carriage, may not cause extensive body
damage but cause the air bags to inflate.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING CAUTION WARNING

Occupant could be injured. Protection of occupants could be Children could be injured seriously
• Wear the seat belt at all times even limited. by air bag in collision.
if your vehicle is equipped with an • Do not stick anything on steering • NEVER INSTALL A REAR-FACING
air bag. wheel and instrument panel. CHILD RESTRAINT IN THE FRONT
• The air bag system serves as • Do not cover steering wheel and SEAT.
supplement to the seat belt. instrument panel with other mate- A rear-facing child restraint could
rials. be struck by the inflating front
passenger air bag. Always secure
WARNING
a rear-facing child restraint in the
Alteration of components could in- CAUTION
rear seat.
jure someone. Under the following conditions the • A front-facing child restraint
• Do not modify original components. air bag system will not be triggered. should be secured in the rear seat
• Rear impacts whenever possible. If installed in
• Rollovers the front seat, adjust the seat as
CAUTION • Minor frontal collisions far back as it will go.
Treatment by unauthorized persons • Children who have outgrown child
could be dangerous and cause inju- WARNING restraint systems should sit in rear
ries. seat and be restrained with seat
• The air bag system must only be The air bag is designed only for fac-
belt.
disposed by Ssangyong Dealer. tory equipped vehicles.
• The air bag system must only be • Modification will adversely affect
replaced by Ssangyong Dealer. system operation and performance
and may cause personal injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTION WARNING WARNING

Repairs by unauthorized persons • Never impact on the air bag in- • The air bag is made by nylon, so
could cause injury. stallations by hands or tools. you can get light injuries like
• Repairs to instrument panel You could be injured by abrupt in- abrasion or burn during airbag
should only be done by Ssangyong flation. inflation.
Dealer. • Air bag components will be very • Never alter or modify the air bag
hot after the deployment. Do not and seat belt pretensioner related
touch them. components.
CAUTION
• Do not place any objects on the air • During service, the correct service
• Once air bag system is triggered, bag inflation portion. You may be procedures or cautions should be
the triggered bag assembly should injured by those objects during observed, or the air bag and seat
be removed from the vehicle and deployment. belt pretensioner will be defective
replaced with new one. • The infants, children, pregnant or can cause even death.
• You could suffer injuries of abra- and old should be seated in the • There are explosive materials in
sion on your hands and face skins rear seats. the air bag and seat belt pretensioner,
after deployment. • You could suffer secondary inju- so contact Ssangyong Dealer or
• Even if your vehicle is crashed in ries caused by inflated air bag Ssangyong Authorized Service
low speed (out of air bag inflation such as an abrasion, a burn and Operation when scrap the vehicle.
range), check and service your ve- injuries by broken glasses. • When the airbag is inflated, the
hicle for your safety. • Non-toxic gas will come out when relevant components will be very
• Do not move your seat too close to the air bag is inflated and your hot, so do not touch them until
the steering wheel or dashboard. skin, eyes and nose could be cool down to prevent burning.
troubled by this gas, if so, wash it • Take a proper postures on the seat.
out with cold and clean water. If
trouble continues, see your doctor.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVER’s AIR BAG*

WARNING CAUTION
• Never attempt to disassemble, as- Repairs by unauthorized persons
semble or repair the air bag sys- could cause injury.
tem in other than Ssangyong • Repairs to steering wheel, steering
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized column and air bag should be
Service Operation. done by only Ssangyong Dealer.
• Never modify or change the steer-
ing wheel with other non-genuine
parts. WARNING
• If the air bag warning light in the Seat belt use is required at all times.
instrument panel stays ON, there The driver’s air bag is stored in the center The air bag system will not activate
could be defectives in the system, pad of the steering wheel. in all accidents.
check and repair from Ssangyong The air bag inflates within milliseconds dur- The air bag system is designed to
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized ing a crash and forms a safety cushion for protect the driver’s head and chest
Service Operation. the driver. After the air bag completely only. It is not a full sized air bag and
• The air bag system should be in- inflates, it immediately deflates so that it does will not protect the driver’s upper
spected after 10th year from its not interfere with the driver’s visibility or and lower body.
installation regardless of its ap- ability to steer and operate other controls. Failure to wear seat belts may in-
pearance and other conditions. The air bag inflates with considerable force crease the risk of severity of personal
and speed. It is therefore important that the injury to the driver.
driver’s seat and seat back should be cor- The air bag system components, par-
rectly adjusted for the air bag to be fully ticularly the center of the steering
effective. The driver’s seat should be ad- wheel, will be very hot after
justed so that the steering wheel can be inflation. Do not touch them.
reached with the arms slightly angled.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR BAG WARNING LABEL FRONT PASSENGER’s AIR BAG*

Most notably is the information label which Head Lining Side
has been attached to the driver’s sun visor
WARNING
and head lining.
Because others who operate your Rexton 1. This vehicle is equipped with a
may not have the opportunity to read this in driver air bag. The air bag is a
advance, the visor and head lining label must supplemental system of seat belt.
not be removed. You must wear seat belt.
In addition, other labels have been placed in 2. This air bag must be replaced by
inside panel of steering wheel body, engine and authorized dealer of replace-
room and battery cable as followings. ment. (This air bag module must
These also must not be removed. be replaced after ten years from
delivery date) An air bag is fitted on the upper side of glove
3. As a system check, the SRS warn- box.
Sunvisor Side
ing lamp also comes on when the The system is of the same types as fitted
WARNING ignition is first turned to the on for the driver.
Take down the sunvisor and see SRS position. If the warning lamp goes This air bag is quite large and inflates with
Air bag warning on head lining. off after approximately 6 seconds, considerable force. It can seriously hurt a
the system is O.K. See the service front seat passenger who is not the proper
manual instruction in case of the position and not wearing the sea belt prop-
following condition. erly.
- The air bag (SRS) warning lamp Front seat passenger should move the seat
does not come on at all. as far back as practical to sit well back in
- The air bag (SRS) warning lamp the seat.
stays on constantly.
- The air bag (SRS) warning lamp
goes on flickering.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SEATBELT PRETENSIONER FRONT AIR BAG/PRETENSIONER

SIDE AIR BAG* (FRONT SEATS)* MAY NOT BE TRIGGERED*
Side air bags are inside of the driver’s and When a strong frontal impact occurs, seat Front air bag and pretensioner may not
passenger’s door and will be triggered belt pretensioner rewinds the seat belts im- be triggered
when side collision. mediately to protect occupant’s face and 1. When the vehicle is side impacted or
chest. rear impacted (over 30 degrees of angle
WARNING from straight ahead direction).
• Do not lean or impact on the seats NOTE 2. When the vehicle is rolled over.
equipped with side air bag. The noise, smokes and dust that oc- 3. When the sensors can not detect the
• Do not modify or cover the seats curred during the front air bag/side frontal crashes (out of the air bag infla-
equipped with side air bag. air bag’s inflation and seat belt tion)
pretensioner’s operations are normal 4. When crashed on the narrow objects
and harmless to human body, but such as electric pole or trees.
sometimes they can irritate, there- 5. When stuck into the overflow or mud
fore escape from the vehicle as soon puddle.
as possible while watching the 6. When the front of your vehicle is jammed
surroundings. under the lorry’s vessel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN COMES ON THE AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT*
The system may have some defectives and

results in inoperative when in a collision.
Have the system checked and repaired im-
mediately by Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
5
VENTILATION, HEATING AND
AIR CONDITIONING*

GETtheMANUALS.org
GENERAL
You can set the proper temperature accord-
ing to seasonal conditions and operate the
air conditioner or heater by operating the
switches. Properly operate the air conditioner
and heater to keep the comfortable driving
condition. If the vehicle drives in low speed
(approx. less than 10km/h) or stops, the air
intake mode will be changed to recirculation
mode automatically to prevent inlet of the
fumes from other vehicles. In AUTO mode, if
you operate wipers, the air conditioner will
turn ON and switches to fresh air intake
mode automatically to defrost the windshield
window.
CAUTION
Use only R-134a for refrigerant in
this system.
WARNING
If you sleep while operating the air
conditioner or heater and closing all
the windows, you may be suffocated
to death due to lack of ventilation.
When you operate the air conditioner
or heater, ventilate frequently.

GETtheMANUALS.org
VOLUME CONTROL DIRECTION CONTROL VENT
You can control the volume of the airflow You can control the direction of airflow by Front Left and Right
by rotating this dial type lever. moving the lever position. You can control the volume and direction of
the airflow through both adjustable side
vents toward either side of the front pas-
senger area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Center 1. Volume Control Rear Seat

You can control the direction of the airflow 2. Direction Control You can control the direction of the airflow
through both adjustable center vents toward Center Console through adjustable side vents toward side
the center of the front passenger area. You can control the volume and direction of of the rear passenger area.
the airflow through both adjustable center
vents toward the center of the rear passen-
ger area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS

1. Temperature control switch
2. AUTO switch
3. Fan speed control switch
4. Rear air conditioner switch
5. AMB switch
6. OFF switch
7. MODE switch
8. Air conditioner switch
9. Defroster switch
10. Air source selection switch
11. Rear air conditioning indicator

GETtheMANUALS.org
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
AUTO SWITCH SWITCH FAN SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
Press the switch to turn on the system. On You can adjust the temperature between The fan speed can be adjusted in 6 stages.
the VFD, the AUTO indicator will be comes 18°C~32°C. • Turn the switch counterclockwise to
on. • Turn the switch counterclockwise to reduce the fan speed.
In ‘AUTO’ mode, the fan speed, air flow and lower the temperature by 0.5°C degree. • Turn the switch clockwise to increase
air vent will be automatically controlled ac- • Turn the switch clockwise to raise the the fan speed.
cording to the adjusted temperature. temperature by 0.5°C degree.
When the switch is operated, the fan speed
shows up as bar and “AUTO” goes out.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH* AMB SWITCH
Press the switch to operate the rear air When the switch is rotated, the fan speed If you press the switch, it will show you the
conditioner. will be controlled in 3 stages. ambient temperature for 5 seconds. It will be
Press the switch again to stop the rear air returned to its original display after display-
With the separate airflow direction control
conditioner. ing the temperature. On the VFD, the OUT-
lever, you can adjust the airflow direction.
SIDE indicator will be comes on.
Operation If you press the switch again during its
1. Turn on the front air conditioner switch CAUTION
ambient temperature display, it will be re-
and fan speed control switch. The rear air conditioner cannot op- turned to its original display.
2. Press the rear air conditioner switch. erate without turning on the front air
3. Rotate the rear fan speed control switch conditioner switch, front fan speed
to operate the rear air conditioner. control switch and rear air condi-
tioner switch even if the rear fan
speed control switch is operated.
However, the air comes in according
to fan speed control switch position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OFF SWITCH AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH DEFROSTER SWITCH
Press the switch to turn off the air condi- When you press the switch, the indicator When you press the switch, the airflow di-
tioning system and displays on the VFD. light ( ) comes on and the air conditioner rection will be changed to windshield and
starts to operate. door glasses, the air conditioner operates
When you press the switch again, the air automatically and outside air comes in. At
conditioner stops operation and indicator this moment, the indicator ( ) comes on.
goes out. When the defrosting is completed, press the
AUTO indicator doesn’t come on during the switch to return to normal operations.
switch operation. When the switch is operated, the air condi-
tioner indicator ( ) and fresh air intake
CAUTION mode indicator ( ) comes on. At this
When the ambient temperature is moment, AUTO indicator goes out.
extreme low, the air conditioner may
not operate to protect the air condi-
tioner system even the switch is
pressed and the indicator came on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MODE SWITCH
By pressing the switch, the air flow mode Position Position
changes as shown in order.
When the switch is operated, the AUTO in-

dicator goes out.
Position Position Position

GETtheMANUALS.org
OPERATING TIPS FOR

AIR SOURCE SELECTION SWITCH VENTILATION SYSTEM
If your vehicle has been parked in direct During the winter or summer, to prevent the
sunlight, open the windows before turning direct blow of the cold or hot air, the fan
on the air conditioning (A/C). speed will start from first stage or the air
flow will be directed to defrost mode while
To clear foggy windows on rainy days or in
the initial operation of air conditioner.
high humidity, decrease the humidity by us-
ing the A/C. If the temperature indicator blinks during
vehicle starting, there are defectives in the
Turn on the A/C system for a few minutes
automatic air conditioner. In this case, oper-
at least once each week, even in winter
ate the air conditioner manually and check it
months or when the A/C system is not be-
from Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
ing used regularly.
By pressing the switch, outside air intake thorized Service Operation.
This maintains proper lubrication of the com-
mode and recirculation mode changes
pressor and the seals and will prolong the During the winter when the air conditioner
alternatively.
service life of the system. is not used regularly, run the air conditioner
When the fresh air intake mode is selected,
once or twice every month for 5~10 minutes.
indicator ( ) comes on. Driving in stop-and-go traffic may reduce the
Otherwise, the oil in the compressor will not
Recirculation mode is selected ( ) in- effectiveness of the A/C system.
be circulated and could result in
dicator comes on. When the switch is
When the temperature is set initially, do not malfunctions. Do not forget to run the air
operated, the AUTO indicator goes out.
operate the temperature control switch conditioner in low speed.
CAUTION unnecessarily. The time to get to the set
When the air conditioner is not used in
Long time driving in recirculation temperature may be longer.
periods, odors will come out. Run the air
mode can cause inside to become Do not run the air conditioner in recircula- conditioner for 20~30 minutes with the doors
stuffy and windows to fog up. tion mode for a long time. opened and you could remove the odors.
When the refrigerant is not sufficient, your

cooling capacity will be dropped.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FOR GETTING MAXIMUM MANUAL OPERATION OF EACH SIDE VENT - SIDE BLEED
COOLING AND HEATING FUNCTION FUNCTION
If you press the AUTO switch and set the By operating the relevant switch of the au- Side vent has side bleed function that blows
temperature to LO with temperature control tomatic air conditioner, you can control the air regardless of selected mode switch, so
switch, the air conditioner operates with air conditioner operation, airflow direction, it can prevent fogging or icing on the side
maximum fan speeds and the inside air fan speed and air source by manually. glasses by directing side vent toward side
recirculrates. The air flow direction will be glasses during the winter.
Under the automatic cooling.heating, if you
selected to ( ).
control the specific function manually by
If you press the AUTO switch and set the operating the air conditioner switch, fan
temperature to HI with temperature control speed control switch, airflow mode switch
switch, the air conditioner operates with or air source selection switch, then the
maximum fan speeds and outside air will other functions will continue automatic
flow into the vehicle. The air flow direction operations. At this moment, the AUTO indi-
will be selected to ( ). cator goes out.
To stop the maximum cooling and heating, If you want full automatic functions again
press the OFF switch. after manual adjustment, press the AUTO
switch. At this moment, the AUTO indicator
comes on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SUPPLEMENTARY HEATING DEVICE

(DIRECT INJECTION ENGINE REPLACING AIR CONDITIONER
EQUIPPED VEHICLE) PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) FILTER
• The DI engine equipped vehicle has the This supplemeatary heater is an electrical air Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10,
supplementary heating devices to in- heating type and installed on the heater out- 000 km of driving. However, if the vehicle is
crease the heating effect before the let port. This device improves the heating operated under severe conditions such as
engine coolant is fully heated. effect by increasing the temperature of flow- dusty road, unpaved rpad, and excessive
The supplementary heating devices are ing air into the passeger room. air conditioner and heater operation, shorten
as follows: This device is operational/non-operational the replacement interval.
- PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) when the engine control unit supplies/cuts-
• PTC: Standard equipment off the voltage to PTC according to the cool- CAUTION
ant temperature and the ambient
If the air conditioner filter is
temperature.
contaminated, cooling capacity is
• Operational Condition decresed and unpleasant odor is
This device is activated when the tempera- generated.
ture switch is at any position other than Replace the air conditioner filter
“OFF” position and the coolant temperature when
and the ambient temperature is within a • unpleasant odor is generated at
specified range. first operation after long unused
period.
• Non-operational Condition • cooling and blowing capacity are
- The temperature switch is at “OFF” po- decreased.
sition
- Defective ambient temperature sensor
- During engine cranking
- Too low battery voltage
- During pre-glowing process (indicator ON)

GETtheMANUALS.org
1. Open the glove box and remove it from 2. Unscrew the filter cover bolt inside 3. Pull in the primary air conditioner filter to
dash panel by pushing both holders to glove box and remove the cover. remove it.
arrow directions.
CAUTION
Do not apply excessive force to the
holders when removing the glove
box. It may cause a deformation of
holders and results in a loose
installation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4. Pull up and in the secondary air condi- CAUTION

tioner filter to remove it,
Replace both air conditioner filters
5. Install new air conditioner filters in the
at a time and pay attention to the
reverse order of removal.
installing direction.

GETtheMANUALS.org
6
TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS IN USING THE

TURBOCHARGER
What is the turbocharger?
Turbochargers are based on gas turbine
engine technology, but operate under con-
siderably greater pressure. The turbo-
charger consists of two turbo elements, a
turbine and a compressor, both of which are
driven from the main center shaft. The tur-
bine rotates between 50,000-160,000 spins
per minute and uses the energy of the ex-
haust gas to drive the compressor. The
compressor, in turn, draws in fresh air
which it supplies to the cylinders in com-
pressed from. As more fuel is drawn into
the engine, output performance is boosted
between 15-30% in comparison to a non-
turbocharged engine.
Advantages of a turbocharger
Turbocharger helps the engine operate more
smoothly and with greater efficiency.
• Increase specific power
• Compensate for power loss at altitude
• Reduce emissions

GETtheMANUALS.org
TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM 6–3
What is the intercooler? PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The inter-cooler cools down the com- The vehicle owner should be encouraged to CAUTION
pressed air temperature to increase the observe the following precautions to ensure
• At low ambient temperature, or
engine power by increasing the air density. maximum turbocharger service life.
when ever the vehicle has not been
CAUTION used for a long period, normal
• Operate the engine above idle only engine oil pressure and flow is af-
after normal engine oil pressure fected. Under these conditions the
has been established. engine should be started and al-
Forcing the turbocharger to oper- lowed to idle for a few minutes
ate before the bearings are ad- before operating at a higher rpm.
equately lubricated creates unnec- • Avoid long periods of engine
essary friction. idling. The combination of low-
• Take steps to reduce temperature pressures in the turbine and com-
and speeds from their maximum pressor may allow oil to seep past
before shutting down the engine. the seal into the turbine or the
The engine equipped with turbo- compressor.
charger develops much more heats • The turbocharger may need to be
than normal engine, so when the pre-oiled after oil change or any
engine is stopped abruptly, the oil service that involves oil draining.
in the bearings may evaporate due Crank the engine a few times be-
to heats and can cause sticks. fore allowing start, then start the
• Use only designated engine oil and engine and allow it to idle for a
observe inspection and replace- period to establish full oil circu-
ment intervals. lation and pressure before operat-
ing at higher rpm.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TURBOCHARGER INSPECTION
Good maintenance practices should be ob- NOTE
served, particularly regarding air filtration
and oil quality and filtration. The most defectives in turbocharger
These areas are important because of a are turbine blade damages or com-
turbocharger’s speed of operation. pressor bearing sticks due to lack of
Proper operating procedures and preventive oil supply, contaminated engine oil
maintenance practices enhance good turbo- or external materials.
service lift and performance.
The contaminated air cleaner can damage
the turbo-charger seriously, so frequently
check the air cleaner and observe the re-
placement intervals.
WARNING
Operating the turbocharger system
without the intake and exhaust mani-
fold mounting can result in severe
engine damage.
The turbocharger should be oper-
ated when every device is normally
installed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

GETtheMANUALS.org
FINDING DEFECTIVES WHILE COMING ON OIL PRESSURE

DRIVING WARNING LIGHT WHILE DRIVING
CAUTION
• If the oil level is normal, contact
Authorized Service Opera-tion for
the service.
• If the oil level is low, check for oil
leaks. If oil leaks, contact Ssangyong
Service Opera-tion for the service.
1. Turn on the hazard warning lamps and Stop the vehicle to safe and level place as
stop the vehicle to safe place. soon as possible and turn off the engine. WARNING
2. Set up the warning triangle behind the Check the engine oil levcel as follows. If you drive on while the oil pressure
vehicle with sufficient safety distance. warning light is coming on, the en-
1. Turn off the engine and wait for approx.
3. After checking the vehicle, if there are gine could be stick or relevant com-
5 minutes.
defectives in your vehicle, have your ponents could be damaged.
2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it clean,
vehivle checked and repair from reinsert and pull it out again to check the
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au- oil level.
thorized Service Operation. 3. If the oil level is low, add engine oil to
the specified level.
4. Start the engine and check the warning
light still come on. If the warning light still
come on, contact Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Opera-
tion for the service.

GETtheMANUALS.org
COMING ON BATTERY CHARGE COMING ON BRAKE SYSTEM COMING ON ABS/EBD WARNING

WARNING LIGHT WHILE DRIVING WARNING LIGHT WHILE DRIVING LIGHT WHILE DRIVING
It means the battery is not charging normally, If the warning light stays on when the park- If the ABS or EBD warning light comes on
so turn off all unnecessary electrical de- ing brake lever has released, the brake fluid while driving, there may be defectives in ABS
vices and inspect from Ssangyong Dealer level is low, so stop driving and contact system or TCS system, if equipped TCS
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- system, so inspect and repair from
rized Service Operation for the service. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-

GETtheMANUALS.org
COMING ON , , COMING ON ENGINE CHECK WARNING

INDICATOR WHILE DRIVING LIGHT (DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL AND CANNOT START THE ENGINE
GASOLINE ENGINE EQUIPPED) When the ignition key is turned to ‘START’
If the starter does not rotate

Check the battery, connection of the battery
terminals, position of the ignition key and
DI engine or gasoline engine equipped vehicle fuse.
If the starter operates but the engine

does not start
Check the fuel level and timing belt.
These indicators come on when the ignition This warning light comes on when the igni-
switch is turned to ON and should go out if tion switch is turned to ON and goes out if If the engine does not start continuously,
the system is in normal condition. If the the engine is in normal condition. Contact Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
and warning light come on or blink (IDI CAUTION
Engine), or warning light stays on, have When this warning light comes on, CAUTION
the 4WD system checked at Ssangyong the engine driving force may be de- On vehicle equipped with an auto-
Dealer or Ssang Authorized Service creased or the engine may stall. These matic transmission, the engine will
Operation. are indication of activating the safety be started in P and N positions.
mode to protect engine system. In this
NOTE
case, have the engine system checked
When using 4WD switch, “4WD LOW” at Ssangyong Dealer or Ssang Autho-
or “4WD HIGH” indicator will blinks rized Service Operation.
until the shift is completed. It shows
that the shift operation is in progress.

GETtheMANUALS.org
STARTING THE ENGINE WITH

JUMPER CABLES Before jump starting with an another
battery:
CAUTION WARNING
• Do not try to start vehicle by push- (Continued) 1. Apply parking brake.
ing or pulling it. 2. In a vehicle with automatic transmission,
• Wear eye protection when working
• This can damage the catalytic con- shift to PARK; with manual 5 speed
near any battery.
verter and automatic transaxle, and transmission, shift to NEUTRAL.
• Do not allow battery fluid to con-
may cause personal injury.
tact eyes, skin, fabric, or painted 3. Switch off all electrical accessories.
You can start a vehicle that has a dis- surfaces.
charged battery by transferring electrical • Make sure battery providing jump
CAUTION
power to it from a battery in another vehicle. start has the same voltage as the
battery receiving the jump. Turn audio system off before jump
• Do not disconnect discharged bat- starting your vehicle. Otherwise you
WARNING may damage audio system.
tery from vehicle.
Batteries can explode. • Failure to follow these precautions
You could be burned by battery acid. or the following instructions for
Electrical short could injure you or WARNING
starting an engine with jumper
damage the vehicles. cables can cause battery to Always route jumper cables so they
• Do not expose battery to flames or explode, resulting in burns from cannot catch on rotating parts in the
sparks. battery acid, or electrical short engine compartment. Otherwise you
• Do not lean over battery while circuit. may damage vehicle and cause seri-
jump starting vehicle. • This can create damage to electri- ous personal injury.
• Do not allow cable terminals to cal systems in both vehicles, and
touch each other. cause serious personal injury.
(Continued)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Attaching Jumper Cables

4. Make the last connection to a suitable 9. Operate the discharged vehicle for ap-
ground, such as a steel bracket bolted proximately 20 minutes. This will allow
to the engine block. the charging system to recharge your
battery.
5. The engine of the vehicle providing the
jump start can be allowed to run during 10. If this discharge condition recurs, con-
the jump start. Attempts to start the en- sult your Ssangyong dealer or an autho-
gine of the vehicle with the discharged rized Ssangyong Service Operation.
battery should be made at intervals of
about one minute and should not last WARNING
longer than 15 seconds each.
• Last connection to the vehicle to
To jump start your battery, connect the Once the previously discharged vehicle is be charged should NOT be made
jumper cables in the following order: to the negative (“–”) battery termi-
running:
1. Connect one clamp of the first lead of nal.
the jumper cable to the positive terminal 6. Carefully disconnect the ground connec- • Attach the clamp for this last con-
of the charged battery. (identified by a tion (“-”). Begin with the vehicle with the nection to a steel bracket bolted to
“+” sign on the battery case or terminal.) discharged battery. the engine block.
2. Connect other end of this same jumper Leave the discharged vehicle running. • This last connection should be as
cable lead to the positive terminal of the far away from the battery as
discharged battery. (the “+” terminal.) 7. Disconnect the negative lead from ve- possible.
hicle providing the jump. • Connecting the jumper cable to the
3. Connect one end of the second lead on
jumper cable to the negative terminal of 8. Disconnect the “+” lead from both negative terminal of the dis-
the charged battery. (identified by a “-” batteries. charged battery could result in
sign on the battery case or terminal.) arcing and possibly a battery
explosion. Serious personal injury
or vehicle damage can result.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE ENGINE IS

OVERHEATING
If the fan is operating but the temperature is
WARNING not lowered, stop the engine and let it cool.
• Make sure that the battery provid-
Then, check the coolant level. If it’s low,
ing the jump start has the same
check for leaks in the radiator hoses and
voltage as the battery in your ve-
connections, heater hoses and connections,
hicle (12 V).
radiator, and water pump.
• If the vehicle moves abruptly dur-
ing jump starting, there could be If you find a leak or other damage, or if cool-
unexpected accidents. Before start- ant is still leaking, do not run the engine until
ing the vehicle, apply the parking these problems have been corrected.
brake and position the shift lever Consult Ssangyong Dealer immediately.
to P (automatic transmission) or If the engine coolant temperature gauge
neutral (manual transmission) shows an overheating condition or you have WARNING
• If you push to start the gasoline another reason to suspect the engine may Steam from an overheated engine
engine equipped vehicle, the ex- be overheating, stop and park the vehicle.
can burn you badly.
pensive 3-way catalytic converter The air conditioning must be off. Leave the
• If steam is seen, don’t go to front
engine idling for a few minutes and check
will be damaged, therefore never of vehicle. Get everyone away from
that the cooling fan is operating.
attempt to start by pushing the the vehicle.
vehicle. If the fan is not operating, turn the ignition • Switch off engine.
off and consult your Ssangyong Dealer im- • Allow engine to cool.
mediately. • Open engine hood when steam is
no longer visible.
If the fan is operating and if steam is not
• Do not remove coolant surge tank
coming from the engine compartment, open
cap until the engine and radiator
the engine hood and idle the engine until it
are cool.
cools.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE SELECTOR LEVER

DOESN’T MOVE
WARNING
If you pour cold water suddenly into 1. Turn ignition off.
the overheated engine, the engine 2. Pry off the cover.
could be damaged. 3. Push the shift lock release lever by in-
Add coolant after allowing the en- serting a proper stick. Then, with the
gine to cool enough. brake pedal depressed, move the selec-
tor lever to N (neutral).
4. Start engine and shift into the gear you
want.
5. Have your vehicle repaired by Ssangyong
Your vehicle has a shift lever lock control Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
system. Before you can shift from park (P), Operation as soon as possible.
press the brake pedal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

Using a lifting type towing car
If not available to use car carrier or towing
dolly, use a lifting type towing.
According to the vehicle’s condition, select
a proper way.
However, the propeller shaft for the
grounded wheels should be disconnected
before towing.
WARNING
• To tow the vehicle with the front/
Using a car carrier Using a towing dolly rear wheels on the ground, never
If it is necessary to tow your vehicle, If not available to use car acrrier, use a forget to disconnect the front/rear
contact a Ssangyong dealer or a profes- towing dolly. propeller shaft from the transfer
sional tow truck service. case or axle assembly and secure
them in safe position.
WARNING
• Selector lever should be in neutral
• Never let passengers ride in a ve- position.
hicle that is being towed. • Remove the skid panel when lift-
• Never tow a vehicle faster than ing the front part of the vehicle.
safe or posted speeds. • Set the vehicle in 2WD mode for
• Never tow a vehicle with damaged part-time 4WD vehicle when lifting
parts that are not fully secured on the rear part of the vehicle.
the vehicle.
Failure to observe these precautions
can result in personal injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EMERGENCY TOWING
• Set the ignition in the ON position to re-
lease the steering column lock and to
permit the operation of brake lamps,
horn and windshield wipers.
• Only the driver should be in the towed
vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
• To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes
from the towing vehicles, close the win-
dows and place the air intake lever to
the recirculation mode.
For emergency towing when a towing ser- • Drive off slowly and avoid jerky Front towing hooks (left and right)
vice is not available, your vehicle is equipped movements.
with the towing hooks under the front and
rear of the vehicle for use with a tow rope. WARNING
When towing your vehicle with the tow rope: When towing with a tow rope, con-
trol of towed vehicle can be lost.
• Secure the rope to both of the towing
• Do not tow if the wheels, transmis-
hooks under the front of the vehicle as
sion, axles, steering or brakes are
tight as possible. damaged.
• Switch on the hazard warning flasher • Do not remove key from ignition
of both vehicles. switch as this will make the vehicle
• Place the gearshift lever in neutral and unsteerable.
release the parking brake.
Rear towing hooks (left and right)

GETtheMANUALS.org
TRAILER TOWING* Trailer Loading

CAUTION Your vehicle is designed primarily as a pas- To load your trailer properly, you must know
senger vehicle therefore handling, braking, how to measure gross trailer weight and
When towing the vehicle with a tow
durability and economy will be affected by trailer ball weight. Gross trailer weight is the
rope, the vehicle can be damaged.
To reduce damage, towing a trailer. weight of the trailer plus all cargo in it.
• Use tow hooks only if no other tow- Your safety and satisfaction depend upon You can measure gross trailer weight by
ing equipment is available. proper use of correct equipment. Also, you putting the fully loaded trailer on a vehicle
• Only tow the vehicle from front. should avoid overloading and other abusive scale.
• Keep tow rope clear of bumper. use. Trailer ball weight is the downward force
• Ensure tow rope is securely fixed to The maximum loaded trailer weight you can exerted on the hitch by the trailer coupler at
tow hook, at both ends. Check by pull with your vehicle depends on your in- its normal towing height. This weight can be
pulling on tow rope. tended use and what special equipment has measured using a bathroom scale.
• Towing with a tow rope could
been installed on it. Before attempting any The weight of your loaded trailer (gross
cause severe automatic transmis-
sion damage. When towing vehicle towing, ensure that the correct equipment trailer weight) should never exceed the
with automatic transmission, use is fitted to your vehicle. specified values.
flat bed or wheel lift equipment. Your Ssangyong Dealer will help supply and The maximum permissible trailer ball weight
• When towing another vehicle use install towing equipment to suit your is 140 kg.
the rear towing hook. requirement. The permissible trailer loads are valid for
several gradients from 6.8% to 12.6% ac-
cording to engine power applied.
CAUTION
When the trailer has been coupled, the per-
The distance between the towing ve- missible rear axle load for the fully loaded
hicle and the towed vehicle shouldn’t towing vehicle (including occupants) must
be over 25 m and tow the vehicle
not be exceeded.
within 25 km with 5 km/h of towing
speed. To recognize the towing rope,
bind a white colored cloth on the
center of the lope.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING
1 Never exceed the maximum load lim-
its of trailer or trailer towing equip-
ment and be aware that due to the
higher load overheating might occur
in hot days or during continuous up-
hill driving.
WARNING
Incorrect loading and crosswinds,
1. Hitch* WARNING large trucks passing or road rough-
In higher elevations the engine out- ness can cause swaying or trailer
Maximum Load Limits (unit: kg) put and gradability may drop so separation.
Type Trailer Tongue that it may not be possible for the • Adjust ball load by distribution of
with brake 3,500 140
permissible trailer loads to be fully load in trailer.location.
utilized in mountainous territory. • Check by weighing loaded trailer
without brake 750 140 So, after 1,000m height, permissible and ball load separately.
trailer loads should be reduced 10% • Check the relevant state or terri-
every another 1,000m height. tory registration authorities for the
legal maximum towing weight ca-
pacities.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Trailer Brakes Brake Fluid Towing Tips

If the trailer brakes are used, you should Change the brake fluid every 15,000 km When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
follow all instructions provided by the (9,000 miles) under the following conditions. handle differently compared with normal
manufacturer. Never modify the brake sys- - Towing a trailer frequently. driving condition.
tem of your vehicle. - Driving in hilly or mountainous terrain.
For safety, observe the following precautions:
• Practice turning, stopping, and revers-
Trailer Lights Automatic Transmission Fluid
ing before you begin towing in traffic.
Make sure your trailer is equipped with lights More frequent maintenance is required if your Do not tow in traffic until you are confi-
which meet country and local requirements. vehicle tows trailer frequently. dent that you can handle the vehicle and
Always check for the proper operation of trailer safely.
all trailer lights before you start to tow. • Before driving, make sure that the light-
ing system of the trailer works properly.
Tyres • Do not drive faster than legal maximum
When towing trailers, be sure your tyres are speeds.
properly inflated to the inflation pressure. • Make sure that you have enough room
when cornering and avoid sudden
Safety Chains maneuvers.
Always attach safety chains between your • Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety stops.
chains under the tongue of the trailer so that • Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
the tongue will not drop to the road if it be- • Always have someone guide you when
comes separated from the hitch. Follow the reversing.
manufacturer’s recommendation for attach-
ing safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack to permit full turning. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking on Hills
• Allow adequate stopping distance. • If someone removing the blocks stands You really should not park your vehicle, with
Stopping distance is increased when you directly behind the trailer, he could be a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
tow a trailer. injured. If your brakes or the hitch wrong, your rig could start to move. People
• Avoid holding the brake pedal down too slipped, the trailer could roll backward. can be injured, and both your vehicle and
long or too frequently, which will cause Make sure anyone removing blocks from the trailer can be damaged.
the brakes to overheat and result in re- your wheels stands to one side. But if you ever have to park your rig on a
duced brake efficiency. • Take note of trailer manufacturer’s hill, here’s how to do it:
• Always block the wheels on both ve- instructions.
hicle and trailer when parking. Apply the 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift
parking brake firmly. Driving on Grades into PARK (P) for automatic transmission
• Parking on a steep slope is not Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear yet, or into a gear for a manual transmis-
recommended. before you start down a long or sleep sion.
You really should not park your vehicle, downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you 2. Have someone place chocks under the
with a trailer attached, on a hill. might have to use your brakes so much that trailer wheels.
If something goes wrong, such as the they would get hot and no longer work well. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place
trailer/caravan hitch becoming On a long uphill grade, shift down and re- release the regular brakes until the
disengaged, people can be injured and duce your speed to a level which minimizes chocks absorb the load.
both the vehicle and trailer can be dam- the possibility of engine and transmission 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply
aged. overheating. your parking brake, and then shift to
PARK (P) for automatic transmission, or
First or Reverse gear for a manual
transmission.
5. Release the regular brakes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the when you’re pulling a trailer. See the main-
pedal down while you: tenance Schedule for more on this. Things
• Start your engine that are especially important in trailer opera-
• Shift into a gear and tion are engine oil, brake pads & discs, au-
• Release the parking brake. tomatic transmission fluid. Each of these is
2. Let up on the brake pedal. covered in this manual and the index will help
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s
the chocks. a good idea to review these sections be-
4. Stop and have someone pick up and fore you start your trip.
store the chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts
and bolts are tight.

GETtheMANUALS.org
8
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

GETtheMANUALS.org
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or mainte- • Remember that the battery, ignition • To avoid the possibility of personal injury,
nance work on your vehicle, always exer- cables, and vehicle wiring carry high you should always turn off the ignition
cise care to reduce the risk of personal in- currents or voltage. Be careful not to switch and remove the key before work-
jury or damage to the vehicle. cause a short circuit. ing under the engine hood unless the
Here are some general precautions that • When performing any checks in an en- procedure specifically requires
should be closely observed in carrying out closed space with the engine running, otherwise. If it requires running the en-
any service operation. such as in a garage, be sure there is gine while working under the engine
proper ventilation. hood, do not permit any clothing, such
• Do not work on the engine while it is hot.
• Keep used oil, coolant and other fluids as ties or handkerchiefs, near the en-
Always turn it off and allow it to cool.
out of reach of children and pets. gine or cooling fan. They can become
• Never get under the vehicle while it is
• Empty and used oil/fluid containers must entangled in moving parts and result in
supported by a jack. If it is necessary
not be disposed of in the household personal injury and damage to the
to work under the vehicle, use safety
refuse waste. Use your local authorized vehicle. Also remove watches,
stands.
waste disposal facilities when dispos- bracelets, and rings for safety.
• Keep smoking materials, flames, and
ing of them. • Use only Ssangyong Genuine Parts for
sparks away from the battery and all
• If it is necessary to check beneath the service and maintenance.
fuel and fuel-related parts.
engine hood with the engine running, • Some lubricants may damage the paint
• Never connect or disconnect either the
park the vehicle on level ground, place work. Pay attention to prevent the lubri-
battery or any transistorized component
the shift lever in NEUTRAL (manual cants dropping on the painted surface.
while the ignition switch is ON.
transmission) or “P” position (automatic
• When connecting the battery cables, pay
transmission) and apply the parking
special attention to their polarities. Never
brake firmly. Unexpected and possibly
connect a positive cable to a negative
sudden vehicle movement may occur if
terminal or a negative cable to a posi-
these precautions are not taken.
tive terminal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
A NOTE ON SAFETY DRIVER’S CHECK LIST

To avoid the possibility of injury from the The following checks are recommended 7. Check the operation of the door locking
cooling fan, carry out all engine checks with before driving to maintain safe and depend- mechanism.
the ignition switched off so that the fan is able vehicle operation. 8. Check the clutch pedal free play, height
not operating. and function.
The fan is controlled by ECU (electronic Exterior 9. Check the brake pedal free play, height
control unit) and consequently may start to 1. Check the tyres for inflation pressure and function.
operate unexpectedly. and damage.
2. Check the wheel bolts for looseness. Within the engine compartment
When the ignition is on, it is also highly dan- 3. Check the operation of the lights. 1. Check the engine oil level.
gerous to touch live parts as the electronic 4. Check for any oil, water, fuel and fluid 2. Check the engine coolant level in the
ignition system has a greater current igni- leaks. surge tank.
tion power than conventional systems. 5. Check the outside rearview mirrors and 3. Check the battery condition.
license plate for dirt or damage. 4. Check the level of windshield washer
WARNING
solution.
You can injury, burn or shock. Within the vehicle 5. Check the level of the brake and clutch
• Make sure engine is off. 1. Check for steering wheel play and fluid in the reservoir.
• Do not touch live parts when looseness. 6. Check the level of the power steering
lgnition is on. 2. Check the parking brake lever travel. fluid.
3. Check the operation of the horn, wind- 7. Check the transmission oil level
WARNING shield wipers and turn signals. 8. Check the drive belt condition.
4. Check the operation of instruments and
Keep service products away from
indicator warning lights.
children. If a service product has
5. Check level of fuel in the fuel tank
been swallowed, consult a doctor against fuel gauge.
without delay.
6. Check the position of the rearview mir-
Dispose of service product in an en-
rors.
vironmentally responsible way.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Direct Injection Diesel Engine Equipped Vehicle (D27DT)
2. Air cleaner
4. Engine
5. Priming pump
6. Fuel filter
9. Battery

GETtheMANUALS.org
Indirect Injection Engine Equipped Vehicle (D29ST)

2. Air cleaner
4. Engine
5. Fuel filter
6. VIN plate
7. Fuse box
8. Clutch oil tank (Manual transmission)
9. Battery
11. Brake fluid tank

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline Engine Equipped Vehicle (G29D, G32D)

2. Air cleaner
4. Engine
5. VIN plate
7. Battery
8. Fuse box
9. Brake fluid tank

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline Engine Equipped Vehicle (G23D)

2. Air cleaner
4. Engine
5. VIN plate
7. Battery
8. Fuse box
9. Brake fluid tank

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL
When replenishing, use the same specifica-
tion of oil as used at the last oil change.
WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with
engine oil may cause skin disorders.
• Avoid excessive skin contact.
• Wash thoroughly after contact.
WARNING
Checking procedure To check the oil level, pull out the dipstick,
The engine oil must be kept at the right level wipe it clean and reinsert it as far as it will Keep used engine oil out of reach of
to help assure proper lubrication of your go. Pull it out again and check that the oil children.
vehicle’s engine. It is normal for an engine level is between the lower mark (Min) and
to use some oil. It is owner’s responsibility the upper mark (Max) on the oil dipstick.
CAUTION
to check the oil level at regular intervals Also check the oil on the dipstick rod for con-
tamination. Operating with insufficient or too
(such as every fuel stop).
If the level gets to the lower point, add much amount of oil can damage the
The engine oil level should be checked with
enough oil not to exceed the level of the engine.
the vehicle standing on level ground.
upper mark. • Check engine oil regularly.
After stopping the engine, wait a few min-
The oil should not go above the upper mark • Top up if required.
utes before checking the level for the oil to
on the dipstick. This would lead, for example, • Don’t add too much oil.
drain back to the oil pan. If the engine is cold,
the oil may take considerably longer to drain to increase oil consumption, fouling of the
back. spark plugs and excessive formation of
carbon residue.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Change of Engine Oil and Oil Filter

CAUTION
Model Specification Service interval Capacity (L)
In order to ensure sufficient lubrica-
tion of the moving parts, select en- Initial change: 5,000 km, Change
gine oil viscosity (SAE grades) ac- Indirect Injection Approved by every 10,000 km or 12 months
6.0 ~ 8.0
cording to ambient temperature. Diesel Engine MB Sheet 229.1 (But, shorten the service interval
or 229.3 under severe conditions)
Viscosity: See
NOTE Change every 15,000 km or 12
Direct Injection MB Sheet 224.1
Damage to the engine by operating Diesel Engine months (But, shorten the service 6.8 ~ 8.3
with insufficient oil invalidates the interval under severe conditions)
warranty.
G23D Approved by
Initial change: 10,000 km, Change 5.5 ~ 7.5
every 15,000 km or 12 months
NOTE or 229.3
(But, shorten the service interval
G32D/G28D Viscosity: See 7.0 ~ 9.0
In only case not available MB 229.x under severe conditions)
approved oil for service, API SH (or
better grade) and/or ACEA A2/A3 oil
may be used, however it would
rather recommended to shorten the
change interval around 30%.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine Oil and Oil Filter Change WARNING FLUID*
Engine oil changes are to be carried out To ensure proper functioning, efficiency and
Used engine oil and their containers
depending on time intervals and mileage in- durability of the automatic transmission, it is
can be a hazard to health and the
tervals, since oil loses its lubrication prop- of the utmost importance that the fluid is al-
environment.
erties not only through engine operation but ways kept at the proper level.
• Do not dispose of used engine oil
also through ageing.
in household refuse waste. The automatic transmission does not have
Under exceptional conditions e.g. frequent • Use your local authorized waste a dipstick to check the fluid level. You may
cold starts or predominantly urban traffic and disposal facilities when disposing have the fluid level checked by your
stop-and-go traffic, the engine oil and en- of used engine oil. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
gine oil filter should be changed at shorter Service Operation.
intervals rather than the recommended main-
Severe Conditions The only way to find out fluid level decrease
tenance schedule.
• When most trips are less than 6km. is to check if the automatic transmission is
Engine oil filter elements should be replaced
• Operating when outside temperatures leaking.
at the same time with engine oil.
remain below freezing and when most If a fluid leak occurs the vehicle should be
trips are less than 16km. taken to your Ssangyong Dealer or
CAUTION Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation to
• When most trips include extended idling
Check for oil leakage after chang- and/or frequent low-speed operation as be repaired as soon as possible.
ing oil and fiter. in stop-and-go traffic. Fluid should not be added to the automatic
• When operating in dusty areas. transmission without properly setting the
• Towing a trailer. fluid level. Overfilling the automatic transmis-
sion fluid will decrease the automatic trans-
mission performance and could damage the
unit.
bricant chart.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID

The fluid and filter do not require changing.
WARNING
But, if the vehicle is mainly driven under any
of below conditions, the fluid and filter should After driving, the transmission oil
be changed every 60,000km. temperature may be high enough to
burn you. Wait until transmission oil
and filler plug are cool before check-
Severe Conditions
ing oil level.
• In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 32°C
(90°F) or higher. Service Interval and Capacity
• In hilly or mountains terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing. Service interval
Check the oil level only when the engine is Capacity
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or (Specification)
off, the vehicle is level and the transmission
delivery service.
is cool enough so that you can rest your fin- Inspect every 15,000 km
gers on the transmission case. and change every 4WD: 3.6 L
Service Interval and Capacity Remove the filler plug to check the level. 60,000 km 2WD: 3.4 L
The oil should come to the bottom edge of (ATF DEXRON II, III)
Inspect every 15,000 km it begins to run out of the filler hole. Rein-
or 12 months 4-speed: 9.5 L stall the plug securely.
(But, change every 5-speed: 8.0 L Use only the specified oil as given in the
60,000 km under severe
lubricant chart.
conditions)
After installing the plug, visually check the
4-speed: CASTROL TQ 95 transmission case for leaks or damage.
5-speed: Shell ATF 3353
Fuchs ATF 3353

GETtheMANUALS.org
CLUTCH FLUID
(FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION) Service Interval and Capacity
Service interval WARNING

Capacity
(Specification) Keep the clutch fluid out of reach of
children.
Inspect frequently,
Change every 2 years As required
(DOT 3, 4) WARNING
Used clutch fluid and their contain-
ers can be a hazard to health and
the environment.
WARNING • Do not dispose of used clutch fluid
If frequent top up is required, have with household waste.
The clutch fluid level in the master cylinder
system checked by Ssangyong Dealer • Use your local authorized waste
should be checked when other underhood
or Ssangyong Authorized Service disposal facilities.
services are performed. The system should
Operation. • Have the clutch fluid changed by
be checked for leakage at the same time.
WARNING thorized Service Operation.
area around the cap thoroughly. The level
must not be higher than MAX mark or lower The clutch fluid can irritate hands
than MIN mark. and eyes. WARNING
If the level falls below the MIN mark, add the • Do not allow clutch fluid to make Too much clutch fluid can spill on
fluid to MAX mark. Do not overfill. contact with skin or eyes. the engine. The fluid will burn if the
• If contact happens, rinse affected engine is hot enough. You or others
areas immediately with plenty of could be burned and the vehicle
water. could be damaged.
• If irritation persists, consult a doc- Do not overfill the fluid.
tor.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TRANSFER CASE FLUID

Use only the specified oil as given in the
CAUTION
lubricant chart.
The clutch fluid systems can get con- After installing the plug, visually check the
taminated and cause loss off system transfer case for leaks or damage.
performance.
Before removing reservoir cap, clean WARNING
thoroughly area around cap.
After driving, the transmission oil
temperature may be high enough to
CAUTION burn you. Wait until transmission oil
Use of non-recommended clutch and filler plug are cool before check-
fluid could cause damage to the ing oil level.
1. Filler Plug
clutch system. 2. Drain Plug
Use only Ssangyong recommended
To ensure proper functioning, efficiency
clutch fluid.
and durability of the transfer case, it is of
importance that fluid is always kept at the
CAUTION proper level.
Clutch fluid damages paintwork. Check the oil level only when the engine is
• If spillage onto paintwork, wash off, the vehicle is level and the transfer case
with cold water immediately. is cool enough so that you can rest your fin-
gers on the transfer case.
Remove the filler plug to check the level.
The oil should come to the bottom edge of
it begins to run out of the filler hole. Rein-
stall the plug securely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Service Interval, Specification and Capacity BRAKE FLUID

Service interval
Specification ATF DEXRON® II, III
Indirect Injection
Part time 1.2 ~ 1.4 L
Diesel Engine
Capacity Direct Injection Part time

Diesel Engine, 1.4 ~ 1.5 L
Gasoline Engine Full time (TOD)
The fluid level in the brake fluid tank should
be checked according to the “Maintenance
Schedule”.
area around the tank cap thoroughly. The
fluid level in the brake tank must be MAX
mark.
If the level falls below the MIN mark, add the
fluid to MAX mark. Do not overfill.
Low fluid level can indicate a leak in the
brake system. Have the system checked at
nearest Ssangyong Dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
To add the brake fluid, first wipe away and

WARNING CAUTION
dirt then unscrew the fluid tank cap. After
removing the cap, top up the fluid to the MAX Keep the brake fluid out of reach of The brake fluid systems can get con-
mark and tighten the cap securely children. taminated and cause loss off system
afterwards. performance.
WARNING
Before removing tank cap, clean
Service interval Capacity thoroughly area around cap.
Used brake fluid and their contain-
Change every ers can be a hazard to health and
2 years As required the environment. CAUTION
(Inspect frequently) • Do not dispose of used brake fluid Use of non-recommended brake fluid
with household waste. could cause damage to the brake
• Use your local authorized waste system.
WARNING disposal facilities. Use only Ssangyong recommended
The brake fluid can irritate hands • Have the brake fluid changed by brake fluid.
and eyes. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
• Do not allow brake fluid to make Authorized Service Operation.
contact with skin or eyes. CAUTION
• If contact happens, rinse affected Brake fluid damages paintwork.
areas immediately with plenty of WARNING • If spillage onto paintwork, wash
water. Too much brake fluid can spill on with cold water immediately.
• If irritation persists, consult a doc- the engine. The fluid will burn if the
tor. engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned and the vehicle
could be damaged.
Do not overfill the fluid.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT AND REAR AXLE FLUID

WARNING
After driving, the axle oil tempera-
ture may be high enough to burn
you. Wait until axle oil and filler
plug are cool before checking oil
level.
Check the oil level only when the engine is Service Interval, Specification and Capacity
off, the vehicle is level and the axle is cool
Inspect frequently
enough so that you can rest your fingers Service interval
on the axle housing.
Remove the filler plug to check the level. API GL-5 or
Front Axle Specification
The oil should come to the bottom edge of SAE 80W/90
it begins to run out of the filler hole. Rein- Capacity 1.4 L~1.5 L
stall the plug securely. Inspect frequently
Use only the specified oil as given in the Service interval
lubricant chart.
After installing the plug, visually check the API GL-5 or
Rear Axle Specification
axle housing for leaks or damage. SAE 80W/90
Capacity 2.2 L

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER STEERING FLUID COOLANT

Check and replenish as
necessary. Approx. 1.1 L
(ATF DEXRON II, III)
WARNING
Operating the vehicle with insuffi-
cient amount of power steering fluid
Check fluid level with engine turned off. could cause damage to the power The cooling system is filled with an ethyl-
The fluid level should lie between the MIN steering unit. ene glycol base coolant.
and MAX marks on the reservoir. • Check level regularly. In the correct concentration the coolant pro-
If it drops to or below the MIN mark, top up • Top up if required. vides excellent corrosion and freeze protec-
with the specified fluid. • If frequent top up is required, have tion for the entire cooling and heating sys-
system checked by Ssangyong tem and must therefore not be replaced by
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized plain water even in summer.
bricant chart.
Service Operation. The coolant level should be between “MAX”
The level in the reservoir should be checked and “MIN” mark on the coolant surge tank
in accordance with the intervals specified when the engine is cool. The level rises at
in this manual. engine operating temperature and drops
again when the engine cools down.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If the level falls below the “MIN” mark, refill WARNING CAUTION
the radiator with a 50/50 mix of soft water
Scalding hot coolant and steam The engine or cooling system could
and antifreeze specified, to provide freez-
could be blown out under pressure, be damaged.
ing and corrosion protection.
which could cause serious injury. • The antifreeze content of the cool-
In order to protect your vehicle in extremely
Never remove the coolant surge tank ant should be maintained at a
cold weather, use a mix 40% soft water and
cap when the engine and radiator minimum of 50%. The antifreeze
60% antifreeze specified.
are hot. content must not be allowed to
exceed 60%.
Coolant concentration • Do not use alcohol or methanol an-
Coolant concentration WARNING
tifreeze or mix them with the speci-
Antifreeze Water Take precautions to prevent anti- fied coolant.
freeze coming in contact with the • Use only soft (demineralized) wa-
General area 50 Vol% 50 Vol% skin or eyes. ter in the coolant mixture.
• If contact happens, rinse affected • Do not overfill the coolant.
Extremely cold
60 Vol% 40 Vol% areas immediately with plenty of • If frequent additions are required,
area
water. contact Ssangyong Dealer for cool-
• If irritation persists, consult ing system check.
CAUTION doctor.
Use of non-recommended coolant
and anti-freeze could cause damage
to the cooling system.
• Only use Ssangyong recommended
coolant and anti-freeze.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Coolant Change Service Interval and Capacity

Before replenishment, turn off the engine and
Model Service interval Capacity
wait for until engine cool down.
1. Open the coolant surge tank cap slowly. Indirect Injection Diesel Engine 10.5 ~ 11.0 L
2. Remove the radiator drain plug to drain Direct Injection Diesel Engine Change every 60,000 km. 11.0 ~ 11.5 L
the coolant completely. And, inspect and replenish as
3. Tighten the drain plug and fill the cool- G23D Engine necessary. 10.0 ~ 10.5 L
ant after mixing the antifreeze and wa- G32D/G28D Engine 11.3 ~ 11.5 L
ter properly through coolant surge tank
inlet.
4. Tighten the coolant surge tank cap and
start and run the engine until the upper
and lower radiator hoses become hot.
5. Check the coolant level again and add if
necessary.
CAUTION
Check for coolant leaks after chang-
ing coolant.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR CLEANER
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or
sandy areas, replace more often than at the
usual recommended intervals. If it is dirty,
shake the element to remove dust. Clean the
inside of the air cleaner housing and cover
with a damp cloth.
Clean the air cleaner element by blowing
compressed air through it in the opposite
direction to normal air flow.
WARNING
Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine
Engine can be damaged.
Do not operate the vehicle without Service Interval
air cleaner element.
Engine Interval
Diesel Clean every 10,000 km

Clean every 15,000 km
Gasoline
* Under severe condition, the service

interval should be shorter than the
usual recommended.
DI Diesel Engine

GETtheMANUALS.org
WASHER FLUID
WARNING
• The washer fluid includes flam-
mable materials to prevent
freezing. There could be a fire
when directly contacted with
flames. When checking the washer
fluid, avoid the flames near to
washer fluid tank.
• Driving without washer fluid can
be dangerous.
Blow the compressed air through the ele- Frequently check the washer fluid level and • Check your washer fluid level be-
ment in the opposite direction to normal air add with specified washer fluid. fore starting to drive.
flow to clean the element as shown above. • Do not use radiator antifreeze in
CAUTION windshield washer. It can damage
CAUTION the washer system and paint.
If you operate the washer switch with-
If you blow the compressed air to • Fill washer fluid tank only 3/4 full
out washer fluid, the motor could be
normal airflow, the engine will be when it is very cold. This allows for
damaged due to overloads. Therefore,
damaged due to entering the foreign expansion, which could damage
if no water, do not operate the washer
materials. the tank if it is completely full.
motor.
If you use plain water as washer
fluid, it will freeze during the winter
and damage the washer fluid tank
and motor. Use only specified washer
fluid.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SPARK PLUGS (FOR GASOLINE

WIPERS ENGINE)
If the blades are not wiping properly, clean
G32D G23D, G28D
both the window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thor-
oughly with clear water.
Repeat if necessary.
To replace the wiper blade, press the retain-
ing clip and pull the wiper blade off the arm.
Simply push the new wiper blade onto the
arm.
Properly functioning windshield wipers are WARNING Spark plugs should be inspected periodically
essential for safe driving and clear vision. Solvents, gasoline, kerosene and for carbon deposits. When carbon accumu-
Check condition of wiper blades from time paint thinner can damage wiper lates on a spark plug, a strong spark may
to time. Hardened, brittle or smearing blades blades. not be produced.
must be replaced. Keep them away from wiper blades. If necessary, clean the electrodes with a
fine wire brush and carefully scrape the
Since there is no way to successfully re-
carbon off the insulator with a small file. The
move traces of silicone from any glass, be
spark plugs should then be blown clean with
certain not to apply any polish containing
compressed air and the upper insulator
silicone to the windshield of your vehicle
wiped clean. And adjust the spark plug gap.
since this will result in streaks which impair
vision. Service interval
Contamination of either the window or the G23D, G28D G32D
wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce Change every Change every
the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. 40,000 km 60,000 km

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER
BOSCH : F8DC4
(G23D, G28D) BERU : 14F-8DU4
Specification CHAMPION : C11YCC
Gap 0.8 + 0.1 mm
(G32D) NGK: BKUR5ETZ-10

Specification
Gap 1 ± 0.1 mm
CAUTION
• When replacing the spark plugs, Indirect Injection Diesel Engine Equipped Direct Injection Diesel Engine Vehicle
disconnect the negative terminal Vehicle
of the battery and turn off all the
If the filter is contaminated, the supplied fuel If the impurities in fuel gets into the engine
switches.
will be reduced, main components will be and fuel related devices, it may cause seri-
• It is recommended that the engine
be cool or cold when changing the damaged due to entering the contaminated ous damage in affected components. Make
spark plugs (you could burn your- materials and the performance of catalytic sure to replace the fuel filter according to
self). converter will be deteriorrated. the specified maintenance schedule.
• Do not use non-recommended Replace the fuel filter according to the Be careful not to get into the foreign materi-
spark plugs. specified maintenance schedule. als while changing hen replacing the fuel
• Do not allow contaminants to en- filter, clean around it to prevent the impuri-
ter spark plug hole. ties from flowing into the filter.
Replace every at 40,000 km
Press the primimg pump until it becomes rigid.
WARNING WARNING • Service Interval
Spark plugs may be very hot. To avoid firing, clean around the Replace every 30,000 km
Be careful not to burn yourself. fuel filter before starting the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Draining The Water From Fuel Filter

Drain the water from fuel filter whenever
replacing the engine oil.
After draining the water, press the primimg
pump until it becomes rigid. Do not start the
engine before doing this procedure. For the
detailed draining procedures, please refr to
“How to drain the water from fuel filter” in
water separator warning light section.
CAUTION Gasoline Engine

1. Fuel filter 2. Drain plug
3. Priming pump • Replace the fuel filter according
If the filter is contaminated, the supplied fuel
A. Opening direction of drain plug to the specified maintenance
will be reduced, main components will be
B. Closing direction of drain plug schedule.
damaged due to entering the contaminated
• Drain the water from fuel filter
materials and the performance of catalytic
Water Separating Function whenever replacing the engine oil.
converter will be deteriorated.
If the water in fuel gets into the engine and • After replacing the fuel filter or
Replace the fuel filter according to the
fuel system, it may cause serious damage in draining the water, press the
specified maintemamce schedule.
fuel system. The fuel filter offers the water primimg pump until it becomes
separating function to block the inflow of rigid.
• Service Interval Replace at every
water. When the water level in fuel filter 60,000 km
reaches a certain point, the water separator
warning light in instrument panel comes on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVE BELT BRAKE PEDAL

Checking pedal free play
Turn off the engine and depress the brake
pedal several times to deplete the vacuum
in the brake system. Gently depress the
brake pedal by hand and measure the dis-
tance it moves until slight resistance is felt.
If the free play is more or less than specified,
have the brakes adjusted by a Ssangyong
Operation.
Gasoline Engine Diesel Engine (D29ST)
Brake pedal
You do not need extra tension adjustment, Belt replacement: Diesel Engine 1~4 mm
free play
but check belt for wear or tension by push- 1. Loosen the tensioning lever nut.
ing the belt and replace if necessary. 2. Insert a proper lever as shown and push
Belt replacement: Gasoline Engine downwards to pull out the bolt.
Install a device onto the tension adjuster and 3. Lift up the lever to release the tension
rotate clockwise to release the tension and of the tensioning spring and to take off
take off the belt. the belt.
WARNING
The engine could inadvertently start
while checking the belt and cause
moving parts to crush or cut. Remove
key from ignition switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CLUTCH PEDAL PARKING BRAKE CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Checking pedal free play Check the stroke of the parking brake by The catalytic converter is located between
Depress the pedal by hand until clutch re- counting the number of notch clicks heard exhaust manifold and center muffler. The
sistance is felt; ensure free play is within while fully applying it from the released po- catalytic converter consists of monoliths
specification. sition. with honeycomb shaped structure of ce-
If the free play is more or less than specified, Also, the parking brake alone should se- ramic material which are elastically mounted
have the clutch or linkage adjusted by curely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep in a wire mesh structure.
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized grade. If the number of clicks is more or less This precious metal coating on the monoliths
Service Operation. than specified, have the parking brake ad- accelerate the reduction and/or oxidation of
justed by a Ssangyong Dealer or toxic components.
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. On vehicles with a catalytic converter for
unleaded fuel, lead fuel will damage the cata-
Clutch pedal 4~7 notches at a lytic converter and parts of the electronic
5~10 mm Stroke system, thereby rendering them inoperative.
free play force of 20 kg
Damage to the catalytic converter or
the vehicle may result if the following
points are not observed :
Consult a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Operation as Quickly as
possible in the event of misfiring, irregular
engine running following a cold start, a sig-
nificant loss of engine power or other un-
usual malfunctions which may indicate a fault
in the ignition system.
If necessary, driving may be continued for
a short time at a low speed and with low
engine revolutions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OVM TOOLS LOCATION OF HYDRAULIC JACK

You should therefore avoid :
• Frequent repeated cold starts.
• Actuation of the starter for an unnec-
essarily long time during starting (fuel is
injected during the starting procedure).
• Allowing the tank to become empty (an
irregular fuel supply leads to overheating)
• Starting the engine by pushing or tow-
ing (unburned fuel may enter the cata-
lytic converter) : use jump leads.
Have all maintenance work carried out by a 1 Screw jack • Lift up the cover lever located at left side
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized 2. Driver (+, -) of the luggage room to open the cover.
Service Operation. You can then be certain 3. Open end wrenches • Rotate the yellow colored handle coun-
that all components of the vehicle’s 4. Wheel nut wrench terclockwise to release the jack and pull
electrical, injection and ignition system will 5. Pliers out jack.
be operating correctly, that your vehicle has 6. Connecting rod
a low level of pollutant emission and that the 7. Tools bag CAUTION
catalytic converter system will have a long When installing the jack, insert it
life. and rotate the handle clockwise to
hold the jack firmly and not to move
during driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCATION OF OVM TOOLS

AND CONNECTING ROD WHEELS AND TYRES
Factory-fitted tyres are matched to the chas-
sis and offer optimum driving, comfort and
safety. Consult your Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation
before changing over to different tyres or
rims and obtain their advice as regards tech-
nical possibilities. Use of unsuitable tyres or
rims may lead to accidents.
Tyre Inflation Pressure

Maintaining the specified tyre pressure is
• Fold the seat back of second seat, and essential for driver comfort, driving safety Increased pressure resulting from tyre
lift up the seat. and long tyre life. Check the tyre pressure, warm-up must not be reduced, otherwise
• Open the cover on the floor and pull out including the spare wheel, at least every 14 the pressure may drop below the permis-
the tools. days and prior to any long journey. The tyres sible minimum.
should be checked in a cold condition using Securely retighten valve caps after check-
an accurate tyre pressure gauge. ing pressure.
CAUTION Incorrect inflation pressures will increase
After folding the seat back, press the Tyre Pressure tyre wear and will impair safety, vehicle han-
upper portion of the seat back to dling, comfort and fuel economy.
Tyre Wheel PSI
lock, then lift up the seat. If lifting it If the pressure is too low, this can result in
up without locking, there could be P255/65R16 7JJ x 16 29 considerable tyre warm-up and internal dam-
interventions between the rear con- age, leading to tread separation and even
P235/70R16 7JJ/6.5JJ x 16 30 to tyre blowout at high speeds.
sole box cover lever and the seat to
be damaged. Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by sub-
sequently adjusting the inflation pressure.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Make sure that both tyres on an axle are the

WARNING
same size, the same design, and the same
To reduce the risk of loss of vehicle make and have the same tread pattern.
control and personal injury;
• Property inflate tyres. WARNING
• Do not overload vehicle.
Mixing tyres could cause you to lose
Tyre Condition, Rim Condition control while driving.
Driving over sharp edges can lead to hid- Using tyres of different sizes may also
den tyre damage and rim damage which is cause damage to the vehicle.
only noticed later on : there is a danger of Be sure to use the same size and type
tyre blowout. tyres of the same manufacturer on all
Check tread depth regularly. To help you
Drive over edges slowly and at right angle wheels.
detect when the tyres should be replaced,
if possible. When parking, ensure that the the tyres on your vehicle have built-in tread
tyres are not pressed against the edge of WARNING
wear indicators that appear between the
the curb. tread grooves when the tread is 1.6 mm or Driving on worn, old or damaged
Check tyres regularly for damage (foreign less. The tyres should be replaced when the tyres is very dangerous and can
bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in tread worn down as far as one of the wear cause accidents.
side walls). A damaged tyre could burst. indicators. The wear indicator’s position is Replace tyres if ;
Check rims for damage. In the event of dam- indicated by markings on the tyre side wall. • The tread wear indicator appears,
age or abnormal wear, consult a Ssangyong For safety reasons, it is recommended that or
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service the tyres be replaced when their tread depth • Tyres have been damaged.
Operation. has worn down to 2~3 mm.
Abnormal wear is usually caused by incor- When replacing the tyres, the radial tyres WARNING
rect tyre pressure, lack of regular rotation, should be fitted in pairs, or for preference Dispose of worn tyres in accordance
improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance in sets. with local environmental regulations.
tyres, severe braking or poor driving habit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tyre Rotation Winter Tyres

If winter tyres are used they must be fitted CAUTION
to all 4 wheels. Do not exceed the maximum
speed specified by the tyre manufacturer.
When you didn’t fit the snow tires
When using winter tyres, the tyre pressures
before driving on snow or icy road,
supplied by the tyre manufacturer must be
drive in 4WD (4L, 4H) mode with low
adhered to.
speed.
WARNING
Using of winter tyres could adversely
hicle.
Front and rear tyres perform different jobs
• Use equivalent size and type to
and can wear differently depending on the
vehicle’s standard tyres.
tyres of road driven, driving habit, etc.
• Change over from winter to sum-
To avoid uneven wear of tyres and to pro-
mer tyres as son as road condition
long tyre life, inspect and rotate your tyres
allow.
every 5,000km. After rotating, adjust the tyre
pressure and be sure to check wheel bolts
tightness. WARNING
Using of tyre chains could adversely
hicle.
If necessary, consult your Ssangyong
Dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOVING THE SPARE WHEEL HOW TO CHANGE A FLAT TYRE
1. Insert the spare wheel handle into the 4. Slide the lift plate through the center of If a tyre goes flat, follow these safety in-
hole above the rear bumper. the spare wheel, then place the spare structions before you change the tyre:
2. Then attach the wheel nut wrench into wheel near the flat tyre.
the spare wheel handle. Tyre Change Safety Precautions
3. Rotate the wheel nut wrench counter-
clockwise until the winch wire is 1. Turn on hazard flashers.
loosened. 2. Move off the road to a safe place away
from traffic.
3. Park on a firm and level surface.
4. Turn off engine and remove key.
5. Set parking brake.
6. If vehicle has an automatic transmission,
shift to P. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, shift to first or reverse.
7. Have all passengers get out of vehicle
and stand in safe a place.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Changing a Wheel
8. Use a wedge, block of wood, or rocks
in front of and behind the tyre that is di-
agonal from the tyre you plan to change.
Failure to follow these safety precautions

can cause your vehicle to slip off the jack
possibly causing serious injury.
WARNING
When refitting the spare tyre to the
carrier, please follow these Front Jack up point
1. Remove the spare wheel from stowage
instructions:.
area with jacking tools. 5. Locate the jack at proper position.
1. Lay the tyre flat on the ground and
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the 6. Place the jack vertically at the front or
ensure the outer surface of the
wheel nuts one turn each. rear jacking location closest to the wheel
wheel rim is facing DOWN (tyre
3. Insert the jack connection rod and the you plan to change.
valve stem facing down).
wheel wrench into the jack. 7. Jack up the vehicle by rotating the jack
2. Locate the carrier cradle correctly
4. Rotate the jack connection rod clockwise connection rod clockwise until the tyre
through the centre of the rim.
to raise the lift head slightly. is off ground about 1inch (3 cm).
3. When securing the tyre in the car-
rier, ensure that it is seated against 8. As the jack begins to raise the vehicle,
the floor pan correctly and do not CAUTION make sure jack is properly placed so it
overtighten. Do not remove any of the nuts until will not slip.
4. If the spare tyre is in flat, you must you have raised that wheel off the 9. Remove wheel nuts completely by turn-
keep it in the luggage room. ground. ing counterclockwise.
10. Remove tyre and wheel.
11. Mount spare tyre on the wheel hub.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear Jack up point 14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly according
CAUTION
12. Replace and lightly seat the wheel nuts to sequence No. of above figure.
15. Check and adjust tyre pressure. • If over tightened, the wheel nuts
by turning clockwise.
16. Secure the jack and tools in their proper could be damaged. Do not over
13. Turn jack connection rod counter-clock-
locations. tighten the wheel nuts by pressing
wise and lower vehicle to the ground.
17. Secure the flat tyre in the spare tyre the wheel nut wrench by foot or
well. using assist pipe.
CAUTION • Do not completely tighten a wheel
Do not attempt to raise vehicle until nuts at a time. Tighten it with sev-
the jack is in the proper position, eral times in a crisscross sequence.
and secure both to the vehicle and • Never use oil or grease on wheel
the ground. nuts.
• Always use the correct wheel nuts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY MAINTENANCE
WARNING WARNING
When using the jack the vehicle • Before jacking ensure parking
could become unstable and move, brake is on and the transmission
damaging the vehicle or badly injur- is set in 1st or reverse gear
ing. (manual transmission) or P (auto-
• Use jack supplied at correct jack- matic transmission).
ing position. • Do not jack the vehicle and change
• When installing the jack for lift- the wheel where traffic is close.
ing the vehicle, it should be per-
pendicular to the ground.
• Do not go under a jacked-up CAUTION Your vehicle is fitted with a maintenance free
vehicle. • When the tyre has been replaced, (MF) battery without seal plugs.
• Do not start engine while jacked up. retighten it after 50,000 km of driv- It needs no periodic maintenance.
• Before jacking, get all passengers ing.
out of the vehicle and clear of ve- • As soon as possible, take your car CAUTION
hicle and other traffic. to a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong When the battery charge warning
• Use jack only for changing wheels. Authorized Service Operation and light on the instrument panel comes
• Do not jack vehicle on an inclined have the wheel nuts tightend accord- on, the battery is not normally
or slippery surface. ing to Ssangyong specifications. charging. If the warning light comes
• Use jacking position nearest to re- on while driving, turn off all unnec-
quired wheel change. essary electrical devices and have
• Block wheel diagonally opposite checked the system by Ssangyong
the wheel to be changed. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
vice Operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check the battery terminals for corrosion (a For best battery service, do the following.
WARNING
white or bluish powder). To remove it, cover 1. Keep battery securely mounted.
the terminals with a solution of baking soda 2. Keep battery top clean and dry. Used batteries can be a hazard to
and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. 3. Keep terminals and connections clean, health and the environment.
When this stops, wash it off with plain tight and coated with petroleum jelly or • Do not dispose of used batteries
water. Dry off the battery with a cloth or terminal grease. with household waste.
paper towel. 4. Rinse off any spilled electrolyte immedi- • Use your local authorized waste
ately with a solution of water and bak- disposal facilities.
Coat the terminals with petroleum jelly to help
ing soda.
prevent future corrosion.
5. If vehicle is not being used for an ex- CAUTION
If the terminals are severely corroded, clean
tended time, disconnect the cable from
them with baking soda and water. The polarity of battery, i.e. the con-
the negative (-) terminal of the battery
nections for positive and negative
Use a wrench to loosen and remove the to prevent discharge and charge battery
cables, must not be interchanged.
cables from the terminals. Always discon- every six weeks.
nect the negative (-) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery terminals with WARNING
a terminal cleaning tool or wire brush. Re- The battery have acid that can burn
connect and tighten the cable, then coat the you and gas that can explode.
terminals with petroleum jelly. You can badly hurt if you are not
careful.
CAUTION • Keep naked flames, sparks and
smoking items away from battery.
If you disconnect the battery termi-
• Do not let any parts of body,
nal when the engine is running, the
clothes or paintwork contact the
electrical equipment could be
sulfuric acid.
damaged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUSE Fuse Change

WARNING Pull out the blown fuse by using the fuse
puller from the fuse box and insert with the
The use of different types or differ- same ratings of fuse.
ent rating fuses could cause damage
to the electrical system and even start
CAUTION
a fire.
• Always replace fuse with one with If you remove the fuse when the elec-
the same rating. trical power is supplying, the electri-
• Never use anything else but a fuse. cal equipment could be damaged.
• Do not use anything metal to re- Replace the fuse when the ignition
move fuse. key is in LOCK position.
For fuse replacement, withdraw the cover
and extract blown fuse.
A defective fuse can be recognized by its
melted wire. A new fuse should only be in- Fuse Ratings
stalled after the cause of the trouble has You can find the descriptions on each fuse’s
been located and eliminated. function, location and capacity from the fuse
Only fuses of the specified rating should be box cover.
installed. The rating is given on all fuses.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

instrument panel.
To access into interior fuse box, open the
driver’s door and remove the fuse box cover.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUSE BOX IN ENGINE

COMPARTMENT IDI (Indirect Injection) Diesel Engine

engine compartment.
To access into this fuse box, open the hood
and remove the fuse box cover.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Direct Injection Diesel Engine PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline Engine

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS IN REPLACING
BULBS BULB SPECIFICATION
Bulbs Rating Number
CAUTION
• Before replacing the bulb, turn the Low Beam/High Beam 55W/55W 2 each
ignition key to LOCK position and Head lamp
Position lamp 5W 2
turn OFF the relevant switch.
• If you use unspecified bulb, the rel- Tail lamp 8W 2
evant device will be damaged and
Tail/Stop lamp 8W/27W 2 each
there could be a fire due to elec-
trical over loads. Use only speci- Stop lamp 27W 2
fied capacity bulb.
Rear High mounted stop lamp 5W 4
Reversing lamp 27W 2
CAUTION
Turn signal lamp 27W 2
Greasy fingers will cause stains, re-
sulting in a dull light. License plate lamp 5W 2
• Do not touch halogen bulbs with
Turn signal lamp 28W/8W 2
bare hands.
• Clean with a clean non fluffy cloth Front Fog lamp 27W 2
using alcohol or white spirits.
Side repeater lamp 5W 2
Front room lamp 8W 2
Rear room lamp 10W 1 each
Interior
Front door/Rear door lamp 5W 2 each
Glove box lamp 10W 1

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCATION OF LAMPS
1. Headlamp – Low beam 6. High mounted stop lamp 11. Reverse lamp
2. Headlamp – High beam, Position lamp 7. Tail and stop lamp 12. Rear reflector
3. Position lamp 8. Tail lamp 13. License plate lamp
4. Turn signal lamp 9. Stop lamp 14. Side repeater lamp
5. Fog lamp 10. Turn signal lamp

GETtheMANUALS.org
HEAD LAMP
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 5. Separate the head lamp from the vehicle 7. Rotate the dust cover counterclockwise
cable. body. to remove.
2. Remove the radiator grille. 6. Disconnect the head lamp connector. 8. Press the spring to remove.
3. Remove the upper and lower bolts from 9. Pull out the bulb.
the head lamp. 10. Install new bulb with same rating.
4. Loosen the head lamp cover from the 11. Install in the reverse order of the
wheel housing side and remove the bolt removal.
from the head lamp.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TURN SIGNAL LAMP AND FOG

LAMP REAR COMBINATION LAMP
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 5. Remove the bulb by turning it
cable. cable. counterclockwise.
2. Puling down the bulb service cover of 2. Unscrew two fixing screws from rear 6. Install new bulb with same rating.
the front wheel housing. combination lamp. 7. Install in the reverse order of the
3. Remove the nut screw through the bulb 3. Disconnect the connector from rear com- removal.
service cover area. bination lamp.
4. Remove the lamp. 4. Remove the rear combination lamp from
5. Install new bulb with same rating. body.
6. Install in the reverse order of the
removal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SIDE REPEATER LAMP HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP LICENSE PLATE LAMP
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable. cable. cable.
2. Remove the lamp body by pushing for- 2. Remove two fixing screws from air 2. Remove the licence plate lamp assembly.
ward and pulling out its rear end. spoiler on tailgate. 3. Remove the bulb.
3. Install new bulb with same rating. 3. Disconnect the connector from high 4. Install new bulb with same rating.
4. Install in the reverse order of the mounted stop lamp. 5. Install in the reverse order of the
removal. 4. Remove the bulb by turning it removal.
counterclockwise.
5. Install new bulb with same rating.
6. Install in the reverse order of the
removal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT ROOM LAMP REAR ROOM LAMP
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable. cable.
2. Remove the cover with driver. 2. Remove the cover with driver.
3. Install new bulb with same rating. 3. Install new bulb with same rating.
4. Install in the reverse order of the 4. Install in the reverse order of the
removal. removal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES (DIESEL ENGINE)

INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Drive belt I I I I I I I I
* Engine oil & filter Direct Injection (Diesel Engine) R* R* R* R* R* R* R* R*
(1)* (3)* (4)* Indirect Injection (Diesel Engine) Initial change: 5,000 km, then change every 10,000 km
Cooling system hose & connections I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant (3)* (4)* I I I R I I I R
Fuel filter Direct Injection (Diesel Engine) I R* I R* I R* I R*
Indirect Injection (Diesel Engine) I I R*(40) I R*(80) I I R*
Fuel line & connections I I I I I I I I
Air cleaner (2)* I R* I R* I R* I R*
Injection timing (See NOTE1) I I I I I I I I
NOTE 1: Adjust as required; -When excessive smoke is visible (black or white) - Poor performance/economy
Chart Symbols:
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: short (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty con-
distance driving, extensive idling or driving in dusty dition or sandy condition, frequently inspect the air cleaner, if
condition. Shorten the service interval. Inspect the necessary, change the air cleaner.
engine oil at any time, occasionally, if necessary re- (3)* More frequent maintenance is required if under dusty driving
fill the engine oil. condition.
(4)* Refer to “Recommended fluids, coolant and lubricants”.
* Water separator: When replace the engine oil, also drain the water from water separator.

GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY
Exhaust pipes & mountings I I I I I I I I
Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* I R* I R* I R* I R*
Parking brake / Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* I I R*(40) I R*(80) I I R*
Brake line & connections (including booster) I I I I I I I I
Manual transmission oil (5)* I I I R* I I I R*
Clutch & brake pedal free play I I I I I I I I
Front & Rear differential fluid (3)* I R* I R* I R* I R*
Transfer case fluid (3)* I I I R* I I I R*
Automatic transmission fluid (6)* I I I R* I I I I
Chart Symbols:
(5)* Inspect manual transmission fluid every 10,000 km (Inspect the leak of fluid at any time,occasionally), then change every 60,000 km
(6)* Change automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under severe conditions.
- In hilly or moutainous terrain, or

GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts tight / Secure (6)* I I I I I I I I

Tyre condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I I I
Steering wheel & linkage I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid & lines (3)* I I I I I I I I
Drive shaft boots (8)* I I I I I I I I
Seat belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I
Lubricate locks, hinges & bonnet latch I I I I I I I I
Wheel bearing grease I I I I I I I I
Propeller shaft grease - Front / Rear (9)* Inspect every 10,000 km
Chart Symbols:
for looseness.
(8)* After completion of off-road operation, the drive shaft boots should be inspected.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES (GASOLINE ENGINE)

INTERVAL x1,000 km 1 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 0.6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Drive belt I I I I I I I I I
Engine oil & engine oil filter (1)* (3)* I R** R R R R R R R
Cooling system hose & connections I I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant (3)* I I I I R I I I R
Fuel filter (2)* - - - - R - - - R
Fuel line & connections I I I I I I I I I
Air cleaner (2)* - I I I R* I I I R*
Ignition timing - I I I I I I I I
Spark plugs G23D, G28D - - R - R - R - R
G32D - - - - R - - - R
Charcoal canister & vapor lines - - - I - - I - -
Chart Symbols:
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: short distance (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty
driving, extensive idling or driving in dusty condition, shorten condition or sandy condition, frequently inspect the air
the service interval. cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
** - In order to secure engine long life and effective break-in, first oil (factory filled) would be recommended to drain with in 10,000 km.

GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 1 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 0.6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
CHASSIS AND BODY
Exhaust pipes & mountings - I I I I I I I I
Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* I I R* I R* I R* I R*
Parking brake / Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* - I I I I I I I I
Brake line & connections (including booster) I I I I I I I I I
Manual transmission fluid (5)* - I I I R I I I R
Clutch & brake pedal free play - I I I I I I I I
Front & Rear differential fluid (3)* - I R* I R* I R* I R*
Transfer case fluid (3)* - I I I R* I I I R*
Automatic transmission (6)* - I I I R* I I I I
Chart Symbols:
(5)* Inspect manual transmission fluid every 10,000 km (Inapect the leak of fluid at any time,occasionaly) then change every 60,000 km
(6)* Change automatic transmission fluid every 60,000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under severe conditions.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain, or

GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 1 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 0.6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts tight / Secure (6)* I I I I I I I I I

Tyre condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I I I I
Steering wheel & linkage I I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid & lines (3)* I I I I I I I I I
Drive shaft boots I I I I I I I I I
Seat belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I I
Lubricate locks, hinges & bonnet latch I I I I I I I I I
Wheel bearing grease I I I I I I I I I
Propeller shaft grease - Front / Rear (8)* I I I I I I I I I
Chart Symbols:
for looseness.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LUBRICATION CHART
API : CG grade or above,
IDI Engine 6.0~8.0 L Quality ACEA : B2, B3 or B4
Diesel class**
DI Engine 6.8~8.3 L
Engine oil Viscosity MB sheet No. 224.1
API : SJ grade or above,
G23D 5.5~7.5 L Quality ACEA : A2 or A3
Gasoline class**
G32D/G28D 7.0~9.0 L
Viscosity MB sheet No. 224.1
IDI Engine 10.5~11.0 L
Engine coolant MB sheet 325.0,
DI Engine 11.0~11.5 L
(Antifreeze and soft water mixed) BASF GLYSANTIN G05-11,
G23D 10.0~10.5 L
HOECHST GENANTIN SUPER 8023/14
G32D/G28D 11.3~11.5 L
Manual transmission oil 4WD : 3.6 L, 2WD : 3.4 L ATF DEXRON® II, III
Brake/Clutch fluid (Level must be
Properly SAE J 1703, DOT 3 or DOT 4
maintained between MAX & MIN level)
Power steering fluid 1.1 L ATF DEXRON® II, III
Automatic transmission fluid 4-speed: 9.5 L CASTROL TQ 95
5-speed: 8.0 L SHELL or FUCHS ATF 3353
Transfer case fluid IDI Engine Part time 1.2~1.4 L
DI Engine, Part time 1.4~1.5 L ATF DEXRON® II, III
Gasoline Engine Full time(TOD) 1.4~1.5 L
*IDI: Indirect Injection
DI: Direct Injection

GETtheMANUALS.org

Front 1.4~1.5 L
Axle fluid SAE 80W/90, API GL-5
Rear 2.2 L
Wheel bearing grease Properly SHELL Retinax “A” grade
Propeller shaft grease - Front/Rear Properly ALVANIA EP#2
* Please contact Ssangyong Dealer for approved alternative fluid.

** In only case not available MB 229.1 or 229.3, API or ACEA oil may be accepted, however it would rather recommend
to shorten the change interval around 30%.

GETtheMANUALS.org
9
VEHICLE CARE

GETtheMANUALS.org
9–2 VEHICLE CARE

CLEANING AGENTS INTERIOR GLASS SURFACES
Follow the manufacturer’s advice whenever With the use of modern trim materials, it is Glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regu-
cleaning agents or other chemicals are used, very important that you use proper cleaning lar basis. The use of glass cleaner or a liq-
inside or outside the vehicle. Some cleaners techniques and cleaners. Failing to do this uid household glass cleaner will remove
may be poisonous or flammable, and im- on the first cleaning may result in water normal tobacco smoke and dust films some-
proper use may cause personal injury or spots, spot rings, or setting of stains or times caused by ingredients used in vinyl’s
damage. When cleaning the inside or outside soils-all of which are more difficult to remove and interior plastics.
of the vehicle, do not use volatile cleaning in a second cleaning. Never use abrasive cleaners on any vehicle
solvents such as : acetone, lacquer thinners, Dust and loose dirt that collect on interior glass, as they may cause scratches. If abra-
enamel reducers, nail polish removers: or fabrics should be frequently removed with sive cleaners are used on the inside of the
cleaning materials such as laundry soaps, a vacuum cleaner or soft bristle brush. Wipe rear window, any electric demister element
bleaches or reducing agents, except as noted vinyl or leather trim regularly with a clean may be damaged. Avoid placing decals on
in the fabric cleaning advice on stain removal. damp cloth. Normal trim soils, spots or stains the inside rear window, since they may
Never use carbon tetrachloride, petrol, can be cleaned with cleaners: have to be scraped off later.
benzene, or naphtha for any cleaning
purpose. Open all vehicle doors for ventila- Safety Belt Care Cleaning the Outside of Windshield
tion when any cleaning agents or other • Keep belts clean and dry. If your windshield is not clear after using the
chemical are used in the interior. Overexpo- • Clean safety belts only with mild soap windshield washer, or if the wiper blade
sure to some vapors may result in a health and lukewarm water. chatters when running, wax or another
problem which is more likely to occur in small, • Do not bleach or dye belts since this may material may be on the blade or windshield
unventilated spaces. severely weaken them. Clean the outside of the windshield with
To avoid possible permanent discoloration of cleaning powder or an equivalent non abra-
light colored seats, do not let materials with sive cleaner. Your windshield is clean if
non-fast colors come in contact with seat trim beads do not form when rinsing with water.
materials until these materials are totally dry.
This includes certain types of casual clothing,
such as colored denims, corduroys, leathers
and suedes : also decorative paper, etc.

GETtheMANUALS.org
VEHICLE CARE 9–3

EXTERIOR Polishing and Waxing Cleaning Aluminum Wheels, Rally Wheels,
Exterior Finish Periodic polishing and waxing is recom- and Wheel Covers
The paint finish on your vehicle provides mended to remove surface residue from Preserve the original appearance of wheels
beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and your paint finish. Approved products are or wheel covers by keeping then clean and
durability. supplied through your Ssangyong Dealer. free from build-up of road dirt and/or road
salt. Regular cleaning is recommended. Do
Washing your Vehicle Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
not use abrasive cleaners or cleaning
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s Bright metal parts should be cleaned regu-
brushes, as they could damage the finish.
finish is to keep it clean by frequent larly to keep their luster. Washing with wa-
washings. ter is all that is usually needed.
Wash the vehicle in lukewarm or cold water. Use special care with aluminum trim. To
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle avoid damaging protective trim, never use
in the direct rays of the sun. Do not use automotive or chrome polish, steam, or caus-
strong soap or chemical detergent. All clean- tic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
ing agents should be flushed promptly from rubbed to a high polish, is recommended for
the surface and not allowed to dry on the all bright metal parts.
finish.
Ssangyong vehicles are designed to oper-
ate under normal environmental conditions
and to withstand the natural elements. How-
ever, unusual conditions, such as high pres-
sure car washes, may cause water to en-
ter inside the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
9–4 VEHICLE CARE
CORROSION PROTECTION
Your car was designed to resist corrosion. Prompt washing may not completely remove Take care to clean any areas where mud
Special materials and protective finishes all of these deposits. Other cleaners may be and other debris can collect. Sediment
were used on most parts of your car when needed. packed in closed areas of the frame should
it was built to help maintain a good appear- When using chemical cleaners, be sure they be loosened before being flushed. If desired,
ance, strength and reliable operation. Some are safe for use on painted surfaces. your Ssangyong Dealer can do this service
parts which normally are not visible (such for you.
as certain parts located in the engine com- Finish Damage
partment and the underbody of the vehicle) Any stone chips, fractures or deep CAUTION
are such that surface rust will not affect scratches in the finish should be repaired When an engine is washed, fuel,
their reliability. Therefore, corrosion protec- promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and grease and oil residues are washed
tion is not needed or used on these parts. may develop into a major repair expense. off. Therefore you should use only a
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired filling station or a Ssangyong Dealer
Sheet Metal Damage with touch-up materials. Larger areas of fin- who has oil separator equipment in
If your car is damaged and requires body ish damage can be corrected in your the car wash bay.
panel repair or replacement, make sure the Dealer’s body and paint shop. Used engine oil, brake fluid, trans-
mission fluid, antifreeze, batteries
body repair shop applies proper anticorro-
and tyres should be disposed of by
sion material to the parts repaired or re- Underbody Maintenance using the local authorized waste dis-
placed so that corrosion protection is Corrosive materials used for ice and snow posal facilities, or have them dis-
restored. (Also see “Finish damage” which removal and dust control can collect on the posed of by the vendor who is under
follows). underbody. If these materials are not a statutory obligation to do so when
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can you replace them.
Foreign Material Deposits On no account must any of these
occur on underbody parts such as fuel lines,
Calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting items be placed in the household
frame, floor pan and the exhaust system
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird drop- refuse bins or the fluids poured down
even though they have been provided with
pings, chemicals from industrial chimneys the drains.
corrosion protection. Everyone should be concerned about
and other foreign matter may damage ve-
At least every spring, flush these materials environmental protection.
hicle finishes if left on painted surface.
from the underbody with plain water. Help by doing your share.

GETtheMANUALS.org
10
SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE DATA

GETtheMANUALS.org
DIMENSIONS
*( ) : Gasoline engine equipped vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE NUMBER
IDI Diesel Engine (D29ST) DI Diesel Engine (D27DT) Gasoline Engine (G28D, G32D)
The engine number is stamped on the upper The engine number is stamped on the lower The engine number is stamped on the lower
area of cylinder head. area of cylinder block behind the compressor. area of cylinder block in exhaust manifold
side.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CERTIFICATION LABEL CHASSIS NUMBER
Gasoline Engine (G23D Engine) The certification label is affixed on the bot- Chassis number is stamped on the front
The engine number is stamped on the upper tom of driver side B-pillar. right-hand side front wheel of the frame
rear left-hand side of the cylinder block. member.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SPECIFICATIONS
Diesel ( ): Optional item / [ ]: 2WD
Systems Items
D29ST D27DT
Gross vehicle AT 2,415 (2,470) [2,315 (2,370)] 2,520 (2,575)
weight (kg) MT 2,380 (2,430) [2,230 (2,280)] 2,505 (2,550)
Curb weight (kg) AT 1,960 (2,015) [1,860 (1,915)] 2,065 (2,120)
MT 1,925 (1,975) [1,825 (1,875)] 2,050 (2,095)
Fuel Diesel ←
Engine Model D29ST D27DT
No. of cyl. / Compression ratio 5 / 22 : 1 5 / 18 : 1
Camshaft arrangement SOHC DOHC
Max. power 120 ps / 4,000 rpm 165 ps / 4,000 rpm
Cooling system Water-cooled/forced circulation ←
Coolant capacity 10.5 ~ 11.0 L 11 ~ 11.5 L
Max. oil capacity 8.9 L 9.3 L
Turbo charger and cooling type Turbo charger, air-cooled ←

GETtheMANUALS.org

Systems Items
D29ST D27DT
←
2nd 2.365 2.745
3rd 1.473 1.536
4th 1.000 1.000
5th 0.872 0.807
Rev. 3.700 3.591
2nd 1.508 2.186
3rd 1.000 1.405
4th 0.708 1.000
5th - 0.831
Rev.1st 2.428 3.167
Rev.2nd - 1.926
Transfercase Model Part-time Part-Time / Full-time(TOD)
Low 2.483 : 1 ←

GETtheMANUALS.org

Systems Items
D29ST D27DT
Outer 32°40´ ←
Type Front Disc ←
Alternator capacity (V-A) 12 - 75 (12 - 90) 12 - 140 (12 - 115)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline ( ): Optional item


Gross vehicle AT 2,495 ←
weight (kg) MT - ←
Curb weight (kg) AT 2,040 ←
MT - ←
Fuel Gasoline ←
Engine Model G23D G32D
No. of cyl. / Compression ratio 4 / 10.4 : 1 6 / 10 : 1
Camshaft arrangement DOHC ←
Max. power 149.6 ps / 5,500 rpm 220 ps / 6,100 rpm
Coolant capacity 10.0 ~ 10.5 L 11.3 ~ 11.5 L
Max. oil capacity 9.8 L ←
Turbo charger and cooling type - -

GETtheMANUALS.org

←
Gear ratio 1 st 4.007 ←
2nd 2.365 ←
3rd 1.473 ←
4th 1.000 ←
5th 0.872 ←
Rev. 3.700 ←
2nd 1.508 2.423
3rd 1.000 1.486
4th 0.708 1.000
5th - 0.833
Rev.1st 2.428 3.147
Rev.2nd - 1.930
Transfercase Model Part-time Part-time / Full-time (TOD)
Low 2.483 : 1 ←

GETtheMANUALS.org

Outer 32°40´ ←
Type Front Disc ←
Alternator capacity (V-A) 12 - 115 ←

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL
SAE viscosity classes Engine
The SAE classes (viscosity) should be se- The viscosity should be selected according to outside temperature. Do not switch to a
lected in accordance with the average sea- different viscosity in the event of brief temperature fluctuations.
sonal air temperature.
Applying the SAE classes exactly on the
basis of the outside air temperatures would
necessitate frequently changing the engine
oil. The temperature limits for the SAE
classes should therefore be regarded as
reference temperatures and the actual air
temperature may be higher or lower for a
short period of time.

GETtheMANUALS.org
11
INDEX

GETtheMANUALS.org
11–2 INDEX
4-wheel drive operation ...................... 2-17 Automatic transmission emergency shifting Cautions in using the turbocharger ....... 6-2
4-wheel drive switch - full-time procedure ............................................ 2-14 Center armrest (second seat) ............... 4-9
(TOD)* .................................................. 2-16 Automatic transmission fluid* .............. 8-10 Center armrest console ....................... 3-48
4-wheel drive switch - part-time* ....... 2-16 Automatic wiper control switch .......... 3-30 Certification label ................................. 10-4
4WD check warning light .................... 3-11 Chassis number ................................... 10-4
4WD high indicator B Child restraints .................................... 4-17
(for part-time 4WD) ............................. 3-12 Battery charge warning light ................ 3-8 Child security door locks ....................... 1-9
4WD low indicator ............................... 3-12 Battery maintenance ............................ 8-34 Cleaning agents ..................................... 9-2
Before driving off .................................. 1-2 Clutch fluid (for manual transmission) .. 8-12
A Before entering the car ......................... 1-2 Clutch pedal ......................................... 8-26
A note on safety ................................... 8-3 Before starting the engine ..................... 2-4 Coming on 4WD CHECK, 4WD LOW, 4WD
ABS warning light* .............................. 3-15 Brake fluid ........................................... 8-14 HIGH indicator while driving .................. 7-4
Air bag warning label .......................... 4-28 Brake pedal ......................................... 8-25 Coming on ABS/EBD warning light while
Air bag warning light* ......................... 3-16 Brake system warning light ................. 3-17 driving .................................................... 7-3
Air bag* ............................................... 4-24 Brake ................................................... 2-20 Coming on battery charge warning light
Air cleaner ........................................... 8-20 Bulb specification ................................ 8-41 while driving .......................................... 7-3
Air conditioner controls ......................... 5-5 Coming on brake system warning light
Air conditioner switch ........................... 5-8 C while driving .......................................... 7-3
Air source selection switch ................ 5-10 Cannot start the engine ......................... 7-4 Coming on engine check warning light
AMB switch ........................................... 5-7 Care and cleaning of the exterior ......... 9-3 (direct injection diesel and gasoline engine
Anti-lock brake system* (ABS) ........... 2-21 Care and cleaning of the interior .......... 9-2 equipped) .............................................. 7-4
Assist grip ........................................... 3-50 Care of seat belts ............................... 4-16 Coming on oil pressure warning light while
Auto shift indicator Catalytic converter .............................. 8-26 driving .................................................... 7-2
(for automatic transmission) ............... 3-11 Cautions in 4-wheel drive operation ... 2-18 Coolant ................................................ 8-17
Auto switch ........................................... 5-6 Cautions in replacing bulbs ................. 8-41 Corrosion protection .............................. 9-4
Automatic dimming inside Cautions in second seat folding Courtesy light ...................................... 3-46
rearview mirror* .................................. 3-44 operation ............................................. 4-12 Cruise control indicator*
Automatic door locking system ............. 1-5 Cautions in the power seat operation ... 4-5 (for gasoline engine) ........................... 3-20
Cruise control* ..................................... 3-37

GETtheMANUALS.org
INDEX 11–3
D E Front air bag/pretensioner may not be

triggered* ............................................. 4-29
Defogger indicator ............................... 3-12 EBD warning light* .............................. 3-15
Front and rear axle fluid ..................... 8-16
Defroster switch ................................... 5-8 Emergency towing ............................... 7-10
Front cigarette lighter .......................... 3-42
Digital clock .......................................... 3-33 Engine check indicator (direct injection
Front cup holder .................................. 3-47
Dimensions .......................................... 10-2 diesel and gasoline engine equipped) ... 3-9
Front electric socket ............................ 3-51
Direct injection diesel engine equipped Engine compartment .............................. 8-4
Front fog lamp switch ......................... 3-34
vehicle (general type) ........................... 3-4 Engine exhaust gas caution
Front head restraints ............................. 4-7
Direct injection diesel engine equipped (carbon monoxide) .............................. 2-27
Front passenger’s air bag* .................. 4-28
vehicle* (black-face type) ..................... 3-3 Engine hood ......................................... 1-13
Front room lamp ................................... 3-45
Direction control .................................... 5-3 Engine number ..................................... 10-3
Front room lamp ................................... 8-46
Door lock button .................................... 1-5 Engine oil pressure warning light .......... 3-8
Front seat back reclining adjustment
Door open warning light ...................... 3-13 Engine oil ........................................... 10-11
(manual seat) ........................................ 4-2
Drive belt ............................................. 8-25 Engine oil ............................................... 8-8
Front seat back reclining adjustment
Driver’s air bag* .................................. 4-27 ESP off switch* ................................... 2-18
(power seat)* ........................................ 4-3
Driver’s check list .................................. 8-3 ESP warning light* ............................... 3-14
Front seat back storage pocket ............ 4-6
Driver’s seat height adjustment
(manual seat) ........................................ 4-3 F Front seat slide adjustment
(manual seat) ........................................ 4-2
Driver’s seat height adjustment Fan speed control switch ..................... 5-6
Front seat slide adjustment
(power seat)* ........................................ 4-4 Finding defectives while driving ............ 7-2
(power seat)* ........................................ 4-4
Driver’s seat lumbar support ................. 4-6 Foldable outside rear view mirror ....... 3-36
Front seat warmer (power seat)* ........ 4-5
Driver’s seat tilt adjustment Folding second seat (from outside) .... 4-11
Fuel filler door release lever ............... 1-14
(power seat)* ........................................ 4-4 Folding second seat (from rear side) ... 4-9
Fuel filter ............................................. 8-23
Driving tips for automatic Folding third seat
Fuel gauge ............................................. 3-7
transmission* ....................................... 2-15 (making a luggage room) ..................... 4-13
Fuel recommendation ............................. 2-2
Driving with a manual transmission ....... 2-5 For getting maximum cooling and
Full flatting the seat ............................. 4-14
Driving with an automatic transmission* 2-6 heating ................................................. 5-11
Fuse box in engine compartment ........ 8-38
Fuse .................................................... 8-36

GETtheMANUALS.org
11–4 INDEX
G K Off switch ............................................. 5-8

Opening the door from inside ............... 1-8
Gasoline engine equipped vehicle* Key ........................................................ 1-3
Opening the door from outside ............. 1-8
(black-face type) ................................... 3-2 Kickdown function (BTRA: 4-speed) .. 2-13
Opening the tailgate .............................. 1-9
General .................................................. 5-2
Glass surfaces ..................................... 9-2 L Operating tips for ventilation system .. 5-10
Outside rear view mirror
Glove box ............................................ 3-46 Lap belt* .............................................. 4-22
control switch ..................................... 3-34
Glow indicator (for diesel engine) ...... 3-13 License plate lamp .............................. 8-45
Outside rear view mirror
Light switch warning chime ................ 3-27
H Light switch ......................................... 3-26
folding switch* .................................... 3-36
Outside rearview mirror & tail-gate glass
Hazard warning flasher switch .......... 3-33 Location of hydraulic jack ................... 8-27
defogger switch .................................. 3-36
Hazardous driving ............................... 2-28 Location of lamps ................................ 8-42
Overhead console ............................... 3-49
Head lamp ........................................... 8-43 Location of OVM tools and
OVM tools ........................................... 8-27
Headlight leveling switch* .................... 3-29 connecting rod .................................... 8-28
High beam indicator ............................. 3-18 Locking/unlocking doors with key P
High beam switch ................................ 3-28 (driver’s door) ....................................... 1-4
Parking aid system* ............................. 2-25
High mounted stop lamp ...................... 8-45 Low fuel level warning light ............... 3-13
Parking brake ....................................... 2-23
Horn switch ......................................... 3-45 Lubrication chart ................................. 8-53
Parking brake ....................................... 8-26
How to change a flat tyre ................... 8-31 Luggage cover (except for 7-seater) .. 3-48
Passenger’s seat side storage pocket .. 4-6
How to drain the water from fuel filter (direct
injection diesel engine equipped) ............ 3-19 M Passing light switch ............................ 3-28
Power mode indicator
Manual operation of each function ..... 5-11
I Manual transmission fluid .................... 8-11
(for automatic transmission) ............... 3-10
Power steering fluid ............................ 8-17
Ignition switch ....................................... 2-3 Mode switch ........................................ 2-11
Power sun roof* .................................. 1-15
Immobilizer system* ............................... 1-6 Mode switch .......................................... 5-9
Power window lock switch
Indirect injection diesel engine equipped Multi-meter* .......................................... 3-21
(on driver’s door panel) ...................... 1-11
vehicle (general type) ........................... 3-5
Inside rearview mirror ......................... 3-44 O Pregnant women ................................. 4-17
Preventive maintenance ........................ 6-3
Interior fuse box .................................. 8-37 Odometer/trip odometer ......................... 3-6

GETtheMANUALS.org
INDEX 11–5
R Seat belt height adjustor ..................... 4-24 T

Seat belt precautions .......................... 4-14
Rear air conditioner switch* ................. 5-7 Tachometer ............................................ 3-7
Seat belt reminder ................................. 3-9
Rear cigarette lighter ........................... 3-43 Tailgate lock button ................................ 1-6
Seat position memory setting and opera-
Rear combination lamp ........................ 8-44 Tailgate window washer switch ........ 3-32
tion* ..................................................... 3-41
Rear console box ................................ 3-47 Tailgate window wiper switch ............ 3-31
Seat under tray*
Rear cup holder ................................... 3-47 Tailgate window* ................................. 1-12
(for passenger’s seat) .......................... 4-7
Rear electric socket ............................ 3-51 Temperature control switch ................... 5-6
Seat warmer switch* .......................... 3-45
Rear fog lamp switch* ........................ 3-34 Temperature gauge ............................... 3-7
Seatbelt pretensioner (front seats)* .... 4-29
Rear head restraints (second seat) ...... 4-8 Third seat* (7-seaters) ........................ 4-13
Selector lever positions ......................... 2-7
Rear room lamp ................................... 8-46 Three point seat belt ........................... 4-21
Service precautions .............................. 8-2
Rear room/luggage room lamp ............. 3-46 Tiltable steering wheel ........................ 3-43
Side air bag* ........................................ 4-29
Rear three point seat belt (center) ..... 4-23 Towing a disabled vehicle ..................... 7-9
Side repeater lamp .............................. 8-45
Reclining rear seat back Trailer towing* ..................................... 7-11
Side vent - side bleed function ........... 5-11
(second seat) ........................................ 4-8 Transfer case fluid ............................. 8-13
Spark plugs (for gasoline engine) ....... 8-22
Remote keyless entry system Turbocharger inspection ....................... 6-4
Specifications ...................................... 10-5
(REKES)* ............................................... 1-3 Turn signal lamp and fog lamp ............ 8-44
Speedometer ......................................... 3-6
Removing the spare wheel ................. 8-31 Turn signal switch .............................. 3-28
SSPS warning light* ............................ 3-14
Replacing air conditioner filter ............. 5-12 Turn signal/hazard lasher indicator ..... 3-18
Starting the engine with jumper cables .. 7-5
Rheostat (black-face type)* .................. 3-6
Running-in period .................................. 1-2
Starting the engine ................................ 2-4 U
Storage box (for 7-seater) .................. 3-49
Unfolding second seat
S Suggestions for more economical opera-
(from rear side) ................................... 4-10
tion ....................................................... 2-27
Safety mode Unlocking switch on driver’s door ........ 1-6
Sun visors ........................................... 3-48
(5-speed automatic transmission) ....... 2-13
Scheduled maintenance services
Supplementary heating device (direct V
injection engine equipped vehicle) ...... 5-12
(diesel engine) ..................................... 8-47 Vent ....................................................... 5-3
Scheduled maintenance services Volume control ....................................... 5-3
(gasoline engine) ................................. 8-50

GETtheMANUALS.org
W
Washer fluid ........................................ 8-21
Water separator warning light (direct
injection diesel engine equipped) ........ 3-18
Wheels and tyres ................................ 8-28
When comes on the air bag
warning light* ...................................... 4-30
When the engine is overheating ........... 7-7
When the selector lever doesn’t move . 7-8
When using the seat belts .................. 4-16
Window switch (driver’s seat) ........... 1-10
Window switch
(except driver’s seat) .......................... 1-11
Windshield washer switch .................. 3-31
Windshield wiper switch ..................... 3-29
Winter mode indicator
(for automatic transmission) ............... 3-11
Wipers ................................................. 8-22

GETtheMANUALS.org
REXTON (RHD)
OWNER’S MANUAL
ISSUED BY
INTERNATIONAL A/S TEAM
SSANGYONG MOTOR CO., LTD.
150-3, CHILGOI-DONG, PYUNGTAEK-SI

GYEONGGI-DO, 459-711 KOREA
TELEPHONE : 82-31-610-2740
FACSIMILE : 82-31-610-3762
NOTE: All rights reserved. Printed in SSANGYONG Motor Co., Ltd.

No part of this book may be used or reproduced without the
written permission of International A/S Team.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EDITION HISTORY
No. CODE NO. PRINTING DATE MODEL YEAR REMARKS

1 RRX2-4OM3E-4E May. 2004 2004
2 RRX2-4OM4E-4G July. 2004 2004
3 RRX3-4OM4E-4H Sep. 2004 2004

GETtheMANUALS.org

2004-2005 Ssang Yong Rexton Y220 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2004-2005 Ssang Yong Rexton Y220 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FOREWORD

1. BEFORE DRIVING YOUR CAR ................................................................................................................ 1-1

RUNNING-IN PERIOD BEFORE ENTERING THE CAR BEFORE DRIVING OFF

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING

UNLOCKING SWITCH ON UNLOCKING SWITCH ON

Only valid ignition keys can be used to start CAUTION

OPENING THE DOOR FROM

OPENING THE DOOR FROM

WINDOW SWITCH (DRIVER’S

POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH WINDOW SWITCH (EXCEPT

FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE

POWER SUN ROOF*

Sliding the Sun Roof Tilting Up the Sun Roof CAUTION

BEFORE STARTING THE

DRIVING WITH A MANUAL

DRIVING WITH AN AUTOMATIC

4-speed automatic transmission

SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS

: when moving the lever to left (-) direction

• The gear is automatically downshifted to

Shift Lever Operation

WARNING (5-speed automatic transmission)

The vehicle can move suddenly when

SAFETY MODE (5-SPEED

DRIVING TIPS FOR AUTOMATIC

4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH - 4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH -

2. ‘4H’ (4-Wheel Drive, High)

2. ‘4L’ (4-Wheel Drive, Low)

4-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

CAUTIONS IN 4-WHEEL DRIVE

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM*

CAUTION Braking with ABS WARNING

Parking brake warning light and buzzer CAUTION CAUTION

PARKING AID SYSTEM*

• When the distance is between 50cm

C. Narrowed sensing scopes CAUTION

SUGGESTIONS FOR MORE ENGINE EXHAUST GAS

GASOLINE ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE*

1. Speedometer 10. Defogger indicator 19. Tachometer

DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE*

1. Speedometer 11. Glow indicator 20. Turn signal indicator (left)

DIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE

1. Speedometer 10. 4WD LOW indicator* 20. EBD waring light

INDIRECT INJECTION DIESEL ENGINE EQUIPPED VEHICLE

SPEEDOMETER ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER RHEOSTAT (BLACK-FACE TYPE)*

General Type General Type

TACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE FUEL GAUGE

General Type General Type

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE BATTERY CHARGE WARNING

ENGINE CHECK INDICATOR

POWER MODE INDICATOR

WINTER MODE INDICATOR AUTO SHIFT INDICATOR

DI engine or gasoline engine equipped vehicle

4WD HIGH INDICATOR

LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING GLOW INDICATOR

ESP WARNING LIGHT* SSPS WARNING LIGHT*

EBD WARNING LIGHT* ABS WARNING LIGHT*

CAUTION If this light illuminates while driving, a mal-

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT*

BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD WATER SEPARATOR WARNING

HOW TO DRAIN THE WATER FROM FUEL FILTER